Académique Documents
Professionnel Documents
Culture Documents
4 1
ThankyouforpurchasingtheKorgKRONOS.Tohelpyougetthemostoutofyournewinstrument,pleasereadthis manualcarefully.
Supplementary guides
Voice Name List
TheVoiceNameListlistsallofthesoundsandsetups thatareintheKRONOSwhenitisshippedfromthe factory,includingPrograms,Combinations, Multisamples,DrumSamples,DrumKits,KARMAGEs, WaveSequences,DrumTrackPatterns,TemplateSongs, andEffectPresets.
Operation Guide
Putsimply,theOperationGuideisdesignedtoanswer thequestion,HowdoIdothis? Itexplainsthenamesandfunctionsofeachpartofthe KRONOS,basicoperation,anoverviewofeachmode, howtoeditsounds,recordonthesequencer,sample,and soon.Thisguidealsoexplainsthebasicsofeffects, KARMA,DrumTrack,WaveSequences,andDrumKits. Finally,italsocontainsatroubleshootingguideand supplementalinformationsuchasspecifications.
Parameter Guide
TheParameterGuideisdesignedtoanswerthequestion, Whatdoesthisdo? Organizedbymodeandpage,theParameterGuide includesinformationoneachandeveryparameterinthe KRONOS.
PDF versions
TheKRONOSPDFmanualsaredesignedforeasy navigationandsearching.TheyincludeextensivePDF contentsinformation,whichgenerallyappearsonthe sideofthewindowinyourPDFreaderandletsyoujump quicklytoaspecificsection.Allcrossreferencesare hyperlinks,sothatclickingonthemautomaticallytakes youtothesourceofthereference.
Symbols
, Note, Tips
Thesesymbolsrespectivelyindicateacaution,aMIDI relatedexplanation,asupplementarynote,oratip.
MIDI-related explanations
CC#isanabbreviationforControlChangeNumber. InexplanationsofMIDImessages,numbersinsquare brackets[]alwaysindicatehexadecimalnumbers.
iii
Contents
About this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Effects .....................................66 AutomaticallyimportingaCombination into Sequencer mode .........................67 Savingyouredits ............................67
Introduction to KRONOS . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Front and rear panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Frontpanel ................................. 1 Rearpanel.................................. 8 TouchViewuserinterface .................... 10 Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 AbouttheKRONOSmodes.................. 13 AbouttheKRONOSPCMmemory ........... 16 Aboutpolyphony ........................... 16 Basicoperations............................ 17 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Turningthepoweron/off.................... 20 Connections................................ 20 Update information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Newfeaturesinsoftwareversion1.5 .......... 25
iv
DetailedSetListediting .................... 117 SetListsandtheControlSurface............. 118 Smooth Sound Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Overview................................. 120 UsingSmoothSoundTransitions ............ 120
Using Drum Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 DrumKitOverview ........................173 Beforeyoustartediting ................... 173 EditingDrumKits .......................... 174 SavingDrumKits ..........................176
Synchronizing KARMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 Synchronizationbasics ..................... 231 TheQuantizeTriggerparameter ........... 231 Slaveoperation ............................ 232 Masteroperation .......................... 232
Y(You)....................................263 Disk and Media information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264 TypesofmediasupportedbytheKRONOS ....264 OperationsthattheKRONOS can perform on media .......................264 Restoringthefactorysettings.................265 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Appendices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 Powersupply............................. 243 LCDscreen ............................... 243 Audioinputandoutput .................... 244 ProgramsandCombinations................ 245 Songs .................................... 246 SetLists .................................. 247 Sampling................................. 247 KARMA .................................. 248 DrumTrack ............................... 249 Vector .................................... 249 DrumKits ................................ 249 WaveSequences ........................... 249 Effects.................................... 249 MIDI ..................................... 250 Disks,CDs,andUSBMedia ................. 250 Otherproblems............................ 251 Error and confirmation messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 A(ADCAreYouSure) ..................... 252 B(Buffer)................................. 252 C(CantcalibrateCompleted)............... 252 D(DestinationDisk) ....................... 253 E(ErrorExceeded) ........................ 254 F(FileFront).............................. 255 I(IllegalIndex)............................ 256 H ........................................ 257 K........................................ 257 M(MasterMultisample) ................... 257 N(NodataNotenoughsongmemory)....... 258 O(ObeycopyrightrulesOscillator) .......... 260 P(PatternProgram) ....................... 260 R(RearsampleRoot) ...................... 261 S(SampleSource)......................... 261 T(TheclockTrack)........................ 262 U(UnabletocreatedirectoryUSBHub) ...... 262 W(Wave)................................. 263
vi
vii
Introduction to KRONOS
Front and rear panels Front panel
4. Disk Access Indicator 1. Volume 2. Control Surface 3. Data Entry 5. Mode 6. Utility 7. Bank Select
8. KARMA 9. Vector Joystick 10. Drum Track 11. SW 1&2 12. Joystick 13. Ribbon 19. TouchView Display
15. Exit
16. Sequencer
18. Sampling
17. Tempo
TIMBRE/TRACK
TIMBRE/TRACKletsyouusethecontrolsurfaceto adjustthevolume,pan,EQ,andsendlevelsforOSC 1/2,EXi1/2,ortheDrumTrackinProgrammode,the currentMultisampleinSamplemode,andeachofthe 16TimbresorTracksinCombiandSequencemodes. TheLEDstotherightoftheswitchshowwhether yourecurrentlyeditingTimbres(orTracks)18or916; presstheTIMBRE/TRACKbuttontotogglebetween thetwo.
2. Control Surface
TheControlSurfaceisthesetof9sliders,8knobs,and 16switchestotheleftoftheLCDscreen.Itlookslikea mixer,butcandoavarietyofthingssuchasediting sounds,controllingKARMA,andsendingMIDI messagestoexternaldevices.Youcanfreelychange backandforthbetweenthedifferentfunctionswithout losinganyofyouredits.
Introduction to KRONOS
Toresetasinglecontrol,holddownRESET CONTROLSandthenmoveaControlSurfaceslideror knob,pressoneofthecontrolsurfacebuttons,ormove theVectorJoystick. Toresetallofthesliders,knobs,andswitchesofthe currentCONTROLASSIGNmodeatonce,holddown RESETCONTROLSandthenpressthecurrentlylit CONTROLASSIGNbuttonagain. Youcanalsoresetalloftheslidersandswitchesinthe KARMAModulebyholdingRESETCONTROLSand thenpressingtheKARMAMODULECONTROL button.Similarly,toresetasingleKARMAScene,hold RESETCONTROLSandpressanyoftheSCENE buttons. Finally,youcanalsousethistoclearallsolos,by holdingRESETCONTROLSandthenpressingthe SOLObutton. Formoreinformation,seeRESETCONTROLSon page 22oftheParameterGuide.
AUDIO
AUDIOletsyouusethecontrolsurfacetoadjustthe volume,play/mutestatus,solo,pan,andsendlevelsof theanalog,S/P DIF,andUSBaudioinputs.In Sequencermode,youcanalsochoosetocontrolaudio tracks18(HDR18)or916(HDR916). AswithTIMBRE/TRACK,ifyouswitchtooneofthe otherControlAssignmodes,andthengobackto AUDIO,itwillautomaticallyreturntothepreviously selectedgroup(Inputs,HDR18orHDR916).
EXT
EXT(External)letsyouusethecontrolsurfaceto transmitMIDImessagestoexternalMIDIdevices.
RT KNOBS/KARMA
RTKNOBS/KARMAletsyoumodulatesoundsand effectswiththeknobs,andcontrolKARMAwiththe slidersandswitches.
SOLO button
ThisappliesonlywhenCONTROLASSIGNissetto TIMBRE/TRACKorAUDIO.IttogglestheSELECT buttonsbetweenselectingthecurrentOscillator, Timbre,Track,orAudioInput(whenSOLOisoff)or soloingthechannel(whenSOLOison). FormoreinformationonSOLOinthevariousmodes, see: Programs:SOLOswitchandSELECTswitches13 onpage 24oftheParameterGuide Combinations:SoloswitchandSelectswitches18 onpage 430oftheParameterGuide Sequencer:SoloswitchandSelectswitches1/98/16 onpage 536oftheParameterGuide
TONE ADJ/EQ
TONEADJ(ToneAdjust)givesyouhandsonaccessto soundediting,usingthesliders,knobs,andswitches. InCombiandSequencemodes,italsoletsyouedit ProgramswithinthecontextoftheCombiorSong, withoutmakinganychangestotheoriginalProgram data. EQisavailableonlyinSetLists.Thisisanineband graphicEQappliedtothesoundafterTFX2,which tailorsthesoundfromthemainstereooutputs (includingtheanalogL/Routputs,S/PDIF,andUSB). YoucanusethisEQtocompensatefortheacoustic environmentofaspecificcluborotherperformance venue.Theslidersaremappedtotheninebandsofthe EQ,forquickandintuitiveadjustments.
3. Data entry
WhenyouveselectedaparameterontheTouchView display,youcanedititusinganyofthefourfront paneldataentrycontrols: TheVALUEslider TheInc andDec buttons TheVALUEdial Thenumerickeypad
Front panel
VALUE slider
Usethistoedittheselectedparameters value.Thiscontrolisconvenientformaking largechangestothevalue,suchasmoving quicklytotheminimumormaximum setting. YoucanalsousetheVALUEsliderasa modulationsource,butonlywhenthe followingaretrue: YoureontheProgrammodeP0Main page,andthebigProgramnameis selected,or YoureontheCombinationmodeP0 ProgSelect/Mixerpage,andthebig Combinationnameisselected. YoureontheSetListP0Playpage. Inthesecasesonly,theVALUEslidersendsMIDI CC#18,andcanbeusedasamodulationsource.
5. MODE buttons
KRONOShassevendifferentoperationalmodes,each oneoptimizedforaspecificsetoffunctions.These buttonsselectthecurrentmode. EachbuttonhasanLED,whichlightsuptoshowthe modeyouveselected.
Inc
and Dec
VALUE dial
Usethisdialtoedittheselectedparametersvalue. Thiscontrolisconvenientwhenyouwanttoscroll throughaverylonglistofselections.
COMBI button
ThisselectsCombinationmode,forplayingand editingcomplexsplitsandlayersofPrograms.
PROG button
ThisselectsProgrammode,forplayingandediting basicsounds.
SAMPLING button
ThisselectsSamplingmode,forrecordingandediting audiosamplesandmultisamples.
GLOBAL button
ThisselectsGlobalmode,formakingoverallsettings, editingWaveSequencesandDrumKits,andmore.
DISK button
ThisselectsDiskmode,forsavingandloadingdatato andfromtheinternaldiskorexternalUSB2.0storage devices.YoucanalsocreateaudioCDsusingaUSB CDRdrive(notincluded).
6. UTILITY buttons
HELP button
TheHELPbuttongivesyoubuiltin, contextsensitiveaccesstotheuser manuals,rightfromthefrontpanel.
Introduction to KRONOS
Forinformationonanyfrontpanelbutton,knob, slider,orrealtimecontroller,justholddownHELP andthenpressthebuttonormovethecontrollerin question. ForinformationonthecurrentLCDpage,pressand releasetheHELPbutton. Whilethehelppageisonthescreen,youcantouchany oftheonscreenlinks(highlightedinbluetext)for moreinformation.Youcanscrollthroughthetextby usingtheonscreenscrollbars,pressingtheIncand Decbuttons,orspinningtheValuedial. ThetopoftheHelppagehasbreadcrumblinks, whichshowthehierarchyofpagesabovethecurrent one.Touchanyoftheselinkstojumptothe correspondingpage. Thebackwardsandforwardsbuttonsfunctionlikethe similarbuttonsonastandardwebbrowser.Ifyouuse linkstojumpbetweenpages,youcanthenusethe backwardsandforwardsbuttonstomovethroughthe pagesyouvealreadyviewed. TheContentspageletsyouaccessanypartoftheHelp system,includingalmostallofthetextandgraphicsin boththeParameterandOperationGuides.TheIndex containsashorterlistoflinkstoimportantarticles. Toclosethehelpdisplay,justpresstheHELPbutton again,presstheEXITbutton,orpresstheonscreen Donebutton.
8. KARMA buttons
KARMAstandsforKay AlgorithmicRealtimeMusic Architecture.Itsanimmensely powerfulrecordingandlive performancetool,whichcan provideawiderangeofmusical effectsincluding: Arpeggiation Drumandinstrumentgrooves ComplexCCgestures(asifit wasautomaticallymoving knobsorjoysticksforyou) Musicalphrasegeneration Gatedandchoppeddanceproductioneffects Anycombinationoftheabove andmuchmore.
COMPARE button
UsethisbuttontocomparethesoundoftheProgram orCombinationthatyouarecurrentlyeditingwiththe saved,uneditedversionofthesound.Youcanalsouse thisbuttontomakebeforeandaftercomparisons whenrecordingoreditinginSequencermode.
ON/OFF button
ThisswitchesKARMAonandoff.Aswiththeother KARMAbuttons,thebuttonsLEDwilllightupto showyouthatitisturnedon.
LATCH button
WhenLATCHisturnedon,KARMAwillcontinueto playevenafteryouvestoppedholdingnotesonthe keyboardorMIDIIn. Thisisconvenientwhenyouwanttoplayontopofa KARMAgeneratedgroove,forinstance.
Front panel
9. Vector Joystick
TheVectorJoystickisapowerfulrealtimecontroller. DependingontheparticularProgram,Combi,orSong, itmaymodulateProgramoreffectsparameters,or adjustthevolumesofdifferentcomponentsofthe sound. FormoreinformationonhowVectorSynthesisworks, seeUsingVectorSynthesisonpage 54.
JS+Y JSY
LINKED LED
IfthefrontpanelLINKEDLEDandKARMAON/OFF switchesarelit,KARMAwillstartandstoptogether withtheDrumTrack.Formoreinformation,see UsingKARMAandtheDrumTracktogetheron page 239.
12. Joystick
Thejoystickmovesinfourdirections:left,right, forwards(awayfromyourself),andbackwards (towardsyourself).Eachofthefourdirectionscanbe usedtocontroldifferentprogramoreffects parameters. Thespecificassignmentscanchangedependingonthe currentProgram,Combi,orSong.Generally,though, theywilldosomethinglikethefunctionsshown below: StandardJoystickfunctions Move the joystick
Left Right
Introduction to KRONOS
PAUSE button
InSequencermode,thisbuttonpausestheplaybackof thesong.Whenpaused,thebuttonsLEDwilllightup. PressPAUSEonceagaintoresumeplayback,andthe LEDwillturnoff. InDiskandSamplingmodes,thisbuttonpausesaudio CDplayback.
<<REW button
InSequencermode,whentheSongisplayingor paused,thisbuttonwillrewindthesong.Whenyou pressandholdthisbutton,itsLEDwilllightup,and theplaybackwillrewind.(Rewindisdisabledduring recording,andwhiletheSongisstopped.) InDiskandSamplingmodes,thisbuttonrewindsthe audioCD.
FF>> button
InSequencermode,whentheSongisplayingor paused,thisbuttonwillfastforwardthesong.When youpressandholdthisbutton,thebuttonwilllight, andtheplaybackwillfastforward.(Fastforwardis disabledduringrecording,andwhiletheSongis stopped.) InDiskandSamplingmodes,thisbuttonfastforwards theaudioCD.
LOCATE button
InSequencermode,thisbuttonwilladvanceorrewind thesongtothespecifiedlocatepoint.Thisletsyou jumpimmediatelytoanypointinthecurrentSong. Thedefaultlocatepointisthefirstbeatofmeasure1. Tosetthelocatepointtothecurrentposition,hold downENTERandthenpressLOCATE.Youcanalso settheLocatepointdirectlyviatheonscreenmenu.
REC/WRITE button
InSequencermode,pressingthisbuttonwillenter recordreadymode.Onceyoureinrecordreadymode (shownbythebuttonslitLED),youcanbegin recordingbypressingtheSEQUENCER START/STOP button.Formoreinformation,seeRecordingMIDIin realtimeonpage 78. InProgram,Combination,SetList,andGlobalmodes, pressingREC/WRITEwillopentheSavedialogbox. Formoredetails,seeWritingtointernalmemoryon page 178,andUsingtheSEQUENCERREC/WRITE buttononpage 178. InProgramandCombinationmodes,youcanhold downtheENTERbuttonandpresstheSEQUENCER REC/WRITEbuttontousetheAutoSongSetup function.ThisimportsthecurrentProgramorCombi intoSequencemodeforquickandeasyrecording.For moreinformation,seeAutoSongSetuponpage 2of theParameterGuide.
START/STOP button
InSampling,Program,Combination,andSequencer modes,pressingthiswhentheSAMPLINGREC buttonislitwilldooneofthreethings,dependingon thesettingoftheTriggerparameter(ontheSampling modeRecordingAudioInputpage): IfTriggerissettoSamplingSTARTSW,sampling willbeginimmediately.
START/STOP button
Thisstartsorstopsrecordingandplaybackin Sequencermode. InDiskandSamplingmodes,thisbuttonstartsand stopsplaybackontheaudioCD.
Front panel
IfTriggerissettoNoteOn,samplingwillbeginas soonasyouplayanoteonthekeyboard. IfTriggerissettoThreshold,samplingwillbegin assoonastheselectedaudiosourcereachesa presetvolumelevel. OntheSamplingmodesP1:SampleEditpage, pressingthisbuttonwillplaytheselectedsample. ThisbuttonisalsousedtoplaybackWAVfilesfrom thedisk.YoucanplaybackWAVfilesinthedirectory windowofvariousDiskmodepages,intheDiskmode MakeAudioCDpage,intheSequencermodeaudio trackeditingdialogboxes,andintheSelectDirectory menucommandoftheProgram,Combination, Sequencer,andSamplingmodes.
Shortcuts
Thefrontpanelcontrolsofferanumberofshortcuts forcommonlyusedfeatures,asdetailedbelow.
CONTROL ASSIGN RT KNOBS/KARMA switch (LED ON) + KARMA MODULE CONTROL switch
InCombinationandSequencermodes,thissetsthe ModuleControltoMaster.Thisisthesameassetting ModuleControltoMinP0:ControlSurface RT/KARMA.
CONTROL ASSIGN TONE ADJ/EQ switch (LED ON) + SWITCH 116 switches
InCombinationandSequencermodes,youcanusea shortcuttochangethecurrentTimbredirectlyfromthe ControlSurface,withoutleavingToneAdjustmode: 1. PressandholdtheTONEADJ/EQbutton. 2. WhileholdingTONEADJ/EQ,pressa PLAY/MUTEorSELECTbuttontoselectaTimbre. ThePLAY/MUTEbuttonsselectTimbres18,andthe SELECTbuttonsselectTimbres916. ThisisthesameastheselectedTimbre/Trackin TIMBRE/TRACKmode;changingonewillalsochange theother. 3. ReleasetheTONEADJ/EQbutton. TheControlSurfaceandscreenwillchangetoshow theToneAdjustparametersforthenewlyselected Timbre.
Introduction to KRONOS
Rear panel
2. Power Switch 3. USB 4. Analog Audio Inputs 5. Analog Audio Outputs
1. AC Power connector
1. AC Power connector
Connecttheincludedpowercablehere. Werecommendthatyoufirstconnectthepowercable totheKRONOS,andthenconnecttheotherendofthe cabletoanACoutlet(see1.Connectingthepower cableonpage 20).
2. POWER switch
Thisswitchturnsthepoweronandoff.Beforeturning KRONOSoff,makesurethatyouvesavedanyeditsto yourPrograms,Combis,Songs,orotheruserdata. Afterturningthepoweroff,pleasewaitforatleast tensecondsbeforeyouturnthepoweronagain. Inputs1and2provide1/4TRSbalancedconnectors. Youcanusetheseforeithermicrophonelevelorline levelsignals.Thetwoinputshaveidenticalsetsof controls,asdescribedbelow.
MIC/LINE switches
Thesesettheinputsnominalsignallevel.Setthese switchesaccordingtothetypeofdevicethatyoure connecting,andthenusetheLEVELknobs(described below)tooptimizethegain. UsetheLINEsetting(buttonpressedin)when connectingtomixers,computeraudiosystems,signal processors,orothersynthesizers.Thenominallevelis +4dBu,with12dBofheadroom. UsetheMICsetting(buttonpoppedout)onlywhen connectingamicrophone.
3. USB ports
USB A ports
Therearetwoexternal,highspeedUSB2.0ports.You canusethesetoconnectstoragemediasuchashard disks,flashmedia,etc,aswellasclasscompliantUSB MIDIcontrollers.Formoreinformation,see5. ConnectingUSBdevicesonpage 23.
LEVEL knobs
Theseknobsletyoumakemorepreciseadjustmentsto theinputlevel,aftersettingthebasiclevelswiththe MIC/LINEswitches. TheMINsettingisunitygain;theMAXsetting providesabout40dBofgainaboveunity.
USB B port
ThishighspeedUSB2.0portletsyouconnecttoaMac orWindowsPC,forsendingandreceivingMIDIand audio,andforconnectingtothecomputereditor program.Formoreinformation,see7.Connectionto acomputerviaUSBonpage 24.
Rear panel
YoucanusethistochainmultipleMIDIdevices together.
MIDI IN connector
Connecttheseoutputstotheinputjacksofyouramp ormixer.InadditiontotheL/MONOandRmain stereoaudiooutputs,theKRONOSprovidesfour individualaudiooutputs. Thesoundfromeachoscillator,drum,timbre/track,or inserteffectcanbefreelyroutedtoanyoutput. Additionally,youcanroutethemetronomesoundto anindividualoutput,toseparateitfromthestereo mix.Formoreinformation,seeEffectsselectionand routingonpage 198. ThisconnectorreceivesMIDIdata.Usethistoplaythe KRONOSfromanotherMIDIdevice,orfroman externalsequencer.
(MAIN) L/MONO, R
Thesearethemainstereooutputs;theirvolumeis controlledbytheMAINVOLUMEknob.Allofthe factoryProgramsandCombisareprogrammedtoplay throughtheseoutputs. Wheneditingsounds,orwhensettingupaSongin Sequencermode,youcanaccessthemainoutputsby settingBusSelecttoL/R. IfnocableisconnectedtotheRoutput,L/MONOwill carryamonosummationofthestereosignal.So,ifyou areconnectingtoadevicewhichdoesnothavestereo inputs(suchasasimplekeyboardamp),usethe L/MONOoutput.
Thesejacksprovide24bit,48kHzopticalS/P DIFinput andoutput,forconnectingtocomputeraudiosystems, digitalmixers,etc. OpticalS/P DIFissometimescalledTOSLINK,and formallynamed(holdyourbreath!)IEC60958,EIAJ CP1201.Makesuretouseopticalcablesdesignedfor digitalaudio. Wheneveryouusedigitalaudioconnections,make surethatallconnectedsystemsaresetsothatthereis oneandonlyonewordclockmaster.Youcansetthe wordclockfortheKRONOSusingtheGlobalpage SystemClockparameter.Formoreinformation,see SystemClockonpage 756oftheParameterGuide.
OUT(MAIN) jack
ThisopticalS/P DIFoutputcarriesadigitalversionof themainL/Routputs. NotethattheMAINVOLUMEknobdoesnotadjust theS/P DIFoutputlevel.
(INDIVIDUAL) 14
These4additionalaudiooutputsletyouisolate sounds,audioinputs,oraudiotracksforrecordingor complexlivesoundsetups. Thesecanbeusedasstereoormonooutputs,inany combination.YoucanalsousetheGlobalAudiopage LRBusIndiv.Assignparametertomapthemain stereooutputstoanyoftheseoutputpairs,ifyoulike. Notethattheindividualoutputsarenotaffectedbythe MAINVOLUMEknob.
IN jack
YoucanusethisopticalS/P DIFinputforrecording, sampling,andrealtimemixingthroughthebuiltin effects. ItcanbeusedsimultaneouslywiththeanalogandUSB audioinputs,ifyoulike.
6. MIDI
8. Pedals
DAMPER jack
Forthedamperalsoknownasthesustainpedalyou canconnecteitherastandardfootswitch,orKorgs specialhalfdamperpedal,theoptionalDS1H. TheDS1Hisacontinuouspedaldesignedspecifically forpianostyledampercontrol,withthelookandfeel ofanacousticpianossustainpedal.Itallowsmore subtlecontrolofthedamperthanasimpleswitch;the furtherdownyoupressthepedal,themorethatthe
Introduction to KRONOS
soundsustains.Formoreinformation,seeHalf DamperPedalandReleaseTimeonpage 40ofthe ParameterGuide. Youcanalsoconnectasimplefootswitch,whichwill workasastandardon/offdamperpedal. Inordertoensurethatthepedalfunctionscorrectly, pleaseadjusttheswitchpolarity(seeDamper Polarityonpage 778oftheParameterGuide)andthe halfdampersensitivity(seeHalfDamper Calibrationonpage 803oftheParameterGuide).
e: Knob
f: Slider
a: Current page
Fromtheleft,thetopofthedisplayshowsthecurrent Press here to scroll to left or right. mode,thenumberandnameofthepagegroup,and finallythenameoftheindividualpage.
Press here and slide to left or right to scroll to the desired location. Press here to scroll to the corresponding location.
Pin
ManypopupmenushaveaPininthe upperleft.Thiscontrolswhathappens afteryouselectavalue.Touchthepin graphictoswitchbetweenopen (unlocked)andclosed(locked).
Pin
d: b: Category button
10
Scroll bar
Usethiswhenyouwishtoseeparametervaluesthat extendbeyondwhatcanbedisplayedinthescreenat onetime.
Press here to scroll to left or right.
Dialog box
Press here and slide to left or right to scroll to the desired location. Press here to scroll to the corresponding location.
d: Edit cell
WhenyoutouchaparameterintheLCDscreen,the parameterorparametervaluewillusuallybe highlighted(displayedininversevideo).Thisiscalled theeditcell,andthehighlighteditemisnowselected forediting. Theparametervalueoftheeditcellcanbemodified usingtheVALUEcontrollers.Insomecases,youmay alsouseapopupmenu,asdescribedbelow. Forparametersthatacceptanotenumberoravelocity value,youcanalsoholddowntheENTERswitchand playanoteonthekeyboardtoenterthenotenumber orvelocityvalue.
j:
11
Introduction to KRONOS
f: Check box
Toggle buttons
Thistypeofbuttonwillchangeitsfunctionorswitch on/offeachtimeitispressed. Play/Rec/MutebuttonsinSequencermode: SoloOn/OffbuttonsinSequencermode:
Other objects
Check box
Eachtimeyoupressacheckbox,italternatesbetween thechecked(red)anduncheckedstates. Theparameterwillbeactiveifitischecked,and inactiveifitisunchecked.
EffectsOn/Offbuttons:
Radio buttons
Pressaradiobuttontoselectonevaluefromtwoor morechoices.
j: Radio buttons
f: Check box
Patch panels
TheMS20EXandMOD7useonscreenpatchpanels torouteaudioandcontrolsignals.Tomakea connectionbetweentwopatchpoints: 1. Touchoneofthetwojacks(eitherinputoroutput). Ayellowsquarewillappeararoundtheselectedjack. 2. Touchthesamejackagain. Theyellowsquarewillbegintoblink,showingthat youreabouttomakeaconnection.Tocancelthisand returntothenormalselectedstate,justtouchthesame jackathirdtime. 3. Touchtheotherjack. Thetwojackswillnowbeconnected. Todeleteaconnectionbetweentwopatchpoints: 1. Touchtheinputjack. Note:youcanalsoselecttheoutputjack.However,if theoutputisconnectedtomorethanoneinput,allof theconnectionsfromthatoutputwillbeaffected. 2. PresstheDisconnectbutton. Theselectedconnectionwillbedeleted.
12
Basic information
Combination mode
Combinationsaresetsofupto16Programsthatcanbe playedsimultaneously,lettingyoucreatesoundsmore complexthanasingleProgram.InCombinationmode, youcan: SelectandplayCombinations UseKRONOSasa16trackmultitimbraltone generator EditCombinations AssignProgramstoeachofthe16Timbres,each withseparatevolume,pan,EQ,andkeyboardand velocityzones;makesettingsforeffects,vector synthesis,DrumTrack,andKARMA. ControlandplayuptofourKARMAmodules Sampleorresample Forexampleyoucansampleanexternalaudio sourcewhilelisteningtotheperformanceofthe KARMA,orresampleaperformanceyouplayusing acombination.
Sequencer mode
Sequencermodeletsyourecord,playback,andedit MIDItracksandaudiotracks.Youcan: SelectandplaySongs EditSongs AssignProgramstoeachofthe16MIDITracks, withseparatevolume,pan,EQ,andkeyboardand velocityzones;makesettingsforeffects,vector synthesis,DrumTrack,andKARMA RecorduptosixteenMIDItrackssimultaneously Recorduptofourofthesixteenaudiotracks simultaneously,mixusingautomation,andimport WAVEfiles. ControlandplayuptofourKARMAmodules Sampleorresample Youcansampleanexternalaudioinputsource whileplayingasong,anduseInTrackSamplingto automaticallycreateanoteeventthattriggersthe sampleatthesametimeasitwasrecorded. Youcanalsoresampleanentiresong,andthenuse DiskmodetocreateanaudioCD. UseKRONOSasa16trackmultitimbraltone generator Recordpatternsandassignthemtoindividual keys,usingRPPR(RealtimePattern Play/Recording) CreateyourownDrumTrackPatterns
Program mode
ProgramsarethebasicsoundsofKRONOS.In Programmode,youcan: SelectandplayPrograms EditPrograms Makedetailedsettingsforoscillators,filters,amps, EGs,LFOs,effects,KARMA,vectorsynthesis,etc. Thespecificparameterswillvarydependingonthe synthesistype:HD1,AL1,CX3,STR1,MS20EX, PolysixEX,MOD7,EP1,orSGX1. Createdrumprogramsusingdrumkits(ascreated inGlobalmode) PlayandcontroloneKARMAmodule Sampleandresample Forexample,youcansampleanexternalaudio sourcewhilelisteningtoaperformancegenerated byKARMA,oryoucanplayaProgramand resampleyourperformance.
13
Introduction to KRONOS
Sampling mode
Samplingmodeletsyourecordandeditusersamples andmultisamples.Forexample,youcan: Sampleexternalaudiosources(i.e.,record samples),includingsamplingthrougheffects Editwaveformdatayousampledorloadedinfrom media,andsetlooppointsetc. Createandeditmultisamples,whichconsistofone ormoresamplesspreadoutacrossthekeyboard QuicklyconvertmultisamplesintoPrograms WithaUSBCDRdrive(notincluded),sample directlyfromaudioCDs
Global mode
Globalmodeletsyoumakeoverallsettingsforthe entireKRONOS,andeditwavesequencesanddrum kits.Forinstance,youcan: MakesettingsthataffecttheentireKRONOS,such asmastertuneandglobalMIDIchannel Setupsampleautoloadingatstartup Managecurrentlyloadedsamples Createuserscales CreateuserDrumKitsandWaveSequencesusing ROM,EXs,orRAMdrumsamples Renameprogram,combination,andKARMAGE categories Setthefunctionoftheassignablepedalsand assignableswitches TransmitMIDISystemExclusivedatadumps
Disk mode
Diskmodeletsyousave,load,andmanagedatausing theinternaldiskandexternalUSB2.0storagedevices. Youcan: SaveandloadPrograms,Combinations,Songs, Samples,andGlobalsetupdata Formatdisksandstoragemedia,copyandrename files,etc. LoadAKAI,SoundFont2.0,AIFF,andWAVE samples,andexportRAMsamplesinAIFFor WAVEformats ExportandimportsequencestoandfromSMF (StandardMIDIFiles) UsetheDataFilerfunctiontosaveorloadMIDI SystemExclusivedata WithaUSBCDRdrive(notincluded),createand playbackaudioCDs
14
Basic information
SET LIST Set List 000 ... 127 Multisample Slot 000 Slot 001
Slot 127
PROGRAM (EXi) EXi 1 AL-1 CX-3 EXi 2 AL-1 CX-3 AUDIO INPUT AUDIO INPUT 2 1 USB AUDIO IN USB AUDIO IN 1 2 S/P DIF IN S/P DIF IN L R PROGRAM (HD-1) Multisample Multisample Insert / Master / Final Effect Resampling IFX 1 MFX 1 MFX 2 TFX 1 IFX 12 TFX 2 Sample Sample MS3 (MS/WS) MS4 (MS/WS)
PITCH1
Insert / Master / Total Effect IFX 1 STR-1 MS-20EX PolysixEX MOD-7 EP-1 SGX-1 IFX 12 MFX 1 MFX 2 TFX 1 TFX 2
SAMPLING MODE
STR-1 MS-20EX
PolysixEX MOD-7
EP-1 SGX-1
KARMA Module A
Sample Multisample
Insert / Master / Total Effect MS5 (MS/WS) MS6 (MS/WS) MS7 (MS/WS) MS8 (MS/WS)
FILTER1 AMP1/ DRIVER1
IFX 1
IFX 12
TFX 2
KARMA Module A
OSC 2 MS1 (MS/WS) Drum Kit MS2 (MS/WS) MS3 (MS/WS) MS4 (MS/WS)
PITCH2
COMBINATION Insert / Master / Total Effect GLOBAL MODE DRUM KIT DS1 (DS/Sample) DS2 (DS/Sample) DS3 (DS/Sample) DS4 (DS/Sample) USB CD-R/RW DRIVE Ripping Key Assign DS5 (DS/Sample) Drum Kit DS6 (DS/Sample) DS7 (DS/Sample) DS8 (DS/Sample)
TIMBRE7 TIMBRE8 TIMBRE1 TIMBRE2 TIMBRE3 TIMBRE4 TIMBRE5 TIMBRE6
IFX 1
IFX 12
TFX 2
WAVE SEQUENCE
Drum Track
CD-ROM
Write Audio CD
MS
MS
MS
IFX 1
IFX 12
TFX 2
TRACK 8
Drum Track
Resampling
TRACK 8
15
Introduction to KRONOS
ROM
TheKRONOSROMcontainsthebasicmultisamples andsamples,andisalwaysloadedandavailable.
EXs
EXsstandsforEXpansionSamples.Thesecanbe loadedornot,asyouwish.TheKRONOScomeswitha numberofEXslibraries,includingmultiplegigabytes ofsamples.
RAM
RAMsamplesmaybeonesthatyoucreateyourself,or loadfromimportedAkaiorSoundFont2.0libraries,or WAVorAIFFfiles.
Lossless compression
WhenEXsdataisloadedintoRAM,theKRONOSuses alosslesscompressiontechnique.Thisyieldsamodest reductioninsize;forinstance,EXs1uses284MBof RAMfor313MBofdata.
About polyphony
Mosthardwaresynthesizersofferasingle,fixed methodofsynthesis,apredeterminednumberof voices,andafixedamountofeffectsprocessingpower foraspecificnumberofeffects.KRONOSisdifferent;it hasnofixedsynthesismethod,itspolyphonyvaries dependingonwhichsynthenginesarebeingused, somesynthenginesprovideadditionaleffects (augmentingthe16normaleffectsslots),andthereare sometimestradeoffsofprocessingpowerbetween voicesandeffects. Thisflexibilitymeansthatthesystemcandeliver powerwhereyouneeditthemost.Asyouplay differentsoundsfromdifferentsynthengines,the KRONOSautomaticallydividesitsprocessingpower appropriately. Unlikemostcomputerbasedsystems,KRONOSalso monitorstheoverallprocessingpower,reducingthe overallnumberofvoicesifnecessary,tomakesurethat thereareneverproblemswiththeaudio. Normally,youshouldntneedtothinkaboutthisatall; itwilljusthappenautomatically.Sometimes,however, itcanbeconvenienttoknowhowthesystemis allocatingitsresources.ThePerformanceMeterspage showsthisinformation;youcanfinditonthePerf MeterstabofP0inProgram,Combination,and Sequencermodes.Formoreinformation,see02: PerformanceMetersonpage 7oftheParameter Guide.
16
Basic information
Basic operations
Basic operations
AfteryouveturnedontheKRONOS,hereshowto performbasicoperationssuchasselectingmodesand pages.
1. Selecting modes
InordertouseaparticularfunctionontheKRONOS, youmustfirstselecttheappropriatemode. Pressoneofthefrontpanelmodebuttonstoenterthe correspondingmode.TheseincludeSETLIST, COMBI(Combinationmode),PROG(Programmode), SEQ(Sequencermode),SAMPLING,GLOBAL,and DISK.
3. Pressatabintheupperline(pagetabs)toselecta page.
2. Selecting pages
Eachmodehasalargenumberofparameters,which aregroupedintopages.Thesearefurthersubdivided bytabsintouptoninetabpages. 1. Selectthedesiredmode,asdescribedabove. WelluseProgrammodeasanexampleforour explanation,sopressthePROGswitch.
3. Editing parameters
Theparametervalueintheeditcellcanbesetbyusing thefrontpanelVALUEcontrollers(VALUEslider, / switches,VALUEdial,numerickeys09, switch,ENTERswitch,and(.)switch).Asnecessary, youcanalsousetheBANKswitchesandthe COMPAREswitch. Forsomeparameters,youcanusetheBANKSELECT switchestoselectthebankofaprogrametc.,orpressa popupbuttontoaccessapopupmenuwhereyoucan specifythevalueoftheparameter.Insomecases,you canholddowntheENTERswitchandplayanoteon thekeyboardtospecifyanoteoravelocityvalue.
17
Introduction to KRONOS
VALUE entry
VALUE slider
Usethiswhenyouwishtomakemajor changesinthevalue. InProgrammodeandCombinationmode, thisslidercanalsobeusedasacontrol sourceforalternatemodulationordynamic modulation.(ThisisactiveinProgramor CombinationP0:PlaywhentheProgram SelectorCombinationSelect(thelarge charactersintheupperpartoftheLCD)is selected). /
Wheneditingaprogramorcombination,pressthis switch.TheLEDwilllight,andthelastwrittensettings forthatprogramnumberorcombinationnumberwill berecalled.WhenyoupresstheCOMPAREswitch onceagain,theLEDwillgodarkandyouwillreturnto thesettingsthatyouwereediting. Ifyoueditthesettingsthatarerecalledbypressingthe COMPAREswitch(i.e.,thesettingsthatarewritten intomemory),theLEDwillgodark,anditwillnotbe possibletoreturntothepreviouseditsbypressingthe COMPAREswitchagain. InSequencermode,youcanusetheCOMPAREswitch tomakebeforeandaftercomparisonsimmediately afterusingrealtimerecordingorsteprecordingto recordasong,orafterperformingatrackedit operation. Forexample,thiscanbeusedeffectivelywhen realtimerecordingatrackforasong. 1. RealtimerecordaMIDItrack.(Take1) 2. Onceagain,realtimerecordonthesametrack. (Take2) 3. PresstheCOMPAREswitch.TheLEDwilllight, andtake1willberecalled. 4. PresstheCOMPAREswitchonceagain.TheLED willgodark,andtake2willberecalled. 5. Ifatstep3youonceagainrealtimerecordonthe sametrack(take3),theobjectoftheCompare functionwillnowbetake1.
buttons
Usethesewhenyouwishtomakesmall changesinthevalue.
VALUE dial
Usethiswhenyouwishtomakelarge changesinavalue.
Keyboard input
Whenenteringanotenumberoraspecificvelocityas thevalueofaparameter,youcanusethekeyboardto inputthesetting.HolddowntheENTERswitchand playthenotethatyouwishtoenterasavalue.The notenumberorvelocityvaluewillbeinput. WhentheGlobalP5:DrumKitpageisdisplayed,you canholddowntheENTERswitchandplayanoteto recallthesettingsthathavebeenassignedtothatnote. (Iftheparameteryouveselectedexpectsyoutoentera velocityvalue,thevelocityyouplayedwillbeentered.) InSamplingmode,youcanholddowntheENTER switchandplayanotetorecalltheindexthatis assignedtothatnote. Usethiswhenyouwishtocomparetheeditsyouhave madetoaprogramorcombinationssoundwiththe uneditedoriginal(i.e.,thesoundthatiswritteninto memory).
COMPARE switch
18
Basic information
Basic operations
UserDrumTrackpatterns:seeConvertinga Sequencerpatternto a Drum Track patternon page 241 Preset/userDrumTrackpatternsaresavedininternal memoryevenwhenthepoweristurnedoff.Patterns youcreateinSequencermodecanbeconvertedinto userDrumTrackpatternsandsavedininternal memory. Usertemplatesongs:seeSavingyourown TemplateSongsonpage 78 Preset/usertemplatesongsaresavedininternal memoryevenwhenthepoweristurnedoff.Track settingsandeffectsettingsofasongyoucreatecanbe savedininternalmemorybythemenucommandSave TemplateSong. Formoreinformation,seeWritingtointernal memoryonpage 178andSavingtodisks,CDs,and USBmediaonpage 182.
19
Introduction to KRONOS
Connections
Connectionsmustbemadewiththepowerturned off.Pleasebeawarethatcarelessoperationmay damageyourspeakersystemorcausemalfunctions. 1. ConnecttheAUDIOOUTPUT(MAIN)L/MONO andRoutputstotheinputsofyourampormixer. IfyoureusingKRONOSinstereo,useboththe (MAIN)L/MONOandRjacks.Ifyoureusing KRONOSinmono,useonlythe(MAIN)L/MONO jack. 2. UsetheMAINVOLUMEknobtoadjustthe volume. TheMAINVOLUMEknobaffectsonlythemainstereo outputsandtheheadphones;itdoesnotaffectthe individualoutputs,theS/P DIFoutput,ortheUSB output.
20
Setup
Connections
InsertEffectoutputs IndividualProgramsinaCombinationorSong(or thesumoftheProgramsoscillatorsinProgram mode) Audiotracks Audioinputs Youcanusethesetoisolateorgrouptogethersounds forrecording,orforcomplexliveperformancesetups. 1. Connectthe(INDIVIDUAL)14outputstothe yourampormixerinputs. 2. UsetheBusSelectparameterstosendthedesired sounds,audiotracks,inputs,oreffectstothe individualoutputs,aseithermono(14)orstereo (1/2and3/4)signals. Ifthesignalisgoingthroughoneormoreinserteffects, theoutputissetatthelastIFXinthechain,viatheBus SelectparameterontheP85InsertFXpage. IfaProgram,Timbre,orTrackisnotgoingthroughany inserteffects,theoutputissetusingtheBusSelect parametersontheP81or82Routingpage.
Toassignaudioinputsdirectlytooutputs,useBus SelectparametersintheP0AudioInput(Sampling) page. InGlobalmode,theAudiopageL/RBusIndiv.Assign settingletsyoumirrortheMAINstereoL/Routputon anypairofindividualoutputs.Youcanusethisto createaprivatemonitoringsetupinliveandstudio environments.Formoreinformation,seeL/RBus Indiv.Assignonpage 761oftheParameterGuide. Note:TheMAINVOLUMEknobdoesntaffectthe volumeoftheindividualoutputs.
Headphones
1. Ifyoureusingheadphones,connectthemtothe KRONOSheadphonejack. 2. UsetheVOLUMEslidetoadjustthevolumeofthe headphones.TheKRONOSheadphonejack outputsthesamesignalasthe(MAIN)L/MONO andRjacks. Tip:Tomonitorthesignalsfromtheindividual outputs,useanexternalmixer.
2. Analog audio output connections
INPUT Monitor OUTPUT
U 10 +10dB 60 -40dB
MIC1
MIC2
MIC3
MIC4
MIC5
MIC6
AUX SEND
1 L
TAPE INPUT
TAPE OUTPUT
MAIN OUTS
2 R
LEFT(1/MONO)
BAL OR UNBAL BAL OR UNBAL BAL OR UNBAL BAL OR UNBAL BAL OR UNBAL BAL OR UNBAL
RIGHT MONO
ALL BAL/UNBAL
BAL/UNBAL
MONO
MONO
MONO
L
LINE IN 1
LOW CUT 75Hz 18dB/OCT
L
BAL OR UNBAL
L
BAL OR UNBAL
L
BAL OR UNBAL
LINE IN 2
LOW CUT 75Hz 18dB/OCT
LINE IN 3
LOW CUT 75Hz 18dB/OCT
LINE IN 4
LOW CUT 75Hz 18dB/OCT
LINE IN 5
LOW CUT 75Hz 18dB/OCT
LINE IN 6
LOW CUT 75Hz 18dB/OCT
BAL OR UNBAL
R
LEVEL +4 -10
R
LEVEL +4 -10
R
LEVEL +4 -10
R
LEVEL +4 -10
+10dB
+10dB
+10dB
+10dB
10
60 -40dB
PHONES
TRIM
TRIM
TRIM
TRIM
TRIM
TRIM
LINE IN 7-8
LINE IN 9-10
LINE IN 11-12
LINE IN 13-14
AUX 1
MON/ EFX
+15
AUX 1
MON/ EFX
+15
AUX 1
MON/ EFX
+15
AUX 1
MON/ EFX
+15
AUX 1
MON/ EFX
+15
AUX 1
MON/ EFX
+15
AUX 1
MON/ EFX
+15
AUX 1
MON/ EFX
+15
AUX 1
MON/ EFX
+15
AUX 1
MON/ EFX
+15
+10
+20
1
NORMALLED
U
EFX
U
EFX
+15 +15
U
EFX
+15 +15
U
EFX
+15 +15
U
EFX
+15 +15
U
EFX
+15
AUX1MASTER
EFX
EFX
EFX
EFX
2 AUX RETURNS
Mixer
7. Connections to computers
Computer
+15
EQ
HI 12kHz
EQ
HI 12kHz
EQ
HI 12kHz
EQ
HI 12kHz
EQ
HI 12kHz
EQ
HI 12kHz
EQ
HI 12kHz
EQ
HI 12kHz
EQ
HI 12kHz
EQ
HI 12kHz
SOURCE
MAIN MIX
LEFT
+28 +10 +7
RIGHT
CLIP
-15
+15
-15
+15
-15
+15
-15
+15
-15
+15
-15
+15
-15
+15
-15
+15
-15
+15
-15
+15
U MID 2.5kHz
-12 +12 -12
U MID 2.5kHz
+12 -12
U MID 2.5kHz
+12 -12
U MID 2.5kHz
+12 -12
U MID 2.5kHz
+12 -12
U MID 2.5kHz
+12 -12
U MID 2.5kHz
+12 -12
U MID 2.5kHz
+12 -12
U MID 2.5kHz
+12 -12
U MID 2.5kHz
+12
ALT 3-4
+4 +2
U LOW 80Hz
-15 +15 -15
U LOW 80Hz
+15 -15
U LOW 80Hz
+15 -15
U LOW 80Hz
+15 -15
U LOW 80Hz
+15 -15
U LOW 80Hz
+15 -15
U LOW 80Hz
+15 -15
U LOW 80Hz
+15 -15
U LOW 80Hz
+15 -15
U LOW 80Hz
+15
TAPE
0 -2 -4 -7
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
SOLO
MODE
MUTE
A LT 3 4
MUTE
A LT 3 4
MUTE
A LT 3 4
MUTE
A LT 3 4
MUTE
A LT 3 4
MUTE
A LT 3 4
MUTE
A LT 3 4
78
910
MUTE
A LT 3 4
1112
MUTE
A LT 3 4
1314
MUTE
A LT 3 4
POWER
RUDESOLOLIGHT
/ PHONES
dB
MAIN MIX
10 5 U 5 10 20 30 40 50 60
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
10 5 U 5 10 20
SOLO
10 5 U 5 10 20 30 40 50 60
SOLO
10 5 U 5 10 20 30 40 50 60
SOLO
10 5 U 5 10 20 30 40 50 60
SOLO
10 5 U 5 10 20 30 40 50 60
SOLO
10 5 U 5 10 20 30 40 50 60
SOLO
10 5 U 5 10 20 30 40 50 60
SOLO
10 5 U 5 10 20 30 40 50 60
SOLO
10 5 U 5 10 20 30 40 50 60
SOLO
10 5 U 5 10 20 30 40 50 60
SOLO
10 5 U 5 10 20 30 40 50 60
30 40 50 60
Mic
Effect unit
USB cable
AUDIO OUTPUT
PHONES
5. Pedal connections
ASSIGNABLE PEDAL ASSIGNABLE SWITCH
to an AC outlet Synthesizer
DAMPER
21
Introduction to KRONOS
1. Useanopticalcabletoconnecttheopticaldigital outputofyourdigitalaudiodevicetotheS/P DIF INjackoftheKRONOS. 2. SetSystemClock(ontheGlobalP0:BasicSetup page)toS/P DIF. 3. Afterturningonthepower,usetheAudioInput pagetosetupthevolume,pan,busrouting,and sendlevelsfortheinputs,asdesired. Formoreinformation,see08:Audio Input/Samplingonpage 14oftheParameterGuide. YoucanusetheS/P DIFinputssimultaneouslywith theanalogandUSBinputs.
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2
Thesetwoinputsuse1/4TRSbalancedjacks,and includepreampswithadjustablegain.Tosetupthe audioinputs: 1. Connectyourmicsortheoutputjacksofyour externalaudiosourcestotheINPUT1and2jacks. 2. SettheMIC/LINEswitchasappropriateforthe deviceyouveconnected,andusetheLEVELknob toadjustthegain. ChoosetheLINEsetting(switchpressedinward)if youveconnectedamixer,computer,audiosystem, signalprocessor,oranothersynthesizer.Forbest results,usebalancedlineconnections. Note:Guitarswithactivepickupscanbeconnected directly.Guitarswithpassivepickups(i.e.,guitarsthat donothaveaninternalpreamp)canbeused,butthe impedancemismatchwillcausebothachangeintone andareductioninvolume.Forbestresults,routesuch guitarsthroughapreamporeffectsunitbefore connectingthem. ChoosetheMICsetting(switchintheoutward position)onlywhenconnectingamic.Notethatsome microphones,suchascondensers,mayrequireexternal phantompower,whichisnotsuppliedbythe KRONOS. 3. Adjusttheoutputlevelonanyconnectedexternal equipment. 4. Afterturningonthepower,usetheAudioInput pagetosetupthevolume,pan,busrouting,and sendlevelsfortheinputs,asdesired. Formoreinformation,see08:Audio Input/Samplingonpage 14oftheParameterGuide.
22
Setup
Connections
YoucanalsoplaythechordpadsusingKorgUSB MIDIcontrollersequippedwithdrumpads,including: nanoPADandnanoPAD2 microKONTROL padKONTROL KONTROL49 Whenthesecontrollersareconnected,theKRONOS willautomaticallydeterminetheMIDIassignmentsof thecontrollerspads18,andmapthemdirectlytothe KRONOSpads. Formoreinformation,seeUSBMIDIcontrollerson page 1126oftheParameterGuide.
Hot-plugging
TheKRONOSsupportsUSBhotplugging.Thismeans thatyoucanconnectordisconnecttheUSBcablewhile thepowerison. Note:Inordertousehotplugging,theUSBdeviceyou areconnectingmustalsosupporthotplugging.
USB Power
SomeUSBdevicesgettheirpowerfromtheUSB connection.Thesearecalledbuspowereddevices, andtheyaresupportedbytheKRONOS. OtherUSBdevicesmayrequireaseparatepower source,inadditiontotheUSBconnection;inthiscase, youllneedtouseanappropriatepoweradaptorfor thedevice. Thereisalimitationtothetotalcurrentsuppliedtoall connectedUSBdevices,asdefinedbytheUSB specification.Ifthetotalcurrentconsumptionofthe connecteddevicesexceedsthislimit,theKRONOS maynotcorrectlyrecognizetheconnectedUSB devices.Ifthishappens,anerrormessageofUSBHub PowerExceeded!willappear. Toavoidthisproblem,ifyouconnectmorethanone USBdevice,pleaseuseaselfpoweredUSBhubinself poweredmode.Fordetailsonconnectionsandsettings foryourhub,pleaserefertoitsdocumentation. Fordetailsontheelectricalcurrentusedbyaspecific USBdevice,refertoitsownersmanual.
Type B
23
Introduction to KRONOS
24
Update information
25
Introduction to KRONOS
26
Selecting Programs
ThereareseveraldifferentwaystoselectPrograms. Eachoneisconvenientinadifferentway: Usingthefrontpanelbuttons,valueslider,and valueknob,youcanselectProgramsquicklyvia physicalcontrols SelectingbyBankandnumber(viathetouch screen)letsyoubrowsethroughallofthePrograms inmemory,tofindtheonethatyouwant SelectingbyProgramcategory(viathetouch screen)letsyoufilterProgramsbysoundtype,such asPianosorDrums UsingafootswitchletsyouchangeProgramseven whilebothhandsarebusyplayingonthekeyboard convenientforliveapplications MIDIprogramchangemessagesletyouselect Programsremotely,fromeitheraMIDIsequencer oranexternalMIDIcontroller Programbankcontents Bank
INTA INTBF GM (I-G) g(1)g(9) g(d) USERA USERB USERC USERD USERE USERF USERG
Contents
SGX-1, EP-1, and best of all other EXi HD-1 Programs GM2 main Programs GM2 variation Programs*1 GM2 drum Programs*1 HD-1, including Ambient Drums and Sound Effects AL-1 AL-1 and CX-3 STR-1 MS-20EX & PolysixEX MOD-7 Initialized HD-1 Programs
Bank Type
EXi HD-1
GM
Set Lists
ProgramscanalsobeselectedinSetLists,alongwith CombinationsandSongs.Formoreinformation,see SetListsonpage 113.
27
Inthisillustration,bankINTAisselected.Theliston therightshowstheProgramscontainedinthatbank. 2. Pressthetabsontheleftsideofthedisplayto selectabank. Therearemorebanksthancanbeshownatonetime, sothebanksaredividedintotwogroupsoftabs:INT AUSERGandUSERAAUSERGG. 3. Ifnecessary,usetheMorebuttonsbelowthe tabstoswitchbetweenshowingthetabsforINT AUSERGandUSERAAUSERGG. 4. PressoneoftheProgramnamesinthelisttoselect aProgram. TheselectedProgramwillbehighlighted,andthe keyboardwillimmediatelyswitchtothenewsound. 5. Ifyoulike,playafewnotestohearthenew Program. YoucanplaythenewProgramwhilethemenuisstill showing,withoutneedingtopressOK. 6. WhenyouaresatisfiedwiththeselectedProgram, presstheOKbuttontoclosethepopupmenu. IfyoupresstheCancelbutton,theselectionyoumade herewillbediscarded,andyouwillreturntothe programthathadbeenselectedbeforeyouopenedthe menu.
28
Playing Programs
Selecting Programs
Selecting by Category
YoucanselectProgramsfromwithinacategory,such askeyboard,organ,bass,anddrums.Whenshipped fromthefactory,theProgramsareorganizedinto16 categories,eachwithseveralsubcategories.Thereare also2morecategories,initiallynamedUser16and User17,whichyoucanuseandrenameasdesired. 1. PresstheCategorypopupbutton. TheCategory/ProgramSelectdialogappears. Category/ProgramSelectmenu
2. TouchtheFavoritebox,underneaththeTempo parameter,sothattheboxisfilledinwithared square(thisshowsthattheboxischecked). 3. WritetheProgram. Thisisanimportantstep.Ifyoudontwritethe Program,thechangetotheFavoritescheckboxwont beretained. FordetailsonhowtowritePrograms,seeSavingyour editsonpage 42.
29
windowisopen).However,assigningtheFootSwitch totheIncorDecbuttonletsyoustepthroughtheitems inthelist,onebyonejustlikepressingthefront panelbuttons. Tosetthisup: 1. Followsteps14underAssigningthefootswitch toProgramUp/Down,above. 2. Atthetopofthepage,settheFootSwitchAssign parametertoValueInc(orValueDec). Forthissettingtopersistafterpowerdown,youneed towritetheGlobalsettings. 3. Openthemenu,andselecttheWriteGlobal Settingcommand. TheWriteGlobalSettingdialogwillappear. 4. PressOK,andthenOKagaintoconfirm. Now,thefootswitchwillactjustlikepressingthe frontpanelIncorDecbutton. Note:Thefootswitchwillworklikethisfortheentire KRONOSnotjustwhentheProgramorCombination Selectwindowisopen.
Bank Map
BankSelectmessagescanworkinoneoftwoways,as controlledbytheBankMapparameterontheGlobal P0BasicSetuppage.Thefactorydefaultsettingwill workformoststandardapplications,andmostpeople willneverneedtochangeit.IfyouuseGeneralMIDI sequences,thealternativeGM(2)settingmaybe helpful.Formoreinformation,seeBankMapon page 755oftheParameterGuide.
MIDI filters
YoucanuseMIDIfilterstocontrolwhetherornot ProgramChangeandBankSelectmessageswillbe transmittedand/orreceived.Thefiltersaresetupon theGlobalmodeP1MIDIpage.Formoreinformation, see11c:MIDIFilteronpage 772oftheParameter Guide.
30
Playing Programs
Using Controllers
Using Controllers
TheKRONOSprovidesalotofhandsonwaysto controlthesoundthemodandpitchbendjoystick, theVectorjoystick,theribboncontroller,twoswitches (SW1andSW2),andtheControlSurfaceknobs, sliders,andswitches. Thesecontrolsletyoumodifythetone,pitch,volume, effects,etc.inrealtimewhileyouplay.
Vector Joystick
TheVectorJoystickletsyou controlthevolumebalance betweenOSC1andOSC2,and canalsogenerateCC messagestomodulate Programandeffects parameters. InCombiandSequencemodes,theVectorJoystickcan doallofthis,plusbalancethevolumesofthedifferent ProgramsintheCombi. TheVectorJoystickdoesallofthisinconjunctionwith theVectorEnvelope,whichisaflexible,multisegment envelopewithafewinterestingtwists.Formore information,seeUsingVectorSynthesisonpage 54.
Joystick
Ribbon Controller
Moveyourfingertotheleftandrightontheribbon controllertoapplyaneffect. Normally,thisisusedtocontrolpitch,volumeorfilter etc. YoucanusetheLockfunctionofSW1orSW2keysto holdtheeffectevenafteryoureleaseyourfingerfrom theribboncontroller.Formoredetails,seeUsingthe Lockfunctiononpage 32.
Pitch bend down Pitch bend up Vibrato Filter LFO (wah)
Joystick Lock
Thejoystickisspringloaded,sothatitautomatically returnstothecenterpositionwhenyouletgo. However,youcanuseeitherofthetwofrontpanel switches(SW1orSW2),orafootswitch,tolockthe currentpositionofthejoystick.Thisleavesyourhands freetoplayonthekeyboard,ortouseother controllers.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeUsing theLockfunctiononpage 32.
31
EachProgram,Combination,andSongstoresitsown settingsforwhattheswitcheswilldo,andwhether eachswitchisonoroff(basedontheircurrentstates whentheProgram,Combination,orSongissaved). YoucanalsomakesettingsforSamplingmodeasa whole. InProgrammode,youcanchecktheassignmentsof SW1andSW2onthePlaypageAssignmenttab. Inallmodes,youcanedittheassignmentsforSW1/2 ontheSetUpControllerspage.
Programs (HD-1 and EXi) Combinations and Songs Sampling mode P1: Basic/Vector P1: EQ/Vector/Controller P4: EQ/Controller
WhenusingSW1/2forAMSorDmod,thedefault settingsareSW1Mod.:CC#80andSW2Mod.:CC#81. Foranexample,seeUsingDmodtochangethe feedbacklevelviaSW1onpage 205.Foracomplete listofthepossibleassignments,seeSW1/2 Assignmentsonpage 1102oftheParameterGuide. Note:Ifyouwishtokeepthesesettingsafterthepower isturnedoff,youmustsavetheProgram, Combination,orSong.SettingsforSamplingmode cannotbesaved. AnexampleofsettingsinaProgram
Youcanalsolockboththeribbonandthejoystickat thesametime: 1. Movethejoystickinthe+Ydirection 2. PresstheSW2keytoturnontheLockfunction. 3. Moveyourfingerontheribboncontroller. 4. Releasethejoystick,andliftyourfingerupfrom theribbon. Theeffectsofboththeribbonandthejoystickwillbe maintaineduntilyoupressSW2againtoreleasethe lock. Lockcanalsobeappliedtoaftertouch,byassigning SW1orSW2toAfterTouchLock. FordetailsonthefunctionsthatyoucanassigntoSW1 andSW2,pleaseseetheSW1/2Assignments,on page 1102oftheParameterGuide.
32
Playing Programs
Using Controllers
2. WhileholdingdownRESETCONTROLS,movea sliderorknob,orpressoneofthecontrolsurface buttons. Theslider,knob,orswitchwillberesettothevalue storedintheProgram(or,ifapplicable,thedefault value). 3. Whenyouredone,releasetheRESET CONTROLSbutton. Toresetagroupofcontrolsatonce: 1. MakesurethattheControlSurfaceisshowingthe parametersyouwanttoreset. Asasafetyprecaution,youcanonlyresetthe parameterscurrentlydisplayedontheControlSurface. ThistakesintoaccountboththecurrentControlAssign setting,andtheMIXERKNOBSbutton. Forinstance,ifyouwanttoresetthevolumeandpan forbothOscillators,makesurethatControlAssignis settoTIMBRE/TRACK,andthatMIXERKNOBSisset toINDIVIDUALPAN. 2. HolddowntheRESETCONTROLSbutton. 3. WhileholdingdownRESETCONTROLS,press thecurrentControlAssignbuttonagain. Allofthesliders,knobs,andswitchesintheControl Assigngroupwillberesettothevaluesstoredinthe Program. Youcanalsoresetallofthefadersandswitchesinthe KARMAmodule,byholdingRESETCONTROLSand thenpressingtheKARMAMODULECONTROL button.Similarly,toresetasingleKARMAScene,hold RESETCONTROLSandpressanyoftheSCENE buttons. Finally,youcanalsousethistoclearallsolos,by holdingRESETCONTROLSandthenpressingthe SOLObutton. Formoreinformation,seeRESETCONTROLSon page 22oftheParameterGuide.
VALUE slider
WhenaprogramnumberisselectedinProgramP0: Playpage,orwhenacombinationnumberisselected inCombinationmodepageP0:Playpage,youcanuse theVALUEslidertomodulateProgramandeffects parameters.
Keyboard Velocity
Velocityisameasureofhowhardyouplayanoteon thekeyboard.Thiscanbeusedtomodulatemany differentaspectsofthesound,suchasvolume, brightness,orthecharacteroftheattack.
After Touch
Thekeyboardcanalsomeasurehowhardyoupress downafteryouplayanotehencethetermafter touch.Youcanusethistoshapenotesovertime, controlling(forinstance)volumeorvibratoamount.
33
Note Number
Soundscanbeprogrammedtochangeincharacter basedonthenotebeingplayed.Asyouplayhigheror loweronthekeyboard,thenotenumbercanmodulate thetimbresuchasbecomingbrighterasyouplay higher.Envelopesmayalsobecomefasterorslower; thevolumemaychange;andsoon.
34
Playing Programs
35
Copying pads
Copyingonepadtoanotherisjustlikeassigningnotes fromthekeyboard. Aswithassigningnotestothekeyboard,youcan eitherplaythepadsfirst,orpressChordAssignfirst. Intheinterestofsavingspaceandtime,onlythefirst methodisdescribedbelow.
Fixed Velocity
Eachpadstoresavelocitylevelforeachofits8notes. TheFixedVelocitybutton,onthedisplayabovethe pads,controlswhetherornotthepadsrespondtothe touchlocation. WhenFixedVelocityison,thepadsalwaysusetheir storedvelocitysettings,regardlessofwhereyoutouch thepad. WhenFixedVelocityisoff,touchingthetopofthepad producesthepresetvelocities.Whenyouplaylower onthepad,thepresetvelocitiesarescaleddown accordingly,maintainingthebalancebetweenthenotes inthechord.
Chord Switch
TheChordSwitch(abbreviatedChordSW)letsyou turnChordmodeonandoffviaSW1/2ortheFoot Switch. Important:ProgramswillonlyrespondtotheChord SWiftheirChordparameterhasbeensettoeither BasicorAdvanced.IfitssettoOff,thentheswitch willhavenoeffect.
36
Playing Programs
2. SelectChordSWastheassignmentforSW1or SW2.
What if Timbres/Tracks share the same channel, but have different Chord settings?
IfTimbres/Trackssharethesamechannel,buthave differentChordsettings,thentheChordSWaffects eachTimbre/Trackindividually,asbelow: Stored Setting Off Chord SW = On Off Chord SW = Off Off Basic
Basic Off
Advanced
Advanced Off
Selecting chords
TheChordfunctionusesthechordsassignedtothe Pads.Toselectachordtoplayfromthekeyboard(or viaMIDI): 1. SelectthedesiredpadfromtheSourcepopup menu or: WhenChordisenabled,pressapad. WhenChordmodeisenabled,pressingapadeditsthe Sourceparameter.Thepadwillnotplayanysounds byitself;itonlyselectsthechordtobeplayedfromthe keyboard.
37
ChordmodeisenabledwhentheChordSWiseither unassignedorturnedOn,and... InProgrammode,ChordissettoBasicor Advanced InCombimode,ChordissettoBasicorAdvanced onanyTimbre(withStatussettoINT)onthe Globalchannel InSequencermode,ChordissettoBasicor AdvancedonanyTrack(withStatussettoINTor BTH)onthesameMIDIchannelasthecurrent KeyboardTrack InCombimode,selectionviathePadsaffectsall TimbresontheGlobalChannel.InSequencermode, thisaffectsTracksonthesameMIDIchannelasthe currentKeyboardTrack.
What if Timbres/Tracks share the same channel, but have different Source settings?
IfTimbres/Trackssharethesamechannelbuthave differentSourcesettings,theywillmaintainthe differentsettingsaslongasthePadsarenotusedto selectadifferentchord.AssoonasaPadisused,allthe Timbres/Trackswillbesettothesamechordunless theyaresettoPRG. WhenSourceissettoPRG,theTimbre/Trackusesthe SourcechordstoredintheProgram,insteadofanyof thechordsfromthecurrentCombiorSong.This makesiteasytouseChordmodeforsoundspecific effects,suchasoctaves,stackedfifths,andsoon.
Playing chords
Thelowestnoteoftheselectedchordistransposedto matchthenoteplayedonthekeyboard.Highernotes aretransposedaccordingly.Forinstance,letssaythat: ThestoredchordisF4,Bb4,andEb5 YouplayaD3onthekeyboard(orviaMIDI) Inthiscase,theresultingchordwillbeD3,G3,andC4. JustaswiththePads,thestoredvelocitiesarescaledby thevelocityoftheplayednote. InCombiandSequencermodes,aslongastheroot noteofthechordiswithintheTimbre/Trackkeyboard zone,theentirechordwillbeplayedinthat Timbre/Trackevenifsomeofthenotesextendbeyond theTimbre/Trackskeyzone.
38
Easy Program Editing Quick edits using the knobs, sliders, and switches
YoucaneditanyoftheProgramsshippedwith KRONOS,oryoucanstartwithaninitializedProgram tocreatesoundsfromscratch. Youcandomanybasiceditsdirectlyfromthefront panelControlSurfaceknobs,switches,andsliders, withouteverdelvingdeeperintotheLCDinterface. Forinstance,youcanusetheknobstochangeattack andreleasetimes,makesoundsbrighterordarker, altereffectsdepths,modulateKARMAsphrase generation,andsoon. Theknobs,sliders,andswitches willdodifferentthings,depending oftheControlSurfaceCONTROL ASSIGNsetting.Forediting Programs,thethreeimportant CONTROLASSIGNsettingsare TIMBRE/TRACK,RT KNOBS/KARMA,andTONE ADJ/EQ. TIMBRE/TRACKletsyouadjust thevolume,pan,andsendlevels forOscillators1and2andthe DrumTrack,alongwiththe ProgramEQ. RTKNOBS/KARMAletsyou modulatesoundsandeffectswiththeknobs,and controlKARMAwiththeslidersandswitches. TONEADJ/EQ(ToneAdjust)givesyouhandson accesstomoredetailedsoundediting,usingthe sliders,knobs,andswitches. Note:EQisonlyavailableinSetListmode.Formore information,seeGraphicEQonpage 119. 6. PresstheMIXERKNOBSbutton untiltheCHANNELSTRIPLED lightsup. Thismakestheknobscontrolavirtual channelstrip,includingpan,EQ,and effectssends. 7. Useknobs26toadjustthePrograms3bandEQ. TheEQaffectsbothOSC1andOSC2.Noticethatthe displayshowsyouthegainvaluesindB,andtheMid FrequencyinHz.Alsonotethatknob2,EQTrim,lets youcompensateforgainchangescausedbytheEQ.
8. PressSELECTbutton1.
ThisselectsOSC1.WhentheknobsareinCHANNEL STRIPmode,theselectedOscillatorisimportant. WhileEQalwaysappliestobothOscillators,thePan andEffectsSend1/2knobsaffectonlytheselected Oscillator. NoticethatPanisavailable,indifferentways,with bothsettingsoftheMIXERKNOBSbutton. 9. Useknobs7and8toadjustEffectsSends1and2 forOSC1. Internally,thesystemfiguresouthowtheOscillatoris routedtotheMasterEffects,andautomaticallyadjusts theappropriatesendparameters.
39
RealTimeKnobfunctions Knob
1 2 3 4 5-6 7 8
6. HoldtheRESETCONTROLSbutton. Normally controls 7. WhileholdingRESETCONTROLS, movefirstknob1,andthenknob2. Asyoumovetheknobs,theirvalueswill beresettothedefault,centerpositions. 8. ReleasetheRESETCONTROLS button. Now,yourebacktotheoriginalelectricpianosound.
MIDI CC
74 71 79 72
Varies for each Program Often Chorus Depth - but can vary per Program Often Reverb Depth - but can vary per Program
Whenyoumoveaknob,itsendsoutthecorresponding MIDICC.Also,whentheCCisreceivedviaMIDIor generatedbyKARMA,theknobvaluechangesto matchtheCCvalue. Generally,theknobsscaletheProgramsinternal settings.Whentheknobisinthecenter,thesettingsare asprogrammed.Tomovethesettingstotheir maximumvalue,turntheknoballthewaytotheright; tomovethemtotheirminimumvalue,turntheknob allthewaytotheleft. Knobscaling
99 Parameter Value
As Programmed
00 0 64 CC Value 127
Forexample: 1. SelectProgramINTB017,SmoothOperators. Thisisanelectricpianosound;letsseewhatwecando tomakeitsoundabitdifferent. 2. PresstheRTKNOBS/KARMAbuttonunder CONTROLASSIGN. TheTONEADJUSTLEDwilllightup. 3. Whileplayingthesound,turnknob1(Filter Frequency)totheright,slowly,toabout3oclock. Noticehowthepianobecomesasortofsynthsweep. 4. Next,turnknob2(FilterResonance)totheright, alsotoabout3oclock. 5. Withknob2inthatposition,trymovingknob1 backandforthasyouplay. Withtheresonanceincreased,itnowsoundslike youreplayingthroughawahpedal. Next,letssaythatyoudecidethatsnotreallywhat youwantedso,wellsettheknobsbacktotheir defaultvalues.Youcouldmovethembacktothe straightup,12oclockposition,andthenadjustthem sothattheyreexactlyinthemiddle,buttheresan easierway
WhenusingtheknobsforAMSorDmod,its importanttounderstandthatassignmentisatwostep process.First,youassigntheknobtosendaMIDI controller,suchasKnobMod.1(CC#17).Second,you assignthatMIDIcontrollertomodulateoneormore Programoreffectsparameters. Forthefirstpartoftheabove,usethemodesSetUp Controllerspage.Formoreinformation,SeeSW1and SW2onpage 31. Thedefaultassignmentsforknobs58areKnobMod.1 (CC#17),KnobMod.2(CC#19),KnobMod.3(CC#20), andKnobMod.4(CC#21),respectively.Foracomplete listofthepossibleassignments,seeRealtimeKnobs 58Assignmentsonpage 1103oftheParameter Guide. Heresanexampleofhowtosetupknob5(User1)to controlaProgramsfilterandampEGattacktime: 1. PressthePROGswitchtoenterProgrammode. 2. PresstheBasic/Vectortab,andthenthe Controllerstababoveit,togototheP1: Basic/VectorSetUpControllerspage. 3. PresstheModulationKnobAssignKnob5 popupbutton,andchooseF/AAttack. 4. PressthefrontpanelRTKNOBS/KARMAbutton (underCONTROLASSIGN). 5. Turnknob5(USER1)tocontrolthefilterandamp EGattack.
40
Noticethatthesoundhaschangedfromanelectric pianointoasoftpad.Next,letsaddjustabitofpitch modulation,tomakethesoundmorerich. 7. Lookattheassignmentsforknobs2and5. Knob2isassignedtoPitchLFO1Intensityinother words,theamountofpitchmodulationfromLFO1. Knob5isassignedtoLFO1Speed. 8. Turnknob2eversoslightlytotheright,sothat theLCDreads+01or+02. 9. Turnknob5totheright,untilabout2oclock,so thattheLCDreadsabout40. 10.Playafewmorenotes. Thepitchmodulationhasaddedsomeshimmertothe sound.Now,maybeitcoulduseabitmoreedge 11.LookattheassignmentsforSELECTswitches1 and2. TheseareprogrammedtoraisetheFilterFrequency andFilterResonance,respectively.Switchesarejust on/off,butyoucansetaspecificvaluefortheOn position;noticethe+10and+40intheswitchsvalue boxes. 12.Pressthetwoswitches,onebyone. Thesoundnowhasamoreinterestingcharacter,due tothefilters.Sinceitsbrighter,wevealsorestored someoftheelectricpianocharacter. Prettyeasy,huh?Notedependingontheparameter, youmaysometimeshearglitchesinthesoundasyou movethecontrol.
41
3. Afterenteringthename,pressOK. Thetexteditwindowwilldisappear,returningyouto themainWritedialog. 4. UnderToatthebottomofthedialog,pressthe popupbuttonnexttoProgramtobringupthesave locationdialog. 5. SelectalocationtosavetheeditedProgram. YoucanwritetoanylocationinbanksINTAF, USERAG,andUSERAAGG.Toavoid overwritingthefactorysounds,itssafertouseaslotin oneoftheemptyUserbanks. Important:HD1Programscanonlybewrittento HD1Banks,andEXiProgramscanonlybewritten toEXiBanks.Formoreinformationonthedefault Banktypes,andonhowtochangethem,pleasesee ProgramBankContentsonpage 27,and ChangingtheBankTypeforUSERbankson page 27. 6. Afterselectingthelocation,pressOK. 7. PressOKagaintostartthewriteprocess. 8. Ifyouresureyouwanttowritetothislocation, pressOKagain. Afterthat,youredone! Formoreinformation,seeWritingProgramsand Combinationsonpage 178. Donotturnoffthepowerforatleast10seconds afterwritingtheProgram.Thisallowsthesystem timetocompletetheprocess,whichincludessaving abackupofthedatatotheinternaldisk.
Using COMPARE
Whenyoureintheprocessofeditingasound, pressingtheCOMPAREbuttonwillrecallthesaved versionofthesound,asitwasbeforeyoustarted editing.Toindicatethatyouarelisteningtothesaved version,thebuttonsLEDwilllightup. PressingCOMPAREagainreturnsyoutotheversion youareediting,andtheLEDwillgooutagain. IfyoueditwhiletheCOMPARELEDislit,thekeywill againgodarkandyourpreviouseditswillbelost.
Saving to disk
42
Main features
Select Master send effects and Total effects, and adjust their settings.
Fordetailsonhowtoselectthedifferentpages,see Basicoperationsonpage 17. YoucansamplefromwithinProgrammode includingresamplingtheProgramitself.Formore information,seeSamplinginProgramand Combinationmodesonpage 148. Youcanalsomixinliveaudioinputs,andprocess themthrougheffects.Formoreinformation,see Usingeffectswiththeaudioinputsonpage 203. NotethatthepageandparameterstructuresofEXi ProgramsaredifferentthanthoseofHD1Programs.
P0: Play
Oscillator Mode
HD1SingleProgramshaveoneoscillator,andDouble Programshavetwooscillators.Eachoscillatorincludes acompletesynthesisvoice,withvelocityswitched Multisamples,dualfilters,EGs,LFOs,andsoon. SingleandDoubleDrummodesaresimilar,butuse DrumKits(ascreatedinGlobalmode)insteadof Multisamples. SingleandSingleDrumProgramsuseoneoscillator, foramaximumof140notepolyphony. DoubleandDoubleDrumProgramsusetwo oscillators,foramaximumof70notepolyphony.
P1:Basic/ Vector
Select Multisamples, Wave Sequences. or Drum Kits P2: Osc/Pitch Settings related to the pitch, including the pitch EG. P3: Filter P4: Amp/EQ Settings related to the filter (tone), including the filter EG. Settings related to the amplifier (volume), including amp EG and pan. Settings for the 3-band EQ For each of the two LFOs provided for each oscillator, select the LFO type and speed, etc. (Settings in the pitch, filter, and amp pages determine how much the LFOs affect the sound.) Mix and modify AMS sources using the two AMS mixers provided for each oscillator. Set up how the Common Key Track output changes as you play up and down the keyboard Settings related to KARMA. Select insert effects and make settings for them. Specify send levels to the Master effects and routing to the outputs.
P6: AMS Mixer/ Common Key Track P7: KARMA P8: Insert Effects
43
Program Basic: P1 - 1
Vector: P1 - 5, 6 KARMA: P7
Controllers: P1 - 8 Pads: P1 - 9
Audio Input: P0 - 8
Common LFO: P5 - 9 OSC1 LFO1: P5 - 1 OSC1 LFO2: P5 - 2 Master Effects 1, 2: P9 Insert Effects 112: P8 Total Effects 1, 2: P9
Routing: P8-1
Filter1(A/B): P3 - 1
3Band EQ : P4 - 9
OSC1, 2
Insert Effects Master Effects Individual Outputs Filter1 EG: P3 - 4 AMS Mixer: P6 - 1 Amp1 EG: P4 - 3 REC Bus FX Control Bus OSC 1 OSC 2
Pitch EG : P2 - 9
Common KeyTrack: P6 - 9
Oscillator / Pitch
Filter
Amplifier
EQ
Effects
P11, P22, etc. indicate the on-screen pages and tabs used when editing on the KRONOS.
44
Selecting Multisamples
Letscreateasimplevelocitycrossfadebetweentwo Multisamples,usingjustOSC1. 1. GototheOSC1BasictaboftheOSC/Pitchpage. 2. SettheMS1andMS2Typeparametersto Multisample. 3. SettheTypesforMS38toOff. 4. SelectROMStereoastheMultisampleBankfor MS1andMS2. TherearethreemaintypesofMultisampleBanks: ROM,RAM,andEXs.Foreachtype,youcanalso choosebetweenlookingatmonoandstereo Multisamples.NotethatstereoMultisampleswill requiretwiceasmanyvoicesasmonoMultisamples. ROMMultisamplesarethebuiltinfactorysounds, andarealwaysavailable.Theseareorganizedby category,suchaspianos,guitars,bells,etc. RAMMultisamplesincludeAkai,SoundFont2.0,AIFF orWAVfilesloadedfromdisk,aswellasnative KRONOSsamples(includingthirdpartysound librariesandsamplesthatyoucreateyourself). EXsMultisamplebanksarePCMexpansionsets createdespeciallyfortheKRONOS.Eachhasitsown uniquenumber;forinstance,theROMExpansionis EXs1,andtheConcertGrandPianoisEXs2.Onlythe currentlyloadedEXsbankswillappearinthismenu. 5. PresstheMultisamplepopupforMS1. ThisbringsupalistofMultisamples,organizedby category.Usethetabsattheleftofthescreentobrowse throughthedifferentcategories.
6. SelectaMultisamplebytouchingitsnameinthe list. 7. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmyourselection. 8. DothesameforMS2. NowthatyouveassignedMultisamplestoMS1and MS2,letssetupthevelocityrangesandcrossfades. 9. SetMS2sBottomVelocityto001,anditsXfade Rangeto0. 10.SetMS1sBottomVelocityto80. Now,MS2willsoundwhenyouplaysoftly,at velocitiesof79orlessandMS1willsoundwhenyou playharder,withvelocitiesof80ormore. Youcanalsoseethissplitvisually,inthegraphiconthe rightsideoftheLCD. 11.Next,setMS1sXfadeRangeto20,anditsCurveto Linear. Noticethatthegraphicnowshowsthetworanges taperingintooneanother.Between80and100,MS2 willfadeout,andMS1willfadein,creatingagradual velocitytransitioninsteadofahardsplit. 12.Ifyoulike,adjusttheLevelsforthetwo Multisamples.
45
7. UsetheFrequencyparametertosetthespeedof theLFO. 8. UsetheFadeandDelaysettingstocontroltheway theLFOsoundsatthebeginningofthenote. FormoreinformationonLFOs,seeProgramP5:LFO onpage 92oftheParameterGuide. AlloftheseparameterscontrolthewaythattheLFO itselfworks.InorderfortheLFOtoactuallyaffectthe sound,youcanusethededicatedLFOroutingsonthe Filter,Pitch,andAmppages,orusetheLFOsasAMS sourcesforawidevarietyofparameters.
Frequency Modulation
AMScanbeusedtovarytheLFOspeed.Thisletsyou changetheLFOspeedbyoperatingacontroller,orby theEGorKeyboardTracksettings.
Thereareanumberofwaveformstochoosefrom.Each aresuitedtodifferentapplications: TriangleandSinearetheclassicLFOshapesfor vibrato,tremolo,panning,andfilterwaheffects. Squareisusefulforgatedfilterandampeffects, andcreatesapolicesireneffectwhenmodulating pitch. TheGuitarwaveformisdesignedespeciallyfor guitarvibrato,sinceitbendsonlyupwardsfrom thebasevalue. SawandExponentialSawDownaregoodfor rhythmicfilterandampeffects. Random1(S/H)createstheclassicsampleand holdeffect,whichisgreatformodulatinga resonantfilter. 4. Afterlookingatthedifferentwaveforms,select Triangle. 5. SelecttheShapeparameter,andusetheVALUE slidertomovethroughitsdifferentsettings,from 99to+99. Noticehowtheshapeofthewaveformbecomesmore curved,andhow99emphasizesthelowerpartofthe shape,and+99emphasizestheupperpart. 6. SelecttheStartPhaseparameter,andusethe VALUEslidertosweepthroughitsrangeof values. Noticehowthewaveformshiftsfromsidetoside. Amongotherthings,thisletsyouoffsettheLFOsfrom oneanotherintime,whichcancreateinteresting organiceffects.
MIDI/Tempo Sync.
IfMIDI/TempoSyncischecked,theFrequency settingwillbeignored,andtheLFOwillsynchronize tothesystemtempo,assetbytheTEMPOknobor externalMIDIclocks. Thisletsyouproducevibrato,wah,autopan,or tremoloeffectsthatlocktotheDrumTrack,KARMA, WaveSequences,theinternalsequencer,orexternal MIDIsequencers.
Sustain Level
Release Level
Slope Time
46
AMSMixerAmtAxBexample
AMS A: LFO
AMS B: EG
Smoothing
TheSmoothingTypesmoothsouttheAMSinput, creatingmoregentletransitionsbetweenvalues.You haveseparatecontroloftheamountofsmoothing duringtheattack(whenthesignalisincreasing)and decay(whenitsdecreasing). Lowsettingsprovidesubtlecontrollersmoothing, creatingmoregradualaftertouch,forinstance.Higher settingscreateautofadeeffects,transformingaquick gestureintoalongerfadeinand/orfadeoutevent. Smoothingcanalsobeusedtoaltertheshapeof programmablemodsources,suchasLFOsandEGs. Forinstance,youcanturnablipintoasimple envelopeshape,asshownbelow. AMSMixerSmoothingexamples
Original AMS A: Smoothing with Long Attack and Short Release:
AMS B: EG
A+B Output
47
Generatingastaticvalueonpage 104
Controlling Pitch
Pitch bend
TheJS(+X)andJS(X)settingsspecifytheamountof pitchchange(insemitones)thatwilloccurwhenMIDI pitchbendmessagesarereceivedorwhenthejoystick ismovedtoleftorright.Asettingof+12allowsthe pitchtobecontrolledamaximumofoneoctave upward;asettingof12allowsthepitchtobe controlledamaximumofoneoctavedownward. Ribbonspecifiestheamountofpitchchange(in semitones)thatwilloccurwhenMIDIcontrolchange (CC)#16messagesarereceived,orwhenyoumove yourfingerleftandrightontheribboncontroller.With asettingof+12,thepitchwillberaisedoneoctaveat thefarrightoftheribboncontroller,andwillbe loweredbyoneoctaveatthefarleftoftheribbon controller. Intensity(AMSIntensity)specifiesthedepthof vibratothatwillbeappliedbytheLFOwhen modulatedbytheselectedAMS(AlternateModulation Source).Forexample,ifLFO1AMSissettoAfter TouchandyousetanappropriatevalueforIntensity, vibratowillbeappliedwhenyouapplypressuretothe keyboardorwhenMIDIaftertouchmessagesare received.
Pitch EG
WhentheIntensityvalueissetto+12.00,thepitchEG specifiedinthePitchEGpagewillproducea maximumof1octaveofpitchchange. Torealisticallysimulatetheslightchangeinpitchthat occurswhenastringispluckedorattheattackofa brassorvocalsound,youcanusetheEGtocreatea subtlechangeinpitchattheattack.
Creating Vibrato
YoucanuseanLFOtocreatevibrato. LFO1/2Intensitysetsthedepthtowhichtheselected LFOwillaffectthepitch.Withasettingof+12.00, vibratowillproduceamaximumof1octaveofpitch change. JS+YIntspecifiestheamountofvibratothattheLFO willproducewhenthejoystickispushedawayfrom yourself.
Portamento
Portamentomakesthepitchchangesmoothlywhen youplaythenextnotebeforereleasingtheprevious note. TheTimeparametercontrolshowlongittakethepitch tochange.Asthisvalueisincreased,thepitchwill changeoveralongertime.Withavalueof000,there willbenoportamento. YoucanturnPortamentoonandoffviaSW1orSW2, byassigningthemtoPorta.SWCC#65.
Using Filters
Thefiltersallowsyoutodiminishoremphasize specifiedfrequencyareasofthesound. Thetoneofthesoundwilldependsignificantlyonthe filtersettings. Thebasicfiltersettings,includingtherouting,type, cutofffrequency,andresonance,aresetontheP3: Filterpage. TheSingleroutingusesonlyFilterAasasingle2pole, 12dB/octavefilter(6dBforBandPassandBandReject). TheSerialroutingusesbothFilterAandFilterB.The oscillatorfirstgoesthroughFilterA,andthenthe outputofFilterAisprocessedthroughFilterB. ParallelalsousesbothFilterAandFilterB.The oscillatorfeedsbothfiltersdirectly,andtheoutputsof thetwofiltersarethensummedtogether. The24dB/4poleroutingmergesbothfilterstocreatea single4pole,24dB/octavefilter(12dBforBandPass andBandReject).IncomparisontoSingle,thisoption producesasharperrolloffbeyondthecutoff frequency,aswellasaslightlymoredelicate resonance.Manyclassicanalogsynthsusedthis generaltypeoffilter.
Filter Routing
Eachoscillatorhastwofilters,FilterAandFilterB.The Routingparametercontrolswhetheroneorbothofthe filtersareused,andifbothareused,itcontrolshow theyareconnectedtoeachother.
48
Using Filters
SerialandParallelRouting
FilterTypesandCutoffFrequency
Oscillator
Low Pass
High Pass
Band Pass
Band Reject
Filter Types
Thisselectsthepartsofthesoundwhichwillbe affectedbythefilter,asdescribedbelow.Withthe SerialandParallelroutings,youcanindependentlyset thetypesforFilterAandFilterB. Thefilterswillproduceverydifferentresults dependingontheselectedfiltertype.Theselections willchangeslightlyaccordingtotheselectedFilter Routing,toshowthecorrectcutoffslopeindBper octave. LowPass.Thiscutsoutthepartsofthesoundwhich arehigherthanthecutofffrequency.LowPassisthe mostcommontypeoffilter,andisusedtomakebright timbressounddarker. HighPass.Thiscutsoutthepartsofthesoundwhich arelowerthanthecutofffrequency.Youcanusethisto maketimbressoundthinnerormorebuzzy. BandPass.Thiscutsoutallpartsofthesound,both highsandlows,exceptfortheregionaroundthecutoff frequency.Sincethisfiltercutsoutbothhighandlow frequencies,itseffectcanchangedramatically dependingonthecutoffsettingandtheoscillators multisample. Withlowresonancesettings,youcanusetheBand Passfiltertocreatetelephoneorvintagephonograph sounds.Withhigherresonancesettings,itcancreate buzzyornasaltimbres. BandReject.Thisfiltertypealsocalledanotchfilter cutsonlythepartsofthesounddirectlyaroundthe cutofffrequency.Trymodulatingthecutoffwithan LFOtocreatephaserlikeeffects.
Cutoff Frequency
Resonance
Resonanceemphasizesthefrequenciesaroundthe cutofffrequency,asshowninthediagrambelow.
Low resonance
High resonance
49
Keyboard Track
Mostacousticinstrumentsgetbrighterasyouplay higherpitches.Atitsmostbasic,keyboardtrackingre createsthiseffectbyincreasingthecutofffrequencyof alowpassfilterasyouplayhigheronthekeyboard. Usually,someamountofkeytrackingisnecessaryin ordertomakethetimbreconsistentacrosstheentire range. TheKRONOSkeyboardtrackingcanalsobemuch morecomplex,sinceitallowsyoutocreatedifferent ratesofchangeoveruptofourdifferentpartsofthe keyboard.Forinstance,youcan: Makethefiltercutoffincreaseveryquicklyoverthe middleofthekeyboard,andthenopenmore slowlyornotatallinthehigheroctaves. Makethecutoffincreaseasyouplayloweronthe keyboard. Createabruptchangesatcertainkeys,forsplitlike effects.
Filter EG
LFO modulation
YoucanmodulatethefilterviaLFO1,LFO2,andthe CommonLFO.Amongotherapplications,LFO modulationofthefiltercanproducetheclassicauto waheffect. TheFilterLFOModtabletsyousetupthefollowing parametersseparatelyforeachLFO: IntensitytoAandIntensitytoBspecifyhowmuch theLFOchangesthetone. JSYIntensitytoAandJSYIntensitytoBspecifythe depthofthewaheffectproducedbytheLFOwhenthe joystickismovedtowardyourself,orwhenCC#2is received.
50
KeyboardTrackShapeandIntensity
AMS Modulation
InadditiontotheEG,LFOs,andKeyTrack,youcan usetwoAMSsourcestomodulatethefilters.For instance,youcouldusetheribbontochangethe brightness,orusetheAMSoutputofaWaveSequence.
Intensity = 99 (Inverted)
Pan
Pan
ThemainPanparametercontrolsthestereoposition afterthesignalhaspassedthroughtheoscillator,filter, andamp.NormallyyoullsetthistoC064,sothatthe soundiscenteredequallybetweentheleftandright speakers. TocreateastereoeffectwhenOscillatorModeissetto Double,settheAmp1/Driver1pagePantoL001,and theAmp2/Driver2pagePanR127.Thiswillmake OSC1gototheleftspeaker,andOSC2gototheright speaker.
Time
Time
51
Amp EG
TheAmpEGletsyoucontrolhowthevolumechanges overthecourseofanote. Everyinstrumenthasitsowncharacteristicvolume envelope.Thisispartofwhatgiveseachinstrumentits identifiablecharacter. Conversely,bychangingthevolumecontourfor instance,applyingastringlikeAmpEGcurvetoan organmultisampleyoucanproduceinterestingand unusualsounds.
Piano
Amp modulation
Organ
Strings
Drive
TheDrivecircuitaddssaturationandoverdrivetothe sound,foreverythingfromsubtlefatteningtodrastic distortion.Unlikeanoverdriveeffect,Driveprocesses eachvoiceindividually,sothetimbrestaysthesame regardlessofhowmanyvoicesarebeingplayed. ThebasicvolumelevelissetbytheAmpLevel parameter.Youcanthenalterthisusingthe modulationsourcesbelow: Thetwomainparameters,DriveandLowBoost,work togethertocreatetheoveralleffect. Drivecontrolstheamountofedgeandbiteinthe timbre.Lowsettingswillproducemildsaturation,and highersettingscreatemoreobviousdistortion. Often,itsusefultoincreasetheLowBoostalongwith theDrive. Note:evenwhentheDriveamountissetto0,the Drivecircuitstillaffectsthetimbre.Ifyourgoalisa completelypristinesound,usetheBypasscontrol instead. LowBoostisaspeciallowfrequencyEQwhich controlsthebodycharacterofthesound.Thespecific EQfrequenciesaffectedwillchangewiththeDrive setting. Higheramountsincreasethebassboost,andwillalso intensifytheeffectoftheDriveparameter.
Keyboard Track
Thisletsyouvarythevolumerelativetothenoteyou play.Formoreinformation,seeKeyboardTrackon page 50.
Amp Modulation
VelocityIntensityisusedbymostprogramsto decreasethevolumeofsoftlyplayednotesand increasethevolumeofstronglyplayednotes,andthe AmpModulationparameteradjuststhedepthofthis control.NormallyyouwillsetAmpModulationto positive(+)values.Asthissettingisincreased,there willbegreatervolumedifferencebetweensoftly playedandstronglyplayednotes.
LFO1/2
SpecifieshowtheLFOswillproducecyclicchangesin volume(tremoloeffect).
52
Using EXi
Using EXi
InEXiPrograms,youcanselectoneortwoEXitobe splitorlayeredtogether.EachEXihasitsownsonic characteranddifferentpagesofparameters. ToselectdifferentEXi: 1. SelectanEXiProgram. Note:EXiProgramsarestoredinEXiBanks,separate fromHD1Programs.INTAisalwaysanEXiBank; dependingonsettings,anyofUSERAGand AAGGmayalsobeEXibanks. 2. PresstheCommonbutton. 3. PresstheBasic/Vectortab. TheP4:Basic/VectorProgramBasicpageappears. Subtleperformancenuancesintegrateseamlesslywith theKRONOShardware,includingreleasevelocityand damperpedalvelocity. TheSGX1alsoprovidestheexceptionallyhigh polyphonythatrealacousticpianosoundsrequire upto100dualstereonotes,theequivalentof400mono voices.
53
MS-20EX
Patch-panel synth with unique, aggressive tone
AdramaticexpansionofKorgsclassicMS20analog synth,theMS20EXputsmodularpatchcablesunder yourfingertips.Modulatefilterswithaudiorate oscillators;turnaudioinputsintocontrolsignals; controlalloftheoriginalknobswithmodsources includingadditionalenvelopes,LFOs,andrealtime controllers. Itsatweakersdream,butevenwithoutthepatch panel,theMS20EXwouldmakewaveswithits unique,aggressivetonedueinlargeparttoits unusualfilters,whicharecompletelydifferentfrom thoseineithertheAL1orthePolysixEX.
PolysixEX
Rich-sounding, versatile, and easy-to-use synth
Withitsselfoscillatingfourpolefilter,smoothanalog oscillatorandsuboscillator,andrich,builtinchorus andensembleeffects,thePolysixEXprovesyoudont havetobefancyinordertobegreat. BasedontheclassicKorgPolysixanalogsynth,its timbreisdistinctlydifferentfromtheAL1andthe MS20EX,butwedidntstopthere;weadded modulationofeverycontrolonthefrontpanel,fora worldofsoundsimpossibleontheoriginal. ItsalsoverywellsuitedtohandsoncontrolwithTone Adjust,withaknob,slider,orswitchforalmostallof theoriginalPolysixcontrols.Asabonus,itsalso capableofextremelyhighpolyphonyupto180 voices!
127
0 X-Axis
+127
X value: 90
54
VectorEnvelopemovingtheVectorPoint
+127
127
Global switch: Vector MIDI Out Vector Joystick Vector CC MIDI Output Vector CC Control
Vector Joystick
Vector CC Control
Vector EG
scale
55
Effects
Effectsarecoveredintheirownsectionofthemanuals, sowewontgointotoomuchdetailhere.Seethecross referencesbelowformoreinformation.
Master Effects
TherearetwoMasterEffects,whichareaccessed throughSends1and2.Thesearebestsuitedtoeffects suchasreverbsanddelays,butyoucanusethemwith anytypeofeffect. Formoreinformation,seeMastereffectson page 199.
Insert Effects
InsertEffectsletyousendeitherindividualOscillators ortheentireProgramthroughupto12effects,in series.Youcanuseanytypeofeffects,fromdistortions andcompressorstochorusesandreverbs.TheInsert Effectscanberoutedtothemainoutputs,ortoanyof theindividualoutputs. Formoreinformation,seeInserteffectsonpage 198.
Total Effects
ThetwoTotalEffectsarededicatedtoprocessingthe mainL/Routputs.Theyreideallysuitedtooverallmix effects,suchascompression,limiting,andEQbutas withtheothereffectssections,youcanuseanytypeof effectthatyoulike. Formoreinformation,seeProgramP9:Master/Total Effectonpage 143oftheParameterGuide.
56
Selecting Combinations
Thereareseveraldifferentwaystoselect Combinations.Eachoneisconvenientinadifferent way: Usingthefrontpanelbuttons,valueslider,and valueknob,youcanselectCombinationsquickly viaphysicalcontrols SelectingbyBankandnumber(viathetouch screen)letsyoubrowsethroughallofthe Combinationsinmemory,tofindtheonethatyou want SelectingbyCombinationcategory(viathetouch screen)letsyoufilterCombinationsbysoundtype, suchasPianosorDrums UsingafootswitchletsyouchangeCombinations evenwhilebothhandsarebusyplayingonthe keyboardconvenientforliveapplications MIDIprogramchangemessagesletyouselect Combinationsremotely,fromeitheraMIDI sequenceroranexternalMIDIcontroller Combinationbankcontents Bank
INTAC INT-D INT-D INTEG, USERAG
No.
000127 000095 096127 000127
Description
Factory Combinations
User Combinations
Set Lists
CombinationscanalsobeselectedinSetLists,along withProgramsandSongs.Formoreinformation,see SetListsonpage 113.
57
Combination Select
Favorite
Category (Category/Program) Popup button Bank/Program Select Popup button Program Select Status Play/Mute Solo On/Off Pan
Volume Timbre 01
Selecting by Category
YoucanselectCombinationsfromwithinacategory, suchaskeyboard,organ,bass,anddrums.When shippedfromthefactory,theCombinationsare organizedinto16categories,eachwithseveralsub categories.Therearealso2morecategories,initially namedUser16andUser17,whichyoucanuseand renameasdesired. 1. PresstheCategorypopupbutton. TheCategory/CombinationSelectdialogappears. Category/CombinationSelectmenu
Inthisillustration,bankINTAisselected.Theliston therightshowstheCombinationscontainedinthat bank. 2. Pressthetabsontheleftsideofthedisplayto selectabank. 3. Pressoneofthenamesinthelisttoselecta Combination. TheselectedCombinationwillbehighlighted,andthe keyboardwillimmediatelyswitchtothenewsound. 4. Ifyoulike,playafewnotestohearthenew Combination. YoucanplaythenewCombinationwhilethemenuis stillshowing,withoutneedingtopressOK. Intheillustrationabove,theSynthcategoryisselected. ThelistontherightshowstheCombinationswhich belongtothatcategory.
58
Playing Combinations
Selecting Combinations
2. Pressthetabslocatedtotheleftsideofthedisplay toselectadifferentcategory. Thenameoftheselectedcategorywillbedisplayedin fullinthelowerleftofthedisplay. 3. Optionally,focusonamorespecificgroupof soundsbyselectingasubcategoryfromthe secondcolumnoftabs. Thefullnameofthesubcategoryalsoappearsinthe lowerleftofthedisplay. 4. PressoneoftheCombinationnamesinthecenter areatoselectaCombination. TheselectedCombinationwillbehighlighted. 5. Whenyouaresatisfiedwiththeselected Combination,presstheOKbuttontoclosethe popupmenu. IfyoupresstheCancelbutton,yourselectionwillbe discarded,andyouwillreturntotheCombinationthat hadbeenselectedwhenyouopenedthepopupmenu.
Drum Track
TheDrumTrackintegrateswithalltheotherfeatures ofCombinationmode,includingKARMA.Fordetails, seeUsingtheDrumTrackinCombinationmodeon page 236.
59
60
LATCH button
WhenLATCHisturnedon,KARMAwillcontinueto playevenafteryouvestoppedplayingonthe keyboard,drum/chordpads,orMIDIIn. Thisisconvenientwhenyouwanttoplayontopofa KARMAgeneratedgroove,forinstance.
61
Soloing timbres
YoucanusetheControlSurfaceSolofunctiontolisten totheCombisindividualTimbres.Formore information,seeSoloswitchandSelectswitches18 onpage 430.
Using COMPARE
Whenyoureintheprocessofeditingasound, pressingtheCOMPAREbuttonwillrecallthesaved versionofthesound,asitwasbeforeyoustarted editing.Toindicatethatyouarelisteningtothesaved version,thebuttonsLEDwilllightup. PressingCOMPAREagainreturnsyoutotheversion youareediting,andtheLEDwillgooutagain. IfyoueditwhiletheCOMPARELEDislit,thekeywill againgodarkandyourpreviouseditswillbelost.
Combination overview
Combination page structure
ThemainP0:Playpageoffersaccesstothemost importantaspectsofCombis,including: SelectingandplayingCombinations SelectingindividualPrograms MakingbasicsettingsforKARMA Editingmixersettingsandsoundparametersvia theControlSurface Quicksamplingandresampling Thedetailededitingpages,P1throughP9,giveyou moreindepthaccesstotheCombispowerfulkeyand velocityzones,MIDIfiltering,VectorSynthesis, KARMA,DrumTrack,andEffects. Page Main features
Select and play Combinations Perform easy edits using the Realtime Knobs, KARMA sliders, and Tone Adjust Adjust mix parameters including volume, pan, EQ, and send levels Select a Program for each timbre Quick sampling and re-sampling P2: Timbre Params
Page
Main features
Adjust EQ settings for each Timbre Assign functions to SW1/2 and RealTime knobs 5-8 Set up Vector synthesis Set up the Drum Track Set up the on-screen pads Set various parameters for each timbre, such as MIDI channel, OSC select, Pitch etc. Set up MIDI transmission/reception filters for each Timbre. Set up keyboard and velocity zones for each Timbre. ------ Make detailed KARMA settings. Select insert effects and make settings for them. Specify send levels to the Master effects and routing to the outputs. Select Master send effects and Total effects, and adjust their settings.
P1:EQ/Vector/ Control
P3: MIDI Filter/Zone P4: P5: P6: P7: KARMA P8: Insert Effects P9: Master and Total Effects
P0: Play
62
Timbre1 Program
Vector: P1 - 5,6,7
Controllers: P1 - 8 Pads: P1 - 9
Audio Input: P0 - 8
Parameters 3Band EQ
Timbre2 Program
Parameters 3Band EQ
Timbre3 Program
Parameters 3Band EQ
Timbre4 Program
Parameters 3Band EQ
REC Bus FX Control Bus
Timbre16 Program
Parameters 3Band EQ
P11, P22, etc. indicate the KRONOS on-screen pages and tabs.
Layer
LayerscausetwoormoreProgramstosound simultaneouslywhenanoteisplayed.
Program A Program B Layer: Two or more programs sound simultaneously.
Program B
Example: B and C/D are split. In the lower keyboard range, A and B are layered. In the higher keyboard range, C and D are switched by velocity and layered with A.
Split
SplitscausedifferentProgramstosoundondifferent areasofthekeyboard.
Program A Program B Split: Different programs will sound in different areas of the keyboard.
Velocity Switch
VelocitySwitchescausedifferentProgramstosound dependingonthevelocity(howhardyouplaythe notes).
63
C1
B3 C4
G9
Timbre 2
1. GototheProgSelect/Mixerpage. 2. SelectapianosoundforTimbre1,abrasssound forTimbre2,andastringssoundforTimbre3. 3. GototheMIDItaboftheP2:TimbreParameters page. 4. ForTimbres13,setStatustoINTandMIDI ChanneltoGch(theGlobalChannel). 5. GototheKeyboardZonestaboftheMIDI Filter/Zonespage. 6. SetTimbre1sTopKeytoG9,anditsBottomKey toC4. 7. SetTimbres2and3toaTopKeyofB3,anda BottomKeyofC1. Youcanalsoenterthesevaluesbyselectingthe parameter,andthenholdingdowntheENTERkey andplayinganoteonthekeyboard. 1. GototheProgSelect/Mixerpage. 2. SelectabrasssoundforTimbre1,andastrings soundforTimbre2. 3. GototheMIDItaboftheP2:TimbreParameters page. 4. ForTimbres1and2,setStatustoINTandMIDI ChanneltoGch(theGlobalChannel). 5. GototheVelocityZonestaboftheMIDI Filter/Zonespage. 6. SetTimbre1sTopVelocityto127,anditsBottom Velocityto64. 7. SetTimbre2toaTopVelocityof63,andaBottom Velocityof1.
MIDI Settings
Timbre Parameters MIDI page
Status
ThiscontrolsthestatusofMIDIandtheinternaltone generatorforeachTimbre.Normally,ifyoureplaying aninternalProgram,thisshouldbesettoINT. IfthestatusissettoOff,EXT,orEX2,thatinternal soundswillnotbeplayed.Offsimplydisablesthe Timbreentirely.TheEXTandEX2settingsallowthe TimbretocontrolanexternalMIDIdevice.Formore information,seeStatusonpage 454oftheParameter Guide.
MIDI Channel
TimbresthatyouwishtoplayfromKRONOSs keyboardmustbesettotheglobalMIDIchannel.Your playingonthekeyboardistransmittedontheglobal MIDIchannel,andwillsoundanytimbrethatmatches thischannel.NormallyyouwillsetthistoGch.When thisissettoGch,theMIDIchannelofthetimbrewill alwaysmatchtheglobalMIDIchannel,evenifyou changetheglobalMIDIchannel. Onsomepreloadedcombinations,Timbresusedby KARMAmayhavetheirMIDIChannelssetto somethingotherthanGch.Thesewillbetimbres thatplayonlywhenKARMAisonaveryuseful techniqueforcreatingKARMAlized combinations. Formoreinformation,see71c:MIDII/Oon page 471oftheParameterGuide.Inparticular,notethe relationshipsbetweenKARMAassignmentsandMIDI Channel.
64
Forexample,ifportamentoison,portamentowillbe appliedtotheinternalKRONOSsoundevenif PortamentoSWCC#65isunchecked. Asanotherexample,letssaythatyouveselecteda bassProgramforTimbre1,andapianoProgramfor Timbre2,withthegoalofcreatingabass/pianosplit. Youcouldmakethefollowingsettingssothatpressing thedamperpedalaffectsonlyTimbre2spianosound: 1. GototheMIDIFilter1taboftheMIDI Filter/Zonespage. 2. ChecktheEnableDamperboxforTimbre1. 3. UnchecktheEnableDamperboxforTimbre2.
OSC Select
Normally,thisshouldbesettoBTH(Both). IfthetimbreisusingaprogramwhoseOscillator ModeisDoubleorDoubleDrums,andyouwantonly OSC1orOSC2(notboth)tosound,setthistoOSC1 (onlyOSC1willsound)orOSC2(onlyOSC2will sound).
Portamento
Normally,thisshouldbesettoPRG. IftheProgramusesportamento,butyoudliketo disablethisforthecurrentCombination,setthis parametertoOff. Conversely,ifyouwanttoforcetheportamentotobe on,orjusttochangetheportamentotime,setthistoa valueof001127.Theportamentowillchangetouse thenewlyspecifiedtime.
65
Delay
YoucansetsomeTimbressothattheydontsound immediatelyatnoteon.Thiscancreatecooleffects, andmoredramaticlayers. YoucanspecifythedelayforeachTimbreeitherin milliseconds(ms),orinrhythmicvalueswhichsyncto thesystemtempo. IfyousettheDelaytoKeyOff,theTimbrewillsound whenthenoteisreleased.
Effects
Effectsarecoveredintheirownsectionofthemanuals, sowewontgointotoomuchdetailhere.
Master Effects
TherearetwoMasterEffects,whichareaccessed throughSends1and2.Thesearebestsuitedtoeffects suchasreverbsanddelays,butyoucanusethemwith anytypeofeffect. Formoreinformation,seeMastereffectson page 199.
Insert Effects
InsertEffectsletyousendeitherindividualOscillators ortheentireProgramthroughupto12effects,in series.Youcanuseanytypeofeffects,fromdistortions andcompressorstochorusesandreverbs.TheInsert Effectscanberoutedtothemainoutputs,ortoanyof theindividualoutputs. Formoreinformation,seeInserteffectsonpage 198.
66
Total Effects
ThetwoTotalEffectsarededicatedtoprocessingthe mainL/Routputs.Theyreideallysuitedtooverallmix effects,suchascompression,limiting,andEQbutas withtheothereffectssections,youcanuseanytypeof effectthatyoulike.
Saving to disk
YoucanalsosaveandmanageCombinationsonthe internaldiskandUSBstoragedevices.Formore information,seeSavingtodisks,CDs,andUSB mediaonpage 182.
67
68
Patterns
Therearetwotypesofpatterns:presetpatternsand userpatterns. Presetpatterns:Patternssuitablefordrumtracks arepresetininternalmemory,andcanbeselected foranysong. Userpatterns:Eachsongcanhaveupto100 patterns.Whenusingapatterninadifferentsong, usetheUtilitymenucommandsCopyPatternor CopyFromSongetc.tocopythepattern.Youcan setthepatternlengthtooneormoremeasures,as desired.
69
This is a conceptual diagram of Sequencer mode including the hard disk recording function.
Sample
Song
Setting parameters Setting parameters Setting parameters Performance data Performance data Performance data Performance data
KARMA (P7)
Setting parameters
Setting parameters
Performance data
Insert Effect 1...12 (P8) Insert Effects Master Effects Individual Outputs
Region
Master Track
Setting parameters
Setting parameters
Performance
Region
WAVE (Mono)
Internal disk
Make Audio CD
WAVE (Stereo)
Parentheses such as (P7) indicate the KRONOS page used for editing.
Patternsalwayscontainonlyasingletrackofmusical data.Ifyouwanttousepatternsonmultipletracks, youllneedtouseaseparatepatternforeachtrack. TousepatternsinaSong,eitherplacetheminaMIDI trackusingthePuttoMIDITrackmenucommand,or copythemusingtheCopytoMIDITrackmenu command. YoucanalsousepatternswiththeRPPR.Formore information,seeUsingRPPR(RealtimePattern Play/Record)onpage 106. Sequencermodepagestructure Page Explanation
Song playback/recording Easy editing using the realtime knobs, KARMA sliders, and Tone Adjust Edit mix parameters such as volume, pan, Play/Mute, and Solo On/Off Select programs for MIDI tracks Choose the recording mode Make settings for sampling, resampling, and audio EQ adjustments for each track Function assignments for the SW1 and SW2 switches and realtime knobs 58 Vector Synthesis settings Drum Track settings Assignments for the on-screen pads
Explanation
Parameter settings for each track (MIDI channel, OSC selection, pitch settings, etc.) MIDI receive/transmit filter settings for each track Keyboard zone and velocity zone settings for each track Track editing Pattern recording and editing RPPR settings Convert User patterns to User Drum Track patterns Detailed KARMA settings
P0: Play/REC
P5: Pattern/RPPR
70
Sequencer overview
Page
P8: Insert Effect P9: Master/Total Effect
Explanation
Insert effect selection, settings, send level to master effects, output routing Master effect and total effect selection and settings
Fordetailsonhowtoaccesseachmodeandpage,see Basicoperationsonpage 17. YoucansamplefromwithinSequencermode includingresamplingtheSongitself.Formore information,seeSamplinginProgramand Combinationmodesonpage 148. Youcanalsomixinliveaudioinputs,andprocess themthrougheffects.Formoreinformation,see Usingeffectswiththeaudioinputsonpage 203.
Set Lists
SongscanalsobeselectedinSetLists,alongwith ProgramsandCombinations.Formoreinformation, seeSetListsonpage 113.
71
Tempo
Song Select Popup Track 2 Track 1 Category Program Select Play/Mute/Rec Solo Pan
Volume
1. UseSongSelecttoselectthesongthatyouwant toplayback. 2. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. 3. Presstrack1Play/Rec/Mute. ThedisplaywillchangefromPlaytoMute,andthe playbackoftrack1willnolongerbeheard.Inthis way,themutefunctionallowsyoutosilencea specifiedtrackuntilthetrackisunmuted. Presstrack2Play/Rec/Mute.Thedisplaywill change,andtheplaybackoftrack2willalsobe
72
Playing Songs
Playback
muted.Tocancelmuting,pressPlay/Rec/Muteonce again.
LOCATE settings
YoucanpresstheLOCATEswitchtomovetothe registeredlocation.Initially,thiswillmoveto 001:01.000.
Tip:Play/Rec/Mutecanbecontrolledfromthefront panelmixersection,orfromtheP0ControlSurface pageoftheLCDscreen.(SeeThecontrolsurfacein Sequencermodeonpage 74.) 4. Presstrack1SoloOn/Off. Solowillbehighlighted,andthistime,onlytrack 1willbeheard.Thisisknownassoloingthe track. IfbothMuteandSoloareused,theSolofunction willbegivenpriority. Presstrack2SoloOn/Off. Thedisplaywillchange,andyouwillhearthe playbackoftracks1and2. Note:Solo(on)appliestoalltracks,includingMIDI tracks116,audiotracks116,andallaudioinputs (analog,USB,andS/P DIF).If,asinthisexample, youveturnedSoloonforonlyMIDItracks1and2, youwillnothearMIDItracks316,audiotracks1 16,oranyoftheaudioinputs.
Loop playback
Whenrecordingorplayingbackasong,youcan individuallylooptheMIDItracksthatareplaying. IntheP0:Play/RECMIDITrackLooppage,check TrackPlayLoopfortheMIDItracksyouwanttoloop, anduseLoopStartMeasureandLoopEndMeasure tospecifythestartingandendingmeasureofthe regionthatwillplaybackasaloop. IfPlayIntroischecked(enabled),themeasures precedingtheloopwillbeplayedbackasan introductionbeforetheloopbegins. Ifyouplaybackfromthefirstmeasurewiththe settingsshowninthescreenshotbelow,thespecified regionofmeasureswillrepeatasfollows.Notethat PlayIntroisenabledforTrack1,butdisabledforTrack 2.
Measure 1 Track 1 Track 2 1 9 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 5 10 11 12 13 6 7 8 5
5. ToswitchSolooff,pressSoloOn/Offonceagain. PressSoloOn/OffforbothMIDItracks1and2. Thedisplaywillchange,andtheplaybackoftracks 1and2willbemuted.IftheSolofunctionisturned offforalltracks,playbackwillbeaccordingtothe Play/Rec/Mutesettings. Tip:Play/Rec/Mutecanbecontrolledfromthefront panelmixersection,orfromtheP0ControlSurface pageoftheLCDscreen.(SeeThecontrolsurfacein Sequencermodeonpage 74)
10 9
10 9
10 9
10 9
10 9
10 9
IfPlayIntroisdisabled(unchecked)forTrack1,the specifiedregionofmeasureswillrepeatasfollows.
Measure 1 Track 1 Track 2 5 9 2 6 3 7 4 8 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 5 10 11 12 13 6 7 8 5
Exclusive Solo
Normally,SoloworksinExclusiveSolooffmode,in whichyoucansolomorethanonetrackatatime(asin theexampleabove).Incontrast,ExclusiveSoloon modeallowsonlyonetracktobesoloedatatime, makingiteasytoswitchbetweensoloedtracks. UsetheExclusiveSolopagemenucommandto specifyhowtheSolofunctionwilloperate. ExclusiveSolooff:Youwillbeabletosolomorethan onetrackatatime.Thestatusofatrackwillchange eachtimeyoupressitsSoloOn/Offbutton. ExclusiveSoloon:WhenyoupressaSoloOn/Off button,onlythattrackwillbesoloed. TheSOLOsettingisnotstoredwhenyousavethe song. Tip:YoucanturnExclusiveSoloon/offbyholding downtheENTERswitchandpressingnumerickey1 (whennotinP4orP5).
10 9
10 9
10 9
10 9
10 9
10 9
Track Play Loop Loop Start Measure Loop End Measure Play Intro
73
CONTROL ASSIGN
TIMBRE/TRACK
WhenTIMBRE/TRACKisselected,thecontrolsurface willeditthepan,EQ,effectsend,Play/Rec/Mute status,SoloOn/Offstatus,andvolumeofeachMIDI track. TheLEDsattherightoftheTIMBRE/TRACKswitch indicatewhetherMIDItracks18or916arecurrently selected.Thesliders,knobs,andswitcheswillcontrol therespectivesetoftracks. KNOBS:IfyouwanttoviewandeditthePansetting foralleighttracksatonce,presstheMIXERKNOBS switchtomaketheINDIVIDUALPANLEDlight,and usetheknobstoeditthePansettings.Converselyif youmaketheCHANNELSTRIPlight,theknobswill controlthepan,EQ,andeffectsendsforasingletrack. UsetheMIXSELECTswitchestoselectthetrackyou wanttoedit,andusetheknobstocontrolit.
AUDIO
WhenAUDIOisselected,thecontrolsurfacewilledit thepan,EQ,effectsend,Play/Rec/Mutestatus,Solo On/Offstatus,andvolumeoftheaudioinputsoraudio tracks.
74
Playing Songs
TheLEDsattherightoftheAUDIOswitchindicate whetheraudioinputs,audiotracks18,oraudiotracks 916arecurrentlyselected.Thesliders,knobs,and switcheswillcontroltherespectivesetofinputsor tracks. KNOBS:IfyoupresstheMIXERKNOBSswitchto maketheINDIVIDUALPANLEDlight,theknobswill controlthePansettingofthesixinputs,tracks18,or tracks916.IftheCHANNELSTRIPLEDislitandIN isselected,theknobswillcontrolthepanandeffect sendsforasingleinput.If18or916areselected,the knobswillcontrolthepan,EQ,andeffectsendsfora singletrack. UsetheMIXSELECTswitchestoselecttheinput/track youwanttocontrol,andusetheknobstocontrolthem. MIXPLAY/MUTE,MIXSELECT:Theseswitcheswork inthesamewayastheydoforTIMBRE/TRACK,as describedabove.
EXTERNAL
WhenEXTERNALisselected,thecontrolsurfaceis usedtotransmitMIDImessagestoanexternalMIDI device.Formoreinformation,see09e:Externalon page 540oftheParameterGuide.
RT KNOBS/KARMA
WhenRTKNOBS/KARMAisselected,theslidersand switchesofthecontrolsurfaceareusedtocontrol KARMA.Formoreinformation,see09f:RT(Real TimeKnobs)/KARMAonpage 541oftheParameter Guide.
TONE ADJ/EQ
WhenTONEADJ/EQ(ToneAdjust)isselected,the controlsurfaceisusedtotemporarilyadjustthe programusedbyeachMIDItrack.Forexamplewhile yourecreatingasong,youcanusethiscapabilityto adjustthesoundappropriatelyforyoursongwithout goingbacktoProgrammode;youmightsoftenthe toneofthebassorspeeduptheattackofastrings program,andmakethesechangeshappeninrealtime whilethesongplays. UseTrackintherightsideoftheLCDtoselectthe MIDItrackyouwanttoadjust. Formoreinformation,see09g:ToneAdjuston page 543oftheParameterGuide. Note:EQisonlyavailableinSetListmode.Formore information,seeGraphicEQonpage 119.
75
MIDI recording
Youcanrecordupto400,000events(e.g.,notes),up to200songs,andupto999measuresineachsong. Themaximumtimingresolutionis1/480partsper quarternote. TherearesixteentracksforMIDIperformancedata, andamastertrackwhichcontrolsthetime signatureandtempo. YoucanperformandrecordusingKARMAandthe DrumTrack. YoucanperformandrecordusingRPPR(Realtime PatternPlay/Recording). Thereare697builtinpresetpatternsidealfordrum tracks,andinadditionyoucancreateupto100 userpatternsforeachsong.Thesepatternscanbe usedasperformancedataforasong,orwiththe RPPRfunction.
Selecting a Song
Beforewecanbeginthisexample,weneedtoselectan emptysongwherewecanrecord. 1. PresstheSEQbuttontoenterSequencermode. 2. GotothefirsttaboftheP0:Play/RECpage. ThefullpagenameisMIDITrackProgSelect/Mixer. 3. PresstheSongSelectPopupbutton. TheSongselectionpopupwillappear. 4. Chooseanew,emptySongfromthelist,andpress theOKbutton. IntheP2:TrackParametersMIDIpage,Status specifieswhethereachtrackwillsoundtheinternal tonegeneratororanexternaltonegenerator.MIDI ChannelspecifiestheMIDIchannelforeachtrack. NormallywhenusingtheKRONOSasa16timbre soundmodule,youwillselectINTorBTH. Ingeneral,youshouldsetMIDIChannelto differentchannels116foreachtrack.Tracksthat aresenttothesameMIDIchannelwillsound simultaneouslywheneitherisrecordedorplayed. StatusINT:Duringplayback,theKRONOS internaltonegeneratorwillplaytheMIDIdata recordedonthattrack.Whenyouoperatethe KRONOSkeyboardorcontrollers,youwillbe playingandcontrollingthetrackselectedbyTrack Select.MIDIdatawillnotbetransmittedtoan externaldevice. StatusEXT,EX2,BTH:Duringplayback,theMIDI datarecordedonthattrackwillbetransmittedfrom MIDIOUTtoplayanexternalsoundmodule.When youoperatetheKRONOSkeyboardorcontrollers, MIDIdatawillbetransmittedtoplayandcontrol theexternalsoundmoduleselectedbyTrack Select.(TheMIDIchanneloftheexternaltone generatormustbesettomatchtheMIDIChannel ofKRONOStracksthataresettoEXT,EX2orBTH.) IfStatusissettoBTH,boththeexternaltone generatorandinternaltonegeneratorwillbe soundedandcontrolled. 4. Adjusttheeffectsettings. MakesettingsforeacheffectinP8:InsertEffectand P9:Master/TotalEffect.
Track settings
Sinceweregoingtorecordanewsonginthisexample, wewillstartbyexplaininghowtoassignaprogramto eachMIDItrack,andmakebasicsettingssuchas volume. Fordetailsonaudiotracks,refertoAudiorecording onpage 89. 1. AssignaprogramtoeachMIDItrack. UseProgramSelect(P0:Play/RECMIDITrack ProgSelect/Mixerpage)toassignaprogramtoeach MIDItrack. AtthistimeyoucanpresstheCategorypopup andselectprogramsbycategory. YoucancopyvarioussettingsfromProgramsor Combinations,includingeffects,KARMAsettings, ToneAdjust,andsoon. Whenassigningaprogram,youcanuseTrack Selecttoselectthetrackforwhichyouaremaking assignments,andtryplayingthesound. 2. SetthepanandvolumeofeachMIDItrack. Pansetsthepanofeachtrack,andVolumesetsthe volumeofeachtrack.
76
MIDI recording
Formoreinformation,seeUsingeffectsin CombinationsandSongsonpage 200,Sequencer P8:InsertEffectonpage 609oftheParameter Guide,andSequencerP9:Master/TotalEffecton page 621oftheParameterGuide. 5. Setthetempoandtimesignature. Tosetthetempo,youcanturntheTEMPOknobor presstheTAPTEMPOswitchatthedesired interval.Alternatively,youcanselectq(Tempo)in theP0:Play/RECMIDITrackProgSelect/Mixer page(orsimilarpage),andusetheVALUE controllerstosetthetempo.SetTempoModeto Manual. Nextyouwillsetthetimesignature.Inthis example,wellexplainhowtosetthetimesignature usingtheMeterfield.Normally,youspecifythe timesignaturebeforerecordingthefirsttrack,and thenbeginrecording. a)PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch,and setMeterto**/**. b)Press**/**tohighlightit,andusetheVALUE controllerstosetthetimesignature. c)PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchto beginrecording.Whentheprecounthasendedand Locatereaches0001:01:000,presstheSEQUENCER START/STOPswitchtostoprecording.Thetime signatureyouspecifiedhasbeenrecordedonthe Mastertrack. IfyoupresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch duringtheprecount,thetimesignaturewontbe recorded. 6. SettheRECResolutionasdesired. WhenyourecordMIDIinrealtime,thisparameter controlstimingcorrection,alsoknownas quantization.Thisalsoapplieswhenrecording audioautomationdata. ThisonlyaffectsnewlyrecordedMIDI;itdoesnot changeanypreviouslyrecordedtracks. Forexample,letssupposethatyourecordedsome eighthnotesbutyourtimingwasnotquiteperfect, asshowninpart1oftheillustrationbelow.IfREC Resolutionweresettoewhenyourecorded,the timingwouldautomaticallybecorrectedasshown inpart2oftheillustration.IfRECResolutionis settoHi,thenoteswillberecordedwiththetiming atwhichyouplaythem.
Template Songs
TemplateSongsstoreprettymucheverythinginthe SongexceptfortheMIDIandaudiodataitself.This includesProgramselections,trackparameters,effects andKARMAsettings,andtheSongsnameandtempo. ThefactorypresetTemplateSongsletyougetupand runningquicklywithmatchedsetsofsoundsand effectsforvariousstylesofmusic.Youcanalsocreate yourownTemplateSongswithyourfavoritesounds andsetups. NotethatTemplateSongsdonotincludetheMIDI dataforsongtracksandpatterns,audiodata,or settingsthatgovernhowthemusicaldataisplayed back,includingMeter,Metronome,PLAY/MUTE,and TrackPlayLoop(includingStart/Endmeasure). WhileloadingaTemplateSong,youcanalso optionallyloadoneormoreDrumTrackpatterns. 1. IntheP0:Play/RECpage,pressthepagemenu buttonandselecttheLoadTemplateSong command. Adialogboxwillappear.
2. IntheFromfield,choosetheTemplateSongyou wanttoload. 3. ChecktheCopyPatterntoMIDITracktoo? checkbox. Whenthisboxischecked,adialogboxforcopyinga patternwillautomaticallyappearafterLoadTemplate Songiscomplete. Ifthisisnotchecked,onlytheselectedTemplateSong willbeloaded. 4. PresstheOKbuttontoloadthetemplatesong,or presstheCancelbuttontoexitwithoutmaking changes. WhenyoupressOK,theTemplateSongssettingswill becopiedintothecurrentSong.
77
Byloadingadrumtrackandthecorrespondingpreset pattern,youcaninstantlysetupaDrumTrackto matchtheTemplateSong. 8. ToloadtheDrumpattern,presstheOKbutton. Afterthepatternisloaded,theMeasurewillcountup automatically.Youcanthencopyanotherpatternif desired.Forinstance,youcanusedifferentpatterns oneaftertheothertobuildupasong,withdifferent patternsforverse,chorus,andbridge. IfCopyPatterntoMIDITracktoo?wascheckedin step3,theCopyPatternToMIDITrackdialogbox willappear. Thisisthesamedialogboxastheonethatappearsfor theCopyToMIDITrackmenucommand. 5. InthePatternfield,selectapatterntocopy. 6. IntheToMIDITrackfield,selectthetracktouse fortheDrumTrackpattern. 7. IntheMeasurefield,setthemeasureonwhich youdlikethepatterntostart. Note:IneachoftheeighteenpresetTemplateSongs, track1isalwaysassignedtoaDrumProgram.(In somecases,othertracksmayalsohaveDrum Programs.) Followingthenamesforeachofthepresetpatterns, themusicalstyleandthenameofthemostsuitable DrumProgramsarepartiallydisplayed.(Refertothe VNLforacompletelistofDrumPrograms.) Afteryouvefinishedaddingpatterns,presstheExit button,andyouredone!
Recording setup
InP0:Play/RECPreferencepageRecordingSetup, selecttherealtimerecordingmethodyouwanttouse.
Location
Track Select
78
MIDI recording
Overwrite
Withthismethod,themusicaldatapreviously recordedonatrackisoverwrittenbythenewly recordeddata.Whenyouperformoverwriterecording onapreviouslyrecordedtrack,itsmusicaldatawillbe deletedandreplacedbythenewlyrecordeddata. Normallyyouwillusethismethodtorecord,andthen modifytheresultsbyusingothertypesofrealtime recordingorMIDIeventediting. 1. UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackthatyouwant torecord. 2. SettheRecordingSetuptoOverwrite.
Manual punch-in
Whilethesongisplaying,youcanpressthe SEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchoraconnected pedalswitchatthedesiredlocationtostartorstop recording.Withthismethod,themusicaldata previouslyonthetrackisoverwrittenbythenewly recordeddata. 1. UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackthatyouwant torecord. 2. SettheRecordingSetuptoManualPunchIn.
3. InLocation,specifythelocationatwhichyou wishtobeginrecording. 4. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch,and thenpresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. IftheMetronomeSetupisstillsettothedefault settings,themetronomewillsoundforatwo measureprecount,andthenrecordingwillbegin. Playthekeyboardandmovecontrollerssuchasthe joysticktorecordyourperformance. 5. Whenyoufinishplaying,presstheSEQUENCER START/STOPswitch. Recordingwillend,andthelocationwillreturnto thepointatwhichyoubeginrecording. IfyoupressthePAUSEswitchinsteadofthe SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch,recordingwill pause.WhenyoupressthePAUSEswitchonce again,recordingwillresume.Whenyouare finished,presstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOP switchtostoprecording.
3. InLocation,specifyalocationseveralmeasures earlierthanthepointatwhichyouwishtobegin recording. 4. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Playbackwillbegin. 5. Atthepointatwhichyouwishtobeginrecording, presstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch. Recordingwillbegin.Playthekeyboardand operatecontrollerssuchasthejoysticktorecord yourperformance. 6. Whenyoufinishrecording,pressthe SEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch. Recordingwillend(playbackwillcontinue). Note:InsteadofpressingtheSEQUENCER REC/WRITEswitchinsteps5and6,youcanusea footswitchconnectedtotheASSIGNABLE SWITCHjack. SettheGlobalP2:Controllers/ScalespageFoot SwitchAssigntoSongPunchIn/Out. 7. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Playbackwillstop,andyouwillreturntothe locationthatyouspecifiedinstep3.
Overdub
Withthismethod,thenewlyrecordedmusicaldatais addedtotheexistingdata. Whenyouperformoverdubrecordingonapreviously recordedtrack,thenewlyrecordeddatawillbeadded tothepreviouslyrecordeddata. Itisbesttoselectthismodeifyouwillberecording additionalcontroldata,recordingadrumpattern,or recordingthetempointhemastertrack.Withthis mode,datacanbeaddedwithouterasingtheexisting performancedata. 1. UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackthatyouwant torecord. 2. SettheRecordingSetuptoOverdub.
Auto punch-in
Firstyoumustspecifytheareathatwillbererecorded. Thenrecordingwilloccurautomaticallyatthe specifiedarea.Withthismethod,themusicaldata previouslyonthetrackisoverwrittenbythenewly recordeddata. 1. UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackthatyouwant torecord. 2. SettheRecordingSetuptoAutoPunchIn.
3. InM(AutoPunchInStartMeasure),M(Auto PunchInEndMeasure)specifytheareathatyou wishtorecord. 3. Fortherestoftheprocedure,refertosteps35of Overwrite. ForexampleifyouspecifyM005M008,recording willoccuronlyfrommeasure5tomeasure8. 4. InLocation,specifyalocationseveralmeasures earlierthanthepointatwhichyouwishtobegin recording.
79
5. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch,and thenpresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Playbackwillbegin. Whenyoureachthestartinglocationyouspecified instep3,recordingwillbegin.Playthekeyboard andoperatecontrollerssuchasthejoysticktorecord yourperformance.Whenyoureachtheending locationyouspecifiedinstep3,recordingwillend. (Playbackwillcontinue.) 6. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Playbackwillstop,andyouwillreturntothe locationyouspecifiedinstep4.
Similarly,benderdatawillbedeletedaslongasyou tiltthejoystickintheX(horizontal)direction,and aftertouchdatawillbedeletedaslongasyouapply pressuretothekeyboard. Whenyouareonceagainreadytorecordmusical data,unchecktheRemoveDatacheckbox. 7. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Playbackwillend,andyouwillreturntothe recordingstartlocationthatyouspecifiedinstep4. IfLoopAllTracksisselected,normalplaybackwill beloopedaswell.
3. UseLocationtospecifythemeasureatwhich recordingwillbegin. 3. InM(LoopStartMeasure),M(LoopEnd Measure)specifytheareathatyouwishtorecord. ForexampleifyouspecifyM004M008,recording willoccurrepeatedly(asaloop)frommeasure4to measure8. 4. InLocation,specifyalocationseveralmeasures earlierthanthepointatwhichyouwishtobegin recording. 5. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch,and thenpresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Playbackwillbegin.Whenyoureachthestarting locationyouspecifiedinstep3,recordingwill begin.Playthekeyboardandoperatecontrollers suchasthejoysticktorecordyourperformance. Whenyoureachtheendinglocationyouspecified instep3,youwillreturntothestartinglocation,and continuerecording. Themusicaldatathatislooprecordedwillbe addedtothepreviouslyrecordeddata. 6. Youcanalsoerasespecificdataevenwhileyou continuelooprecording. IfyoupresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch duringlooprecording,allmusicalwillberemoved fromthecurrentlyselectedtrackaslongasyou continuepressingtheswitch. BycheckingtheRemoveDatacheckboxyoucan eraseonlythespecifieddata.Duringloop recording,pressthenotethatyouwishtodelete, andonlythedataofthatnotenumberwillbe deletedfromthekeyboardaslongasyoucontinue pressingthatnote. 4. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch. 5. Forthetrackyouwanttorecord,press Play/Rec/MutetomakeitindicateRec. 6. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. WiththedefaultsettingsforMetronomeSetup,the metronomewillsoundforatwomeasurepre count,andthenrecordingwillbegin.Nowyoucan performonthekeyboardandcontrollers,anduse theKARMAorRPPRfunctionsifdesired. 7. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Playbackwillstop,andyouwillreturntothe locationspecifiedinstep4.
1. Createanewsong,andspecifyadrumprogram forMIDITrack01.UseTrackSelecttoselect MIDITrack01,andverifythatyouhearadrum program. 2. GototheP0:Play/RECPreferencepage.In RecordingSetup,specifyLoopAllTracksand setittoM001M001. Formoreinformation,seeLoopAllTrackson page 80.
80
MIDI recording
Withthissetting,measure1willberecorded repeatedly.Thenewlyrecordeddatawillbeadded ateachpass. 3. SetRECResolutiontox. 4. PresstheSEQUENCEREC/WRITEswitch,and thentheSTART/STOPswitch. Themetronomewillsoundatwomeasurecount down,andthenrecordingwillbegin. 5. Asshowninthemusicalexampleprintedabove, startbyplayingtheC3noteofthekeyboardto recordthebassdrumforonemeasure. 6. Next,playtheE3noteofthekeyboardtorecord thesnareforonemeasure,andthentheF#3noteto recordthehihat. 7. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchto stoprecording.
8. Playbacktheresult,andlistentothedrum performanceyourecorded. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch.When youvefinishedlistening,presstheSTART/STOP switchonceagaintostopplayback. 9. Ifyourenotsatisfiedwiththeresult,pressthe COMPAREswitchtoreturntothestatepriorto recording,andthenrerecordfromstep4. Note:Whenyourefinishedrecording,changethe RecordingSetupbacktothenormallyused Overwrite(P0:Play/RECPreferencepage). Inaddition,accesstheP0:Play/RECMIDITrack Looppage,checkTrackPlayLoopforMIDITrack 01,andsettheLoopStartMeasureandLoop EndMeasureto001.Whenyouplayback,MIDI track01willrepeatedlyplaythefirstmeasure.
81
BeatTick01.000willchangetoMeasure001Beat Tick01.360.Thenextnoteyouinputwillbeplaced atthislocation. 7. Inputtheremainingnotesasdescribedinsteps5 and6.(YouvealreadyinputthefirstC3note.) Inadditiontothemethodsdescribedinsteps5and 6,youcanalsousethefollowinginputmethods. Toinputarest,presstheRestbutton.Thiswill inputarestoftheStepTimevalue. Tomodifythelengthofanote,youcanmodifythe Steptimevaluebeforeyouinputthenote. Howeverifyouwanttoextendthelength(tie)of thenote,presstheTiebutton.Atthistime,the previouslyinputnotewillbeextendedbytheStep timelength. Todeleteanoteorrestthatyouinput,pressthe StepBackbutton.Thepreviouslyinputnotewillbe deleted. Toinputachord,simultaneouslypressthenotesof thedesiredchord.Evenifyoudonotpressthem simultaneously,notesthatarepressedbeforeyou fullyremoveyourhandfromallkeysonthe keyboardwillbeinputatthesamelocation. Ifyouwanttoverifythepitchofthenotethatyou willinputnext,pressthePAUSEswitch.Inthis state,playingakeywillproduceasound,butwill notinputanote.PressthePAUSEswitchonce againtocanceltherecordpausestate,andresume inputtingnotes. Note
C3 G3
Note
Key, Button
Rest button C3 key Rest button F2 key Tie button F2 key Rest button A2 key A3 key Rest button
C3
F2 Tie F2
A2 A3
8. Whenyouarefinishedrecording,presstheDone button. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtoplay back. GototheP0:Play/RECMIDITrackLooppage, checkTrackPlayLoopforMIDITrack02,setLoop StartMeasureto001,andLoopEndMeasureto 002.MIDItrack02willplaymeasures12 repeatedly. 9. Ifyourenotsatisfiedwiththeresult,pressthe COMPAREswitchtoreturntothestatepriorto recording,andthenrerecordfromstep4. Whenyoubeginsteprecording,alldataintheMIDI trackthatfollowsthemeasurewhereyoubegan recordingwillbeerased.Youneedtobeawareof thisifyoubeginsteprecordingfromameasure midwaythroughthesong. Ifyouwanttocopydataintoameasurethatalready containsdata,performsteprecordinginanempty MIDItrack,andusetheMoveMeasureorCopy Measuremenucommands.Formoreinformation, seeCopyMeasureonpage 646oftheParameter Guide,andMoveMeasureonpage 647ofthe ParameterGuide. Ifyouwanttoeditoraddtotherecordeddata,you canusetheMIDIEventEditfunction.Formore information,seeEventEditonpage 654ofthe ParameterGuide.
Key, Button
C3 key G3 key Rest button C4 key Rest button C4 key D3 key Eb3 key E3 key F3 key
C4
C4 D3 Eb3 E3 F3
82
MIDI recording
2. HolddowntheENTERswitchandpressthe SEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch. TheSetuptoRecorddialogboxwillappear. 3. PresstheOKbuttontoperformtheAutoSong Setup. TheKRONOSwillautomaticallyswitchtoSequencer mode,andtheCombinationssettingswillbeapplied tothefirstunusedsong. 4. Youwillautomaticallyenterrecordreadymode, andthemetronomewillbeginsoundingaccording tothesettingsinP0:Play/RECPreferencepage. Formoreinformation,see05d:MetronomeSetup onpage 528oftheParameterGuide. 5. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch,and realtimerecordingwillbegin. Whenyourefinishedrecording,pressthe START/STOPswitchonceagain. Selecttheprogramorcombinationthatyouwantto copy(i.e.,thecopysource). Wewillcopytheeffectsettingsofthecombination aswell,sochecktheIFXsAll,MFXsandTFXs checkboxes. CheckMultiRECStandby.TheStatuswillbe automaticallysettoRECfortheMIDItracksneeded torecordthatcombination. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethecopy. Noticethatwhenyouexecutethiscommand,the Play/Rec/Mutesettingofeachtrackwillbeset automatically.TheMultiRECcheckboxwillbe checked. 3. Beginrecording. PresstheLOCATEswitchtosetthelocationto 001:01.000. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch,and thenpresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Note:Ifyouplaythekeyboardduringtheprecount beforerecording,KARMAandtheDrumTrackwill startplayingthemomentrecordingbegins. 4. Recordyourperformance. 5. Whenyouarefinishedperforming,pressthe SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Ifyoumadeamistakeorwanttorerecord,youcan usetheComparefunction(presstheCOMPARE switch)torerecordasmanytimesasyouwant. (TheMultiRECcheckboxwillbeuncheckedwhen youuseCompare,soyouwillneedtocheckit again.)
Setup in Sequencer mode (Copy From Combination and Copy From Program)
InSequencermode,youcanusetheCopyFrom CombiandCopyFromProgrampagemenu commandstosetupaSongbasedonaCombinationor Program.Inthisexample,wellexplainhowtosetupa songbasedonacombination. Note:MakesurethattheglobalMIDIchannel(Global P1:MIDIMIDIpage,MIDIChannel)issetto01. 1. Selectanew,emptysong. 2. SelectthepagemenucommandCopyFrom Combi. Adialogboxwillappear.
83
5. IntheP2:TrackParametersMIDIpage,useMIDI ChanneltospecifytheMIDIchannelofeach track. SettheMIDIchannelofeachKRONOStrackto matchtheMIDIchannelofeachexternalsequencer track.Dataofthematchingchannelwillberecorded oneachKRONOStrack. MakesurethatStatusissettoINTorBTH. 6. PresstheLOCATEswitchtosetthelocationto 001:01.000. 3. CreateanewsonginSequencermode,andinthe P0:Play/RECPreferencepage,checktheMulti RECcheckbox.SetRecordingSetuptoOverwrite. 7. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchto enterrecordstandbymode. 8. Startyourexternalsequencer. TheKRONOSsequencerwillautomaticallybegin recordingwhenitreceivestheMIDIStartmessage transmittedbyyourexternalsequencer. 9. Whenplaybackhasended,stopyourexternal sequencer. TheKRONOSsequencerwillautomaticallystop recordingwhenitreceivestheMIDIStopmessage transmittedbytheexternalsequencer.Youcanalso stoprecordingbypressingtheSEQUENCER START/STOPswitchoftheKRONOS. Afterthis,youcanplaybackthenewlyrecorded sequence: 10.IntheGlobalP1:MIDIpage,setMIDIClockto Internal. 11.SetTempoModetoAuto. 4. PressPlay/Rec/MutetoselectRECforthetracks youwanttorecord. Forthetracksyoudontwanttorecord,selectPlay orMute. Tip:YoucanalsocontrolthePlay/Rec/Mutesetting fromthefrontpanelmixersection,orfromtheP0 12.PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchto playback. Note:Ifthecorrectsoundsarenotselectedwhenyou startplayingback,youmaybeabletosolvethe problembyusingthepagemenucommandMIDI EventEdit(P4:TrackEdit)torespecifythe ProgramChangedata.
84
MIDI recording
1. SelectthedesiredprogramforMIDItrack1,and routeittoIFX1.Thenrecordaphraseofabout sixteenmeasures. IntheP0:Play/RECMIDITrackProgSelect/Mixer page,useProgramSelecttoselectthedesired programforMIDITrack01. IntheP8:InsertEffectMIDIRouting1page,route theMIDITrack01BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.Out Assign)toIFX1.ThenintheP8:InsertEffectInsert FXpage,selectthedesiredeffectforIFX1. SelectMIDITrack01inTrackSelect.Thenpress theSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchandthenthe START/STOPswitch,andrecordaphraseofabout sixteenmeasures.
Note:Fordetailsontheeffectsparametersthatyou canrecordinrealtime,pleaseseeSystem
85
Exclusiveeventssupportedin Sequencer modeon page 661oftheParameterGuide. 3. Stoprecording. Note:Exclusivemessagesarealwaysrecordedon thecurrenttrackselectedbyTrackSelect.Inthis example,theyarerecordedonMIDItrack9. Note:IntheMIDIeventeditscreenyoucanviewthe recordedexclusiveeventsandtheirlocation. ExclusiveeventsaredisplayedasEXCL. Toviewtheseevents,gototheP4:TrackEditTrack Editpage,andselectthepagemenucommand MIDIEventEdit.ThenintheSetEventFilters dialogbox,checkExclusiveandpresstheOK button.
Location Event display
Recording patterns
Recording and editing patterns
Youcanrecordpatternsineitheroftwoways;realtime recordingorsteprecording.However,patternrealtime recordingdiffersfromsongrealtimerecordinginthat youcanuseonlyLooptyperecording. YoucaneditpatternsbyusingEventEditoperationsto modifytherecordeddataorinsertnewdata.Youcan alsousetheGetFromMIDITrackpagemenu commandtoconvertadesiredregionofperformance datafromaMIDItrackintoapattern.Conversely,you canusethePuttoMIDITrackorCopytoMIDITrack pagemenucommandstoplaceorcopythe performancedatafromapatternintoaMIDItrack. YoucanalsouseyourpatternswiththeDrumTrack, viatheConverttoDrumTrackPatternmenu commandonP5:Pattern/RPPR. 1. Createanewsong,andasdescribedin Preparationsforrecordingonpage 76,setthe tracktotheprogramthatwillbeusedbythe pattern. 2. GototheP5:Pattern/RPPRPatternEditpage(See thediagrambelow). 3. UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackthatyouwill usetorecordthepattern. Thepatternwillsoundwiththeprogramandother settingsoftheselectedtrack. 4. SetPattern(PatternBank)toUser,andset PatternSelecttoU00. UserpatternsU00U99canbecreatedforeachsong. 5. SelectthepagemenucommandPattern Parameter. Adialogboxwillappear.
86
MIDI recording
Recording patterns
8. Beginrealtimerecording. Youcanrecordinthesamewayasyoudidwhen recordingtrackswithLoopAllTracks.(SeeLoop AllTracksonpage 80.) PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch,and thenpresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Aftertheprecount,patternrecordingwillbegin. Playthekeyboardandoperatethejoystickand othercontrollerstorecordyourperformance. Whenyoureachtheendofthepattern,the sequencerwillreturntothebeginningofthepattern andcontinuerecording.Ifyoucontinuerecording, thenewlyrecordeddatawillbeaddedtothe previouslyrecordeddata.
Pattern Select
9. Ifyouwanttodeletespecificdatawhileyou continuepatternrecording,youcanpressthe SEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchorcheckthe RemoveDatacheckbox. Fordetailsrefertostep6ofLoopAllTrackson page 80. 10.PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchto stoprecording. Ifyoumadeamistakeordecidetorerecord,press theSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtostop recording,andpresstheCOMPAREswitch.Then beginthepatternrecordingprocedureagainasin step8.
Controller
Resonance level (CC#71) EG release time (CC#72) EG attack time (CC#73) Low pass filter cutoff (CC#74) EG decay time (CC#75) LFO1 speed (CC#76) LFO1 depth (pitch) (CC#77) LFO1 delay (CC#78) Filter EG intensity (CC#79) SW1 modulation (CC#80) SW2 modulation (CC#81) Channel after touch Pitch bender
Reset value
64 (center) 64 (center) 64 (center) 64 (center) 64 (center) 64 (center) 64 (center) 64 (center) 64 (center) 00 (zero) 00 (zero) 00 (zero) 00 (zero)
Reset value
00 (zero) 00 (zero) 127 (max) 64 (center) 00 (zero) 00 (zero) 00 (zero) 64 (center)
87
Using the control surface to record changes in the pan, EQ, volume, or Tone Adjust parameters of a MIDI track
Duringrealtimerecording,youcanusethecontrol surfacetocontrolthepan,EQ,volume,orToneAdjust parameters,andrecordthesechangessothattheywill bereproducedduringplayback. Ifyouwillbeadjustingmorethanonetrack simultaneously,youllneedtousemultitrack recording. Note:Changesyoumakeusingthecontrolsurfaceare transmittedascontrolchangesorsystemexclusive messages.Inordertorecordthesechanges,theGlobal P1:MIDIMIDIEnableControlChangeandEnable Exclusiveitemsmustbechecked.MovetoGlobal modeandmakesurethattheseitemsarechecked.
88
Audio recording
Audio Track 01
Setting parameters
Region00
Region01
Audio Track 02
Setting parameters
Region02
Hard Disk
Region 0000: Guitar1 Song No.: Song00 Track No.: Track01 Allow Tempo: On Tempo: 120 Start: 000 End: 95999 Anchor Point: 0 Wave Name: GUITAR1.WAV 0001: Guitar2
NEWFIL_A
SONG000
ATRACK01
GUITAR1.WAV GUITAR2.WAV
ATRACK02
VOICE1.WAV
NEWFILE.SNG
NEW SONG
Tracks PATTERN 00
0002: Voice1
Regions
89
90
Audio recording
USB1&2aretheleftandrightchannelsoftheUSB audioinput.Formoreinformation,seeUSBportson page 8. S/P DIFL&S/P DIFRaretheleftandrightchannels oftheopticalS/P DIFinput.Formoreinformation,see S/P DIFIN&OUTonpage 9.
PLAY/MUTE
Theseindicatewhethereachexternalaudioinput signalisinPlayorMutecondition. UsetheMIXPLAY/MUTE16switchestochangethe status.
SOLO On/Off
ThisindicatestheSOLOstatusofeachexternalaudio inputsignal.UsetheMIXSELECT16switchesto changethesolostatus. SoundwillbeoutputonlyfromchannelswhoseSOLO isOn.Otherchannelswillbemuted.Solooperation includesbothMIDItracksandaudiotracks.
Pan
Thisspecifiesthepanningofeachexternalaudioinput signal.Ifyouareinputtingastereoaudiosource,you willnormallypantheinputstoL000andR127 respectively.
Level
Thiscontrolstheleveloftheexternalaudiosignal.The defaultis127. Note:theanalogaudiosignalsfromAUDIOINPUTS1 &2areconvertedintodigitalformbyanA/D converter.Thisparametersetsthelevelofthesignal immediatelyafterthisconversion. Ifthesoundisdistortedeventhoughthislevelsetting isverylow,seeTipsforeliminatingdistortionwhen usingtheanaloginputsonpage 95.
REC Bus
ThissendstheexternalaudioinputsignaltotheREC buses(fourmonochannels:1,2,3,4). TheRECbusesarededicatedinternalrecordingbuses thatyoucanuseforrecordingorsamplingaudio tracks. RecordingbecomespossibleifyouchooseaRECbus astheSourceBus.Forexample,youcanusetheREC busesifyouwanttorecordonlyanaudioinputsource thatisbeingplayedalongwiththesongbeingoutput fromtheL/Rbus(i.e.,recordtheinputsource,butnot thesongplayback).Youcanalsomixseveralaudio inputstotheRECbuses,ormixthedirectsignalfrom audioinputstoRECbusesalongwithpostIFXsound andrecordtheresult. Off:ThesignalwillnotbeoutputtotheRECbuses. NormallyyouwillleavethisOff. 1,2,3,4:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesentto thespecifiedRECbus.ThePansettingisignored,and thesignalissentinmonaural.
91
L/R BUS
CLIP !
Insert Effects Audio Input 1 Level Pan Insert Effects Audio Input 2 Level Pan Insert Effects Sequencer Playback Keyboard BUS = L/R or IFX1-12
IfStereoPairisonandAudioInput1/2isselected, AUDIOINPUT1willbeinputtotheoddnumbered track,andAUDIOINPUT2willbeinputtotheeven numberedtrack.Similarly,USB1/2.andS/P DIFL/R willbeinputtotheoddnumberedandeven numberedtracksrespectively. L,R,L/R:TheL/RbusafterpassingthroughTFX1and 2willberecorded.Choosethisifyouwanttorecordan externalaudiosignalbeingsenttotheL/Rbus,orthe soundbeingproducedbytheKRONOS(andsentto theL/Rbus)inresponsetosequencerplayback, keyboardplaying,orMIDIinput. IfStereoPairison,Lissenttooddnumberedtracks, andRissenttoevennumberedtracks. REC1,2,1/2,REC3,4,3/4:TheREC1/2orREC3/4 buseswillberecorded.Choosethisifyouwantto recordonlytheaudioinputwhilehearingthe sequencerplaybackandyourkeyboardplayingfrom theL/Routputs.Youcanalsomixseveralaudioinputs totheRECbuses,orusetheRECbusestomixthe directsoundfromtheaudioinputswiththesound processedbyinserteffects,andrecordtheresult. IfStereoPairison,RECbus1(3)issenttoodd numberedtracks,andRECbus2(4)issenttoeven numberedtracks. Indiv.14,Indiv.1/2and3/4:Thisallowsyoutorecord thesignalattheindividualoutputsdirectly,without theneedforanexternalcable.Similarlytousingthe RECbuses,youcanchoosethiswhenyouwantto monitortheL/Routputwhilerecordingadifferent signal. IfStereoPairisonandyouveselectedIndiv.1/2,the Indiv.bus1willbesenttooddnumberedtracks,and Indiv.bus2willbesenttoevennumberedtracks.
REC Source
Thisselectsthesourcethatwillberecordedonthe track.Thesignalofthebuslineyouspecifyherewillbe recorded.Seebelowforadiagramofbuseswhen recordingfromtheaudioinputs;formoredetailed diagrams,seeunder02:AudioTrackMixeron page 519oftheParameterGuide. IfyousettheTrackSelectfieldtoAudioTrack,you willbeabletomonitortheRECSourceofthattrack. Theoptionswilldifferslightlydependingonwhether ornotStereoPairisenabled. AudioInput1,2,1/2,USB1,2,1/2,orS/P DIFL,R, L/R:Choosethesetodirectlyrecordtheaudioinput fromtheanalog,S/PDIF,orUSBinputs.Theinputs willberecordeddirectlywithoutpassingthroughthe L/Rbus,RECbuses,orIndividualbuses.Noneofthe AudioInputsettingswillaffecttherecordedsignal; thisincludesBus(IFX/Indiv),Pan,Level,Solo,and Play/Mute.SeethediagramRECSource=Audio Input1,2,1/2.
Play/Rec/Mute
Usethistomuteanaudiotrack,ortoselectthe recordingtracksformultitrackrecording.During playback,orforsingletrackrecording(normal recording),itispossibleonlytoselectPlayorMutefor tracks(playbacktracks)otherthantherecordingtrack. Formultitrackrecording,trackscanbesettoPlay, Mute,orRec.Thesettingwillalternateeachtimeyou pressthePlay/Rec/Mutebutton.
Solo On/Off
ThisturnstheSolofunctionon/off.
Pan
Thisspecifiesthepanofaudiotrack.
92
Audio recording
Recording procedure
Volume
Setsthevolumeofaudiotracks116.
Recording procedure
AudioTrackAutomationEvents:Thepreviously recordeddatawillremain,andthenewlyrecorded datawillbeaddedtoit.
Manual Punch In
Selectthismethodwhenyouwishtousethe SEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchorafootswitchto rerecordselectedportionsofapreviouslyrecorded track.
Auto Punch In
Selectthismethodwhenyouwishtoautomaticallyre recordselectedportionsofapreviouslyrecorded track. ForbothManualPunchInandAutoPunchIn, recordingwilloccurasfollows. AudioTrackAudioEvents,AudioTrackAutomation Events:Onlythemeasuresyourecordedwillbe overwritten;thedatainsubsequentmeasureswill remainunchanged.
Recording Setup
Theseparametersspecifyhowaudiotrackswillbe recorded. Fordetailsoneachrecordingmethod,refertothe examplesforMIDItracks.(SeeRecordingsetupon page 78) However,thisdiffersfromMIDItrackrecordingas follows.
Overwrite
Whenrecordingforthefirsttime,youwillnormally selectthismethod. Tobeginrecording,presstheSEQUENCERREC/ WRITEswitchandthentheSEQUENCERSTART/ STOPswitch.Tostoprecording,pressthe SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchonceagain. AudioTrackAudioEvents:Onlythemeasuresyou recordedwillbeoverwritten;thedatainsubsequent measureswillremainunchanged. AudioTrackAutomationEvents:Alldatafollowing themeasureatwhichyoubeginrecordingwillbe erased.
Automation Only
Normallyyouwillrecordwiththisunchecked.Both audiotrackautomationeventsandaudioeventswill berecorded. Ifthisischecked,onlyaudiotrackautomationevents willberecorded.Usethissettingifyouwanttorecord automationafterrecording.
Overdub
SelectthismethodwhenyouwishtoaddAudioTrack AutomationEventdatatoapreviouslyrecordedtrack. Tobeginrecording,presstheSEQUENCER REC/WRITEswitchandthentheSEQUENCER START/STOPswitch.Tostoprecording,pressthe SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchonceagain. AudioTrackAudioEvents:AswithOverwrite,only themeasuresyourecordedwillbeoverwritten;the datainsubsequentmeasureswillremainunchanged.
Auto Input
Thisparametercontrolsmonitoringduringrecording. Itautomaticallyswitchesallrecordenabledtracks betweenmonitoringtherecordinputandthetrack playback,accordingtowhetherornotrecordingis active. Thisletsyoulistentoaudioyouvealreadyrecorded whenpunchingin,andalsomeansthatyoudonthave todisabletrackrecordenablesinordertolistento playback.
93
Thisappliesonlytorecordenabledtracks.IfMulti RECisoff,thisistheRECTrack(asselectedinthe TrackSelectmenu).IfMultiRECison,thismeansto alltrackswhosePlay/Rec/MutebuttonissettoRec. Normally,AutoInputshouldbeenabled(checked). Whenenabled,recordenabledtrackswillbe monitoredasfollows: Whenstopped,themonitorcarriestheinputsignal. Whenplayingbutnotrecording,themonitor carriesthetrackplayback. Whenrecording,themonitorcarriestheinput signal. Foraudiotrackswhicharenotrecordenabled,youll alwaysbemonitoringthetrackplayback. Audiotrackmonitoring (Input:RECSource,Track:trackplayback) During Stop During Play During Rec Auto Input During Punch Rec InOut Out In
Record Tracks
On Off On
Input Input
Track
Input
Track
Input
Track*
Setting levels
Track Playback
Other Tracks
Forthebestresults,setthelevelsasdescribedbelow: 1. IfMultiRECisoff,setTrackSelecttoanAudio Track. or IfMultiRECisOn,recordenablethedesired Tracks,andthenpresstheSEQUENCER REC/WRITEswitch. TheLevelMeter(s)willnowshowtherecording level(s). 2. Initially,settheRecordingLevel(s)to0.0dB. 3. Adjustthelevel(s)oftheinputsignal(s)sothatit isashighaspossiblewithoutactivatingtheCLIP! orADCOVERLOAD!messages. IfyoureusingAUDIOINPUTS1and/or2,adjustthe volumeusingrearpanelMIC/LINEswitchesand LEVELknobs. IfyoureusingtheUSBorS/P DIFinputs,adjustthe outputlevelofyourexternalaudiosource. Ifyouresamplingexternalaudiothroughtheinternal effects,youmayalsoneedtoadjusttheindividual effectsinputand/oroutputlevelparameters. Ifyoureusinginternalsounds,adjustthelevelsusing thecontrolsurface,effectsinput/outputtrim,etc. 4. Ifthelevelisstillnothighenough,increasethe RecordingLevelusingtheonscreenslider. Again,thegoalistogetthelevelashighaspossible withoutactivatingtheCLIP!orADCOVERLOAD! messages.
Off
Rehearsal
Checkthisifyouwanttorehearsebeforeactually recordingonanaudiotrack.(recordingwillnot actuallyoccur).
94
Audio recording
Recording procedure
LINE
Setup
2. IntheP0:Play/RECAudioInputSamplingpage, settheAudioInputparametersasdescribed below. Thefollowingsettingsaremadebydefault,soyou dontneedtomakethemyourself:
95
Record
7. IntheP0:Play/RECPreferencepage,use Locationtospecifythelocationatwhich recordingwillbegin. Ifyouwanttostartrecordingfromthebeginningof thesong,setthisto001:01.000. 8. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch TheKRONOSwillbeinrecordreadymode.If youvemademetronomesettings,themetronome willsoundthecount. 9. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Recordingwillstartfromthelocationyouspecified inLocation. AUDIOTRK01(LevelMeter1,RecordingLevel1, Name1,Take,TakeNo.)willappear. UsetheName1fieldtospecifyanameforthe regionandWAVEfilethatwillbecreated. Ifyouintendtorecordseveraltakesonthesame track,checktheTakeoptionbox. 4. SpecifytherecordingmethodinRecordingSetup andRecordingSetup(AudioTrack). Overwrite:selected AutomationOnly:unchecked SourceDirectSolo:unchecked AutoInput:checked Rehearsal:unchecked Note:Ifyouwanttorecordfromthebeginningof thesongorfromthemeasurespecifiedbyLocation, youshouldselectOverwrite. Ifyouhavespecifiedametronomeprecount (Precount[Measure]),recordingwillbeginafter theprecount.Ifaperformancehasalreadybeen recordedonaMIDItrack,thatMIDItrackwillalso playback. 10.Tostoprecording,presstheSEQUENCER START/STOPswitch.
96
Audio recording
Recording procedure
Note:YoucanusefunctionssuchasComparewhen recordingaudioevents,justasyoucanwhen recordingMIDItracks. Note:Ifyouwanttoapplyaninserteffectonan audiotrack,setBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign) toIFX1IFX12. ThenselectL/RastheBusSelectsetting(P8:Insert EffectInsertFXpage)thatfollowstheinserteffect youused. Note:Ifyouwanttoapplymastereffectstoanaudio track,useSend1(MFX1)andSend2(MFX2)toset thesendlevelstothemastereffect.Ifyoureusing aninserteffect,adjusttheSend1andSend2settings thatfollowthatinserteffect.
Recording an external input source on audio track 2 while you listen to the previously-recorded audio track 1
Inthisexample,wellrecordanotherguitar performanceonaudiotrack2whilemonitoringthe performanceyoupreviouslyrecordedonaudiotrack1 asdescribedinRecordinganexternalinputonaudio track1. 1. IntheP0:Play/RECAudioTrackMixerpage,set theAudioInput2RECSourcetoAudioInput1(In 1). AUDIOTRACK2RECSource:AudioInput1(In1) 2. SetTrackSelecttoAudioTrack02. 3. Recordasdescribedinstep8andfollowingofthe precedingsection.
Setup
2. IntheP0:Play/RECAudioInput/Samplingpage, settheAudioInputparametersasshownbelow thatthesignalfromtheAUDIOINPUT1jackis senttoIFX1. UseGlobalSetting:Off BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.):IFX1 INPUT1Level:127 INPUT1Pan:L000 INPUT1RECBus:Off 4. IntheP0:Play/RECAudioTrackMixerpage,set RECSourcetoREC1sothatthesignaloftheREC buswillberecordedonaudiotrack1. AudioTrack1RECSource:REC1
97
Rehearse
Ifdesired,youcansimulatetheactionofrecording withoutactuallyrecording.Thiswillfunctionjustasif youwererecording,butnoaudioevent,region,or WAVEfilewillbecreated. 3. InRecordingSetup(AudioTrack),checkthe Rehearsaloption. 4. UseLocationtospecifythelocationatwhich youwanttostartrecording.Setthisseveral measuresearlierthantheregionyouspecifiedfor M***M***. 5. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch. 5. IntheP0:Play/RECPreferencepage,setTrack SelecttoAudioTrack01. Theremainingstepsarethesameasstep3and followingoftheprecedingsectionRecordingan externalaudiosourceonaudiotrack1.Pleaserefer tothatsectionfordetails. Youwillenterrecordreadymode. OnceyoupresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITE switch,youwillbeunabletochangetheaudiotrack selectioninTrackSelect. 6. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Playbackwillbeginfromthemeasurespecifiedby Location,andsimulatedrecordingwilloccuronly intherangeofmeasuresspecifiedbyM***M***. Thenplaybackwillresume,andwillcontinuetothe endofthesong. Note:IftheRecordingSetup(AudioTrack) parameterAutoInputisOff,youwillalwaysbe abletoheartheRECSource.Formoreinformation, seeAutoInputonpage 527oftheParameter Guide. 7. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchto stoprecording. 8. InRecordingSetup(AudioTrack),uncheckthe Rehearsaloption.
Setup
1. IntheP0:Play/RECPreferencepage,makesure thatAudioTrack01isselectedfortheTrack Selectparameter. 2. UseRecordingSetuptospecifyhowrecording willstart. Inthisexample,choosepunchinrecording. AutoPunchIn:on M***M***:Specifytherangeofmeasuresfor whichyouwanttorecord. AUDIOTRK01Name,Take,TakeNo.:Specifythe regionandwavefilenamethatyouwanttorecord. Note:IfyousetRecordingSetuptoAutoPunchIn andsetM***M***tothedesiredrangeof measures,playbackwilloccuruntilthatrangeof measures,andthenonlythespecifiedrangeof measureswillberecorded. IfyousetRecordingSetuptoManualPunchIn,the measuresyouspecifybypressingtheSEQUENCER REC/WRITEswitchorfootswitchwillberecorded. Inthiscase,presstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOP
Record
9. UseLocationtospecifythelocationatwhich youwanttostartrecording.Setthisseveral measuresearlierthantheregionyouspecifiedfor M***M***. 10.PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch. Youwillenterrecordreadymode. OnceyoupresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITE switch,youwillbeunabletochangetheaudiotrack selectioninTrackSelect. 11.PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Playbackwillbeginfromthemeasurespecifiedby Location,andrecordingwilloccuronlyinthe rangeofmeasuresspecifiedbyM***M***.Then playbackwillresume,andwillcontinuetotheend ofthesong. Note:IftheRecordingSetup(AudioTrack) parameterAutoInputisOff,youwillalwaysbe abletoheartheRECSource. 12.PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchto stoprecording.
98
Audio recording
Setup
1. IntheP0:Play/RECAudioTrackMixerpage,set upbothaudiotracks1and2asshownbelow: Play/Rec/Mute:Play SoloOn/Off:On Pan:L000 Volume:127 Note:ByturningonSoloforbothAUDIO1and AUDIO2,youarespecifyingthatonlytheseaudio trackswillbeheardandrecorded. 2. IntheP8:InsertEffectAudioRouting1page,set upbothaudiotracks1and2asshownbelow: BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign):L/R Send1(MFX1)andSend2(MFX2):000 Note:Ifyouwanttoapplyinserteffectstotheaudio tracks,setBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)to yourchoiceofIFX1IFX12.ThenchooseL/Rforthe BusSelectsetting(P8:InsertEffectInsertFXpage) thatfollowstheinserteffectyoureusing. Note:Ifyouwanttoapplymastereffectstoanaudio track,useSend1(MFX1)andSend2(MFX2)to adjustthesendlevelstothemastereffects.Ifyouare usinganinserteffectontheaudiotrack,adjustthe Send1andSend2thatfollowtheinserteffectyoure using. 3. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchto playbackthesong,andadjustthebalanceofthe audiotrack1and2outputlevels. Theoutputlevelofeachaudiotrackisadjustedin theP0:Play/RECAudioTrackMixerpagebythe audiotrack1andaudiotrack2Volumesetting. Whenyouvefinishedmakingadjustments,stop playback.
Record
7. SetLocationtothebeginningofthesong(001: 01.000). 8. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch. Youwillbeinrecordreadymode. OnceyoupresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITE switch,youwillbeunabletochangetheaudiotrack selectioninTrackSelect. 9. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Playbackwillbegin,andbouncerecordingwillalso beginsimultaneously. Whentheaudiotrackshavefinishedplayingback, recordingwillalsoend.Songplaybackwillalsoend automatically.
99
4. PresstheCONTROLASSIGNAUDIOswitch severaltimessothattheHDR18LEDlocatedat therightoftheswitchislit. 5. InthecenteroftherightedgeoftheLCD,check LinkKBDRECTrktoCtrlSurface. IfyoucheckthisandpresstheMIXSELECT3 switch,eachknobwillcontrolaudiotrack3,andat thesametimeTrackSelectwillswitchtoAudio Track03. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtoplay back,andoperatetheknobsandslidersetc.to rehearseyourmix. IfMIXERKNOBissettoCHANNELSTRIP,knob1 willcontrolpan,knobs26willcontrolEQ,and knobs7and8willcontrolthesendlevels.Useslider 3toadjustthevolumeofaudiotrack3. Whenyouvefinishedrehearsing,pressthe SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtostop. PresstheLOCATEswitch.
Recording automation events for pan, EQ, and volume etc. on an audio track
Allaudiotrackparameters(Pan,Volume,Send1/2, andEQ)canberecordedinrealtime.Inthisexample, wellrecordPanandVolumechangesonaudiotrack3. GototheP0:Play/RECAudioTrackMixerpage,and useTrackSelecttoselectAudioTrack03asthetrack toberecorded.YoucouldusetheVALUEcontrollerto operateadesiredparameter,butusingthecontrol surfaceletsyoumixuptoeighttrackssimultaneously.
Record
6. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch. Themetronomewillbeginsounding,andyouwill beinrecordreadymode. 7. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Afteratwomeasurecount,recordingwillbegin. Usetheslidersetc.tocontrolthevolume. Note:Whenrecordingautomationevents,youcan usequantization,theresolutionsetting,andthe comparefunctioninthesamewayasforaMIDI track. 8. Whenyourefinishedrecording,pressthe SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtostop recording. 9. Listentotherecordedresult. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtoplay back. Ifyouwanttorecordagain,usetheCompare function(presstheCOMPAREswitch)torerecord. 10.Ifyouwanttocontinueaddingautomationevents, repeattherecordingprocedurefromstep6.
Setup
1. GototheP0:Play/RECPreferencepage. 2. InRecordingSetup,RecordingSetup(Audio Track),choosethedesiredrecordingmethod. Inthisexample,wellchooseoverdubrecordingso thatwecanrecordrepeatedpasses,addingmore automationdataoneachpass. RecordingSetup Overdub:on RecordingSetup(AudioTrack) AutomationOnly:checked IfyourecordwithoutcheckingAutomationOnly, audioeventswillalsoberecorded.Notethatthis willeraseandoverwritetheaudioeventsthat alreadyexist. 3. GototheP0:Play/RECControlSurfacepage.
100
Audio recording
Event
WhenselectingaWAVEfile,youcanpressthePlay buttontoauditionthefilestohelpyoufindthe desiredone. YoucanalsousetheNamefieldlocatedaboveto assignanametotheregion.EdittheNameafter youveselectedafile. Note:TheOKandPlaybuttonsareavailableonlyif youveselecteda44.1kHzor48kHzWAVEfile. Otherwise,thebuttonwillbegrayedoutandyou wontbeabletopressit. Editingaregionwillaffecttheaudiotrackforthe entiresong.Usecautionwheneditingaregionthats alreadyusedinanaudiotrack.
101
7. PresstheOKbutton,theselectedregionwillbe placedintheaudiotrack.
8. Selecttheeventthatyouwanttoedit,andusethe locationparametersMeasureandBeatTickto editthelocationoftheevent. Youcantplacetwoormoreeventsatthesame location. 9. PresstheDonebutton. 10.PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch,and makesurethattheWAVEfileplaysback. YoucanpresstheCOMPAREswitchtoreturntothe statepriortotheedityoujustperformed. Wevekeptthisexamplesimple,butyoucanalso performeditingoperationssuchaschangingthe playbackpositionoftheWAVEfileinstepsofasingle sample,changingthelocationrelativetoananchor point,orcrossfadingtwoaudioevents.Formore information,seeAudioAutomationEditonpage 641 oftheParameterGuide.
102
Song editing
Songs
Song editing
YoucanapplyavarietyofeditingoperationstoSongs, MIDITracks,andAudioTracks,asdescribedbelow.
Songs
CopyFromSong:Thiscommandcopiesallofthe settingdataandmusicaldatafromthespecifiedsong tothecurrentlyselectedsong.Formoreinformation, seeCopyFromSongonpage 624oftheParameter Guide. FF/REWSpeed:Thisallowsyoutosetthespeedat whichfastforwardorrewindwilloccurwhenyou presstheFForREWbuttons.Formoreinformation, seeFF/REWSpeedonpage 625oftheParameter Guide. GMInitialize:ThiscommandtransmitsaGMSystem OnmessagetotheSequencermode,resettingallMIDI trackstotheGMsettings.Formoreinformation,see GMInitializeonpage 626oftheParameterGuide. BounceAllTracksToDisk:Thiscommandrecordsall tracksinthesongtoasinglestereoWAVEfile.For moreinformation,seeBounceAllTracksToDiskon page 635oftheParameterGuide. SetSongLength:Thiscommandchangesthelengthof thespecifiedsong.Whenitisexecuted,thelengthof themastertrackwillchange,andthenumberof measuresplayedwillchange.Formoreinformation, seeSetSongLengthonpage 642oftheParameter Guide.
MIDI Tracks
Track editing
MIDIStepRecording:Itallowsyoutospecifythe lengthandvelocityofeachnotenumerically,andto inputMIDIdata,thepitches,fromthekeyboard.You canusetheRestbuttonandTiebuttontoenterarestor tie.Formoreinformation,seeMIDIStepRecording onpage 636oftheParameterGuide. MIDIEventEdit:Hereyoucaneditindividualevents ofMIDIdata.Formoreinformation,seeMIDIEvent Editonpage 637oftheParameterGuide. BounceTrack:Thiscommandcombinesthemusical dataofthebouncesourceandbouncedestination tracks,andplacesthecombineddatainthebounce destination.Allmusicaldatainthebouncesourcewill beerased.Formoreinformation,seeBounceTrack onpage 643oftheParameterGuide. CreateControlData:Thiscommandcreatescontrol change,aftertouch,pitchbend,ortempodatainthe specifiedregionofaMIDItrackorthemastertrack. Formoreinformation,seeCreateControlDataon page 647oftheParameterGuide. EraseControlData:Thiscommanderasesdatasuchas controlchanges,aftertouch,pitchbend,ortempoin thespecifiedrange.Formoreinformation,seeErase ControlDataonpage 648oftheParameterGuide. Quantize:ThiscommandcorrectsthetimingofMIDI dataofthetypeyouspecify(notedata,controlchange, aftertouch,pitchbend,programchange,etc.)inthe track.Formoreinformation,seeQuantizeon page 648oftheParameterGuide. Shift/EraseNote:Thiscommandshifts(moves)or erasesthespecifiednotenumbersinaspecifiedMIDI trackandrangeofmeasures.Formoreinformation,see Shift/EraseNoteonpage 649oftheParameter Guide. ModifyVelocity:Thiscommandmodifiesthevelocity valuesofnotesinthespecifiedareasothattheywill changeovertimeaccordingtoaselectedcurve.For moreinformation,seeModifyVelocityonpage 650 oftheParameterGuide.
Pattern editing
StepRecording(LoopType):Hereyoucanperform steprecordingintoapattern.Formoreinformation, seeStepRecording(LoopType)onpage 654ofthe ParameterGuide. EventEdit:Hereyoucaneditindividualeventsofthe musicaldatainapattern.Formoreinformation,see EventEditonpage 654oftheParameterGuide.
103
PatternParameter:Thiscommandspecifiesthe numberofmeasuresandthetimesignatureofthe selectedpattern.Formoreinformation,seePattern Parameteronpage 655oftheParameterGuide. ErasePattern:Thiscommanderasesthedatafromthe selectedpattern.Formoreinformation,seeErase Patternonpage 655oftheParameterGuide. CopyPattern:Thiscommandcopiesthesettingsand musicaldataoftheselectedpatterntoanotherpattern. Formoreinformation,seeCopyPatternonpage 655 oftheParameterGuide. BouncePattern:Thiscommandcombinesthemusical dataofthebouncesourcepatternandbounce destinationpattern,andplacesthecombinedmusical datainthebouncedestination.Formoreinformation, seeBouncePatternonpage 655oftheParameter Guide. GetFromMIDITrack:Thiscommandtakesmusical datafromaMIDItrackandloadsitintothespecified pattern.Formoreinformation,seeGetFromMIDI Trackonpage 656oftheParameterGuide.
PutToMIDITrack:Thiscommandplacesapattern intoaMIDItrack.Formoreinformation,seePutTo MIDITrackonpage 656oftheParameterGuide. CopyToMIDITrack:Thiscommandcopiesthe specifiedareaofmusicaldatafromthespecified patterntoaMIDItrackasmusicaldata.Formore information,seeCopyToMIDITrackonpage 656of theParameterGuide. ConverttoDrumTrackPattern:Thiscommand convertsauserpatternintoauserdrumtrackpattern, whichcanthenbeusedwiththeDrumTrackinany mode.Formoreinformation,seeConverttoDrum TrackPatternonpage 657oftheParameterGuide. LoadDrumTrackPattern:Thiscommandloadsauser DrumTrackpatternintoauserpattern.Formore information,seeLoadDrumTrackPatternon page 657oftheParameterGuide. EraseDrumTrackPattern:Thiserasesthespecified DrumTrackpattern.Formoreinformation,seeErase DrumTrackPatternonpage 635oftheParameter Guide.
Audio Tracks
AudioEventEdit:Thiscommandletsyouedit individualaudioeventsthathavebeenrecorded,or trim(i.e.,makeadjustmentsinstepsofasinglesample to)theregionusedbyaudioevents.Formore information,seeAudioEventEditonpage 638ofthe ParameterGuide. AudioAutomationEdit:Thisletsyoueditindividual automationdataevents.Formoreinformation,see AudioAutomationEditonpage 641ofthe ParameterGuide.
104
Song editing
Audio Tracks
RegionEdit:Hereshowtoedittheregionsusedinan audiotrack.InadditiontoImportingorPastinga region,youcanusetheTrimdialogboxtospecifythe rangeinwhichaWAVEfilewillplayback.Formore information,seeRegionEditonpage 651ofthe ParameterGuide. VolumeRamp:Thiscommandmodifiesthedata values(volume)ofthespecifiedarea.Youcan graduallyincrease(FadeIn)ordecrease(FadeOut)the volumebetweenthestartandendpoints.Formore information,seeVolumeRamponpage 653ofthe ParameterGuide. CopySongsTempotoRegion:Thiscommand changesthetempousedbythespecifiedregionsof audioeventssothattheaudioeventtempowillmatch thetempoofthelocationinwhichthoseregionsplay back. Ifthetempoofanaudiotrackmatchesthetempoofthe MIDItracks,executingthiscommandtomatchthe regiontempowillensurethattheAdjustRegionto SongsTempo(TimeStretch)orAdjustSongsTempo toRegioncommandscanbeexecutedcorrectly.For moreinformation,seeCopySongsTempotoRegion onpage 653oftheParameterGuide. AdjustSongsTempotoRegion:Thiscommand createstempoeventsinthemastertracktomatchthe tempooftheregionsusedbytheaudioeventsinthe specifiedrange. Thisisusefulifyoucreateaudiotracksinapreviously recordedregion,andwantalltracks(includingMIDI tracks)tomatchthatregion.Formoreinformation,see AdjustSongsTempotoRegiononpage 653ofthe ParameterGuide. AdjustRegiontoSongsTempo(TimeStretch):Ifthe tempoofregionsusedbyaudioeventsinthespecified rangediffersfromthetempooftherangeinwhich thoseregionsplayback,youcanexecuteTimeStretch (Sustaining)tocreatenewWAVEfilesandregions. Audioeventsthatusethenewlycreatedregionswill alsobecreatedautomatically. Ifyouwanttomodifythetempoofanexistingsong,it isconvenienttofirstspecifythedesiredtempointhe mastertrack,andthenexecutethiscommandsothat theaudiotrack(s)willbecreatedaccordingtothenew tempo.Formoreinformation,seeAdjustRegionto SongsTempoonpage 654oftheParameterGuide.
105
ThissectionexplainshowtoassignapatterntoRPPR, andhowtoplayandrecordusingRPPR.
3. Selectthekeytowhichthepatternwillbe assigned. SelectC#2.HolddowntheENTERswitchandplay akey,orusethescrollbarlocatedattherighttofind thekey. Note:C2andlowerkeysareusedtostopplayback, andcannotbeassigned. 4. CheckAssignforC#2. 5. SetBanktoPreset,andsetPatternNameto P00. 9. ModifyonlythePatternName.SelectPattern Name,andpressthe switchtoselectP01. 10.SelecttheD#2parameter,andpressthePaste button. TheAssign,Bank,PatternName,Track Name,Mode,Shift,andSyncsettingsyou madeinsteps5and6willbecopiedautomatically. Asyoudidinstep9,setPatterntoP02. Note:WhenmakingRPPRsettings,youcanusethe CopybuttonandPastebuttoninthiswayto efficientlyassigntheBank,PatternName,and TrackNameetc.toeachkey. 11.Asdescribedabove,assignseveralotherpatterns suchasP03andhigher. 12.PresstheC#2key.Theassignedpatternwillplay. TakeyourfingerofftheC#2key,andpresstheD2 key.Thepatternwillchange,andplaybackwill begin.Atthistime,thepatternoperationwill dependontheSyncandModesetting. SetKEYtoC#2,andsetSynctoMeasure.Make thesamesettingforD2(Seethediagramabove). 6. SetTrackNametoT01. Theselectedpatternwillbeplayedaccordingtothe settings(program,etc.)ofthetrackyouselecthere. Nowpressthenotesconsecutively.Noticethatthe patternsoperateinadifferentway. WiththeMeasuresetting,patternswillbe handledinonemeasureunits.Thesecondand
106
RPPR playback
13.Tostopplayback,eitherpressthesamekeyonce again,orpresstheC2orlowerkey.
RPPR playback
LetsusetheRPPRyoucreatedtoperformintheP0: Play/RECMIDITrackProgSelect/Mixerpage. 1. SelecttheP0:Play/RECMIDITrackProgSelect/ Mixerpage(Seethediagrambelow). 2. ChecktheRPPRcheckbox. TheRPPRfunctionwillbeturnedon.Settheon/off foreachsong. 3. Playthekeyboard,andpatternswillbeginplaying accordingtotheRPPRsettings. PatternplaybackforakeywithaSyncsettingof BeatorMeasurewillsynctotheplaybackofthe firstpattern.Formoreinformation,seeSyncon page 592oftheParameterGuide. Ifyouareplayingthepatterninsynchronization (whenSyncisBeat,Measure,orSEQ),thepattern willstartaccuratelyifyouplaythenoteslightly earlierthanthetimingofthebeatormeasure.Even ifyouplaythenoteslightlylaterthanthebeator measure(butnolaterthana32ndnote),itwillbe consideredtohavestartedatthebeatormeasure, andthebeginningofthepatternwillbe compressedsothattheremainderoftheplayback willbecorrect. IfyouwishtotriggertheRPPRfunctionfroman externalMIDIdevice,usetheMIDIchannelthatis selectedforTrackSelect. 4. ToturnofftheRPPRfunction,unchecktheRPPR checkbox.
RPPR On
107
MIDITrackProgSelect/Mixerpagetoassignadrum programtoMIDItrack1,andabassprogramtoMIDI track2. 1. AssignseveralkeysstartingwithC#2topreset patterns. ChecktheC#2Assignsetting,andsetBankto PresetandPatternNametothedesiredpreset pattern.ForTrackName,selectMIDItrack1(T01) towhichyouassignedadrumprogram. 2. ForeachRPPRpattern,setSynctoSEQ(Seethe diagramabove). WithasettingofSEQ,patternsplayedbytheRPPR functionwhilethesequencerisplayingorrecording willstartinsynchronizationwiththemeasuresof thesequencer.
Sync settings Key 1 on Key 2 on Key 1 off
patterntostartplaying,regardlessofthetrackthats selectedinTrackSelect. Keystowhichpatternsarenotassignedcanbe playedintheusualway.Youcanplaytheprogram thatsassignedtotheMIDItrackyouselecthere. 5. SinceyouwantthetracksyouplayviaRPPRand thetrackyouplayfromthekeyboardtobe recordedatthesametime,checktheMultiREC checkbox. Note:IfRecordingSetupissettoLoopAllTracks, itwillnotbepossibletoselectMultiREC.Setthe RecordingSetuptoOverwrite. 6. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchto enterrecordreadymode. 7. Forthetracksyouwillberecording(MIDITrack1, 2),pressPlay/Rec/Mutetomakethemindicate REC. Makesurethatthetracksyourenotrecordingare indicatedasPlayorMute. 8. PresstheLOCATEswitchtosetthelocationto 001:01.000. 9. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch,and thenpressakeythatplaysanRPPRpattern. If,duringtheprecountbeforerecording,youpress akeythatsassignedtoanRPPRpattern,thepattern willbeginplaying(andbeingrecorded)themoment thatrecordingbegins. RecordtheRPPRpatternplaybackandkeyboard performance. Whenrecordingtheplaybackofpatternstriggered byRPPR,thetimingoftherecordedeventsmaybe slightlyskewed.Ifthisoccurs,trysettingREC ResolutiontoasettingotherthanHi. 10.Whenyouarefinishedperforming,pressthe SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Recordingwillend,andthesequencerwillreturnto thelocationatwhichrecordingbegan. Ifyoumadeamistakeduringyourperformanceor wouldliketorerecord,youcanusetheCompare function(presstheCOMPAREswitch)torerecord asmanytimesasyouwish. 11.Ifyouwanttorecordothertracks,uncheckthe MultiREC(Seestep5)orRPPR(Seestep4) checkboxesasnecessary.
Song Patterns 1 and 2 are set to Mode=Manual, and have identical Sync settings Sync: Off Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Pattern 2
Pattern 2
Pattern 2
108
109
110
Memory Protect
Memory Protect
Beforeyourecordatrackorpattern,oreditthemusical data,youwillneedtoturnoffthememoryprotect settinginGlobalmode.Formoreinformation,see Memoryprotectonpage 181.
About MIDI
Track status
Youcanspecifywhethereachtrackwillusethe internalKRONOSsounds,oruseanexternalMIDI tonegenerator. WhentheTrackStatus(P2MIDIpage)issettoINTor BTH,operatingKRONOSskeyboardandcontrollers willsoundandcontrolKRONOSsowntonegenerator. WhenStatusissettoEXT,EX2orBTH,operating KRONOSskeyboardandcontrollerswillsoundand controltheexternaltonegenerator.(TheMIDIchannel oftheexternaltonegeneratormustmatchtheMIDI ChannelofthetrackthatissettoEXT,EX2orBTH.)
111
112
Set Lists
Set List Overview
SetListsmakeitsimpletoplayandorganizeanyofthe soundsloadedintotheKRONOS,withoutregardfor whatbanktheyrestoredinorwhethertheyre Programs,Combinations,orevenSongs. Largeonscreenbuttonsmakesoundselectionfastand foolproof,andtheProgramUporDownfootswitch assignmentscanbeusedforhandsfreesound changes.Cut,copy,paste,andinserttoolsmakere orderingasnap. SmoothSoundTransitions(SST)lettheprevioussound anditseffectsringoutnaturally,makingiteasyto changesoundsduringaliveperformance.SSTisactive inalloftheKRONOSmodes,butSetListsgiveyou greatercontroloverthetransitions.Youcanfinetune theringouttimeforeachsound,sothat(forinstance) onesoundfadesoutveryquickly,whileanother soundsdelayscontinuetorepeatfortenortwenty seconds. Longcomments(upto512characters)letyoustore lyricsorperformancenoteswiththesound. SetListsaregreatforliveperformance,buttheyrealso handyfororganizingsoundsingeneral.Forexample, youcancreateaSetListwithallofyourfavoriteString sounds,includingbothProgramsandCombinations.
113
Set Lists
Selected Slot
Previous button
Next button
114
Selecting Slots
Selecting Slots
Selecting within the current group of 16
Toselectoneofthe16Slotsshownonthedisplay: 1. Pressthedesiredbutton. Thebuttonbecomeshighlighted,andthelargeSlot number/nameatthetopofthescreenareupdated accordingly. Alsonoticethatthecommentsarea,abovetheSlot buttons,updatestoshowthecontentsfortheselected Slot.
MIDI Out
SelectingaSlotsendsProgramChangeandBankSelect messages,asabove. Whenselected,CombinationsandSongscantransmit otherProgramChangeandBankSelectmessageson otherchannels,astheydoinCombinationand Sequencermodes.
115
Set Lists
Set List Name Slot Name Sound Type Category Select or Keyboard Track
Selected Slot
Previous button
Overview
ForeachSlot,youcan: AssignanyProgram,Combination,orSong NametheSlot
116
Re-arranging Slots
TheCut,Copy,Paste,andInsertbuttonsmakeit simpletorearrangetheSlots.
TFX 2 & EQ
S/PDIF Output
Entering comments
EachSlotcanhaveacommentofupto512characters, forlyrics,performancenotes,andsoon.Todoso: 1. PresstheEditCommentbuttontobringupthetext editdialogbox. 2. Enterthecommentasdesired,andthenpressOK. Youcanreadtheentirecomment,evenwithmultiple lines,ontheSetListPlaypage.
117
Set Lists
118
ThereisasinglegraphicEQsettingforeachSetList, whichappliestoallSlotsinthelist.
Reset Controls
WhenontheEQpage,RESETCONTROLS+TONE ADJ/EQresetsallEQparameters,includingBypass,to thevaluesstoredintheSetList. RESETCONTROLS+Sliderresetstheslidersbandto thestoredvalue.
Graphic EQ
SetListshaveanadditionalControlSurfaceoption,not availableintheothermodes:EQ.Thisisanineband graphicEQappliedtothesoundafterTFX2,which tailorsthesoundfromthemainstereooutputs (includingtheanalogL/Routputs,S/PDIF,andUSB). YoucanusethisEQtocompensatefortheacoustic environmentofaspecificcluborotherperformance venue.Theslidersaremappedtotheninebandsofthe EQ,forquickandintuitiveadjustments. Allbandsarepeaking,includingthehighandlow bands.
119
Set Lists
120
Limitations
Whenyouselectanewsound,theprevioussounds KARMAandDrumTrackpatternsstop.Anynotes beingplayedbytheDrumTrackorKARMA (includingthosegeneratedbyKARMAsThruInand ThruOutZones)arereleased,andthendecay normally. Similarly,thePolysixEXarpeggiatorstopsplayingon soundchange. WheneditingEXiPrograms,changingtheEXimodel ofthecurrentProgramwillsilenceanyvoicesfromthe previoussound.Notethatthishappensonlywhen actuallyeditingtheProgram,andnotsimplywhen changingfromoneProgramtoanother. Resourcelimitationsmaypreventtheprevioussound fromringingoutuntilsilence.Forinstance: Notesmaybestolen. Ifthereisnotenoughprocessingpowerfortheold andneweffectsrackstocoexist,boththeoldeffects rackandalloldvoiceswillbesilenced.
Other details
Controllers
Mostcontrollers(Joystick+/Y,Aftertouch,realtime knobs,etc.)affectonlythenewsound,andnottheold. Sustain,Sostenuto,JoystickX(pitchbend),andNote Gatecontinuetoaffecttheoldsound,aswellasthe new.YoucanusetheCombinationandSongMIDI FiltersforadditionalcontrolovertheseMIDI messages,ifdesired.
Effects
Internally,theKRONOShastwoseparatesetsof effects,liketworacksofeffects.Oneoftheseracksis usedbythecurrentsound;theotherisusedbythe previoussound.Thisallowsthetwosetsofeffectsto worksimultaneously;forinstance,theprevious soundsdelayscancontinuetoringoutwhileyoure playingthenewsound. Thereareonlytwooftheseeffectsracks,however. Everytimethatyouselectanewsound,theolderof thetwoeffectsracksissilencedandreconfiguredfor thenewsound. Also,itspossibleforthecombinedrequirementsofthe twoeffectsrackstoexceedtheavailableprocessing power.Ifthishappens,theoldeffectsrackissilenced immediately. Note:Whentheoldeffectsrackissilenced,allofthe noteswhichwereplayingthroughitaresilencedas well.
121
Set Lists
122
Sampling to disk
Youcansampledirectlytodisk(includingtheinternal diskandUSBstoragedevices),creatingaWAVEfile. Thisletsyourecordupto80minutescontinuously,in eithermonoorstereo(mono:approximately440MB, stereo:approximately879 MB). AslongastheyfitintotheavailableRAM,theseWAVE filescanthenbeloadedintoRAMandusedinDrum Kits,HD1ProgramsorWaveSequences. WAVEfilescanalsobeusedinaudiotracksofthe sequencer,orusedtocreateanaudioCD.Formore information,seeAudiorecordingonpage 89,and CreatingandplayingaudioCDsonpage 191. Donotturnoffthepowerforatleast10seconds aftersamplingtodisk.Thisallowsthesystemtime tocompletetheprocess.
Stereo
1:27 5:49 11:39 23:18 46:36
123
Analog waveform
Time
Level
48 kHz = 48,000 times every second = 0.0208 mS cycle 16 bit = 65,536 levels of data
Time
ConceptualdiagramoftheOpenSamplingSystem
Resampling Programs, Combinations and Songs AUDIO INPUTS Analog signal Analog/digital convertor Insert Effects (Master Effects)
ADC
Digital signal (Ripping)
Digital signal
DAC
Analog signal
AUDIO OUTPUTS
USB CD-R/RW Drive (Audio CD) Digital signal S/P DIF INPUT Digital signal USB Audio Digital signal Used by Combinations and Songs
Program
Multisample 0000 ... 3999 Disk
124
Sampling overview
Multisamples
MultisampleslayoutoneormoreSamplesacrossthe keyboard.Forinstance,averysimpleguitar MultisamplemighthavesixSamplesoneforeach string. EachSampleiscontainedinanIndex,whichincludes parametersforthekeyrange,originalSamplepitch, tuning,level,andsoon. Multisamplescanhaveupto128Indexes.
Using multisamples
Whensamplinganinstrumentthatisabletoproducea widerangeofpitches,suchasapiano,recordingjust onesampleandapplyingit(playingitback)overthe entirepitchrangewillnotproduceanaturalsounding result.Byusingamultisampleyoucanrecordseparate samplesforeachpitchrange,andassignthesesamples totheirrespectivepitchrangestoavoidanyunnatural soundsduringplayback. AlloftheinstrumentalsoundsintheKRONOSs internalpresetmultisamplesareconstructedinthis way.Forexample,youmightrecordonesampleper octave,andassigneachofthesesamplestoanindex (keyboardarea). Byassigningmultiplesamplessuchasphrasesamples orrhythmloopstoamultisampleandarrangingthem acrossthekeyboard,youcanplaymultiplesamples simultaneously.Youcanassigndifferentphrasesto eachkey.Alternatively,thesesamplescouldbe assignedatoneoctaveintervals,andplayedasphrase variationswithdifferentplaybackpitches. TheKRONOScanholdamaximumof4,000RAM multisamplesinitsinternalmemory. Amultisamplecanbeselectedastheoscillatorand wavesequenceforaprogram,andplayedasa program.Inacombination,theycanbecombinedwith presetprograms,andusedinamulti.Theycanbeused withKARMAtoproduceinterestingresults(for example,byusingKARMAtoautomaticallyplay soundeffectsorspokensamples).
Multisample
Index001 Top Key Index002 Top Key Index003 Top Key Index004 Top Key
Index 001
Index 002
Index 003
Index 004
0000: Sample A
0001: Sample B
0002: Sample C
0003: Sample D
Program OSC (Single/Double) Program OSC (Single/Double) Program OSC (Drums/Double Drums)
125
Page
P0: Recording Audio Input P0: Play Audio Input/Sampling P0: Play Audio Input/Sampling P0: Play/REC Audio Input/Sampling P0: Basic Setup Audio
126
Audio Settings
PLAY/MUTE
Thisindicateswhethertheexternalaudiosignalbeing inputisinPLAYorMUTEstatus. YoucancontrolthisusingthefrontpanelMIX PLAY/MUTE16switches.
SOLO On/Off
ThisindicatestheSOLOstatusofeachexternalaudio signalinput.YoucanusetheMIXSELECT16 switchestochangethis. Soundwillbeoutputonlyfromchannelsforwhich SOLOisOn.Otherchannelswillbemuted.Thesolo functionincludestheoscillatorsofthetonegenerator.
REC Bus
ThissendstheexternalaudioinputsignaltotheREC buses(fourmonochannels;1,2,3,4). TheRECbusesarededicatedinternalbusesusedfor samplingorforrecordingaudiotracksinSequencer mode. Ifyouwanttosamplethesebuses,setSourceBustoa RECbus. InSamplingmode,youcanmixseveralaudioinputsto aRECbusforsampling,oryoucanmixthedirect soundofaudioinputswiththesoundprocessedby inserteffectsandsamplethecombinedresultfromthe RECbus. Inothermodes(e.g.,Programmode),youcanusethe RECbusestosamplejustanaudioinputthatsplaying alongwithaKARMAperformancebeingoutputtothe L/Rbus. Off:Theexternalaudiosignalwillnotbesenttothe RECbuses.Thisisthedefault. 1,2,3,4:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesentto thespecifiedRECbusinmono.ThePansettingis ignored. 1/2,3/4:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesentin stereotothespecifiedpairofRECbuses.ThePan settingsendsthesignalinstereotobuses1and2or buses3and4.
Pan
Thisspecifiesthepanningoftheexternalaudioinput signal.Wheninputtingastereoaudiosource,youwill normallysettheinputstoL000andR127respectively.
Level
Specifiestheleveloftheexternalaudiosignalthatwill beinput.Normallyyouwillsetthisat127. Theaudiosignalsfromtheanaloginputsare convertedbyanA/Dconverterfromanalogto digitalsignals.Thisparametersetsthelevelofthe signalimmediatelyafterithasbeenconvertedinto digitalform.Ifthesoundisdistortedeventhough thislevelsettingisverylow,itispossiblethatthe soundisdistortingearlierthantheA/Dconverter. YoullneedtoadjusttheMIC/LINEgainselect switch,theLEVELknob,ortheoutputlevelofyour externalaudiosource. IfBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)isntOff,raisingtheLevel willbringtheexternalinputsignalintothe KRONOSaudiosystem.Anynoisefromtheinputs (evenifnoactualsignalispresent)maybeheardat theKRONOSoutputs.
127
Topreventthis,ifyourenotusinganinput,turnits BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)off,orsetitsLevelto0.REC BusandFXControlBusshouldalsobeturnedoffif yourenotusingthem. ThesameistruefortheRECSourceparameter.If RECSourceissettoaninput,thatinputwillbe passedthroughdirectlytotheoutputsevenifthe inputsBusSelectisOff,oritsLevelis0. Finally,forthesamereason:ifyourenotusingthe analoginputs,turntherearpanelLEVELknobsto theminimum,andsettheMIC/LINEswitchesto LINE.
IfyouchooseREC1/2,RECbus1isinputtotheL channelandRECbus2isinputtotheRchannel.Ifyou chooseREC3/4,RECbus3isinputtotheLchanneland RECbus4isinputtotheRchannel. AudioInput1/2,S/P DIFL/R,USB1/2:Choosethese settingsifyouwanttodirectlysamplefromtheanalog, S/P DIF,orUSBinputs.Theinputwillbesampled directlywithoutbeingroutedthroughtheL/Rbus, RECbuses,orIndividualbuses.Theinputswillbe connecteddirectly,regardlessoftheAudioInput settingsforBusSelect(IFX/Indiv),Pan,andLevel. IfyouchooseAudioInput1/2,AUDIOINPUT1is inputtotheleftchannelandAUDIOINPUT2isinput totherightchannel. Indiv.1/2and3/4:TheIndiv.1/2Indiv.3/4buseswillbe sampled.Choosethesesettingsifyouwanttosample onlytheaudioinputswhilemonitoringtheL/R outputs,similarlytowhenusingtheRECbuses. IfyouchooseIndiv.1/2,Indiv.bus1isinputtotheL channelandIndiv.bus2isinputtotheRchannel. SimilarlyforIndiv.3/4,thebusesareinputtotheLand Rchannelsrespectively.
Trigger
Thiscontrolshowsamplingwillbeinitiated. Thetriggersyoucanselectwilldifferdependingonthe mode. InProgramandCombinationmodes,youcanselect eitherSamplingSTARTSWorNoteOn. InSamplingmode,youcanselecteitheroftheabove, plusThreshold.
L/R BUS
Master Effects Total Effects Insert Effects USB CD-R/RW Drive Audio Input Level Pan
CLIP !!
128
Audio Settings
Input
Sampling Setup
Metronome Setup
InSequencermode,youcanselectanyoftheabove, plustheSequencerSTARTSW. Forthetriggermodethatsmostappropriateinvarious situations,refertothevariousexamplesofsampling laterinthischapter. SamplingSTARTSW:Whenyoupressthe SAMPLINGREC,youwillentersamplingstandby mode;samplingwillbeginwhenyoupressthe SAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitch. NoteOn:PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitchandthen presstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtoenter samplingstandbymode.Samplingwillbeginwhen youplaythekeyboard. Threshold:Samplingwillbeginautomaticallywhen theinputlevelexceedsthespecifiedLevelvalue. SequencerSTARTSW:PresstheSAMPLINGREC switchandthentheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitch toentersamplingstandbymode.Thenpressthe SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtobeginsampling. Usethiswhenyouwanttoresamplethesong playback. Tostopsampling,presstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOP switchonceagain.Samplingwillalsoendifyoukeep samplinguntilthetimespecifiedbySampleTime.
Page
Sampling P0 Recording
Combination Combination P0 Audio Input/Sampling Program Sequencer Program P0 Audio Input/Sampling Sequencer P0 Audio Input/Sampling
Samplingmode
Making settings for the sample to be recorded (REC Sample Setup/Sampling Setup)
Nextwewillspecifythelocationintowhichthedata willbesampled,selectmonoorstereosampling,and specifythesamplingtime. InSamplingmode,thesesettingsaremadeinREC SampleSetup.InCombination,Program,and Sequencermodes,thesesettingsaremadeinSampling Setup.Thesesettingsapplyonlyineachrespective mode.
129
Programmode
Sample Time
Specifiestheamountoftimethatyouwishtosample. Thiscanbesetin0.001secondincrements.Ifyou recordasampleinthiscondition ([REC][START][STOP]),thechangeintimewillbe displayedautomatically. IfSavetoissettoDISK,themaximumvalueis calculatedfromtheamountofremainingspaceonthe diskspecifiedbySelectDirectory.Themaximum sampletimeis80minutes. Whensamplingtodisk,bitresolutionmayalsoaffect themaximumsamplingtime.24bitdatauses50% morespacethan16bitdata.
Save to
Specifiesthedestinationtowhichthedatawillbe writtenduringsampling. RAM:ThesamplewillbewrittentoRAMmemory. SampleswrittenintoRAMmemorycanbeheard immediatelyinSamplingmode. DISK:Thesamplewillbewrittentodisk,suchasthe internaldriveorUSBstoragemedia. IfyouveselectedDISK,youcanalsoselectthediskon whichthesamplewillbestored.UsetheSelect Directorypagemenucommandtoselectthedrive.
Optimizationrearrangesanyunusedmemoryareasso thatalloftheremainingmemorycanbeused,which mayincreasetheamountofRAMavailablefor sampling.Thisoptimizationcanhappeneither manuallyorautomatically. AutomaticoptimizationisenabledviatheAuto OptimizeRAMparameterontheGlobalmodeP0: BasicSetuppage.Whenthisisturnedon,RAMwill automaticallybeoptimizedwhensamplingends. ThisoptionwillkeepthegreatestamountofRAMfree forsampling.However,itrequiresalittletimetowork, andsothesoundwillstopforatimeaftersampling ends.Also,ifasongisplayinginSequencermode,the playbackwillstop.
Mode
Specifiesthechannel(s)thatyouwanttosample,and specifywhetheramonoorstereosamplewillbe created. TheLandRchannelsofthebusspecifiedbySource Buswillbesampled.
130
Audio Settings
Becauseofthis,ifyoureplayingbackasongor recordingmultiplesamplesatonce,itsprobablybetter toleaveAutoOptimizeRAMturnedoff.Onceyoure finishedsampling,orifyounoticethattheamountof availableRAMisgettinglow,usetheOptimizeRAM menucommandtodotheoptimizationmanually.You canfindthiscommandonthemenusoftheSampling pagesinProgram,Combination,andSequencer modes,aswellasonpagesP04inSamplingmode. Youcancheckontheremainingamountofmemoryin SamplingmodeontheP0:Recordingpage,underFree SampleMemory/Locations.Formoreinformation,see 01f:FreeSampleMemory/Locationsonpage 684of theParameterGuide.
Automatically setting-up for the desired sampling method (Auto Sampling Setup)
Ineachmode,AutoSamplingSetupautomatically makestheappropriatesettingsforthesampling relatedparameters.ForexampleinProgrammodeyou canusethistomakethenecessarysettingsfor resamplingyourplayingonaprogram,ortomake settingsforsamplingonlyanexternalaudiosource whileyoumonitoryourplayingonaprogram. However,theseautomaticsettingsassumetypical situations,soyoullneedtoadjusttheparametersto meetyoursituation. Thisfunctionisavailableinthefollowingpages: Mode
Sampling
Page
Sampling P0: Recording
Combination Combination P0: Play Audio Input/Sampling Program Sequencer Program P0: Play Audio Input/Sampling Sequencer P0: Play/REC Preference, Audio Input/Sampling
131
Explanation
Sampling and resampling Various settings for sampling Audio input settings Edit using the control surface Sample waveform editing Sample playback parameter settings Start, loop start, and end address settings Loop and reverse playback on/off Editing operations such as Time Slice and Time Stretch Assign samples to multisamples, and specify the zone and original key EQ adjustments for multisample playback Assign functions to controllers Play back audio CDs Rip audio CDs ---- Select and edit insert effects, adjust send levels to the master effects, and specify the routing to the outputs Select and edit master send effects and total effects
P3: Multisample Edit P4: EQ/ Controller P5: Audio CD P6: P7: P8: Insert Effect P9: Master, Total Effects
Fordetailsonhowtoaccesseachmodeandpage,refer toBasicoperationsonpage 17. SamplingcanbeperformedinanypageP0P9of SamplingmodebyusingtheREC/WRITEswitchand theSTART/STOPswitch.Recordingrelatedsettings suchasinputlevelaremadebytheparametersofP0: Recording,andthesesettingsarevalidfortheother pagesaswell. Theselectedmultisampleorsamplecanbeplayed fromthekeyboardinanypage,allowingyoutohear theresultsofyoureditingineachpage.
132
IfyousetZoneRangeto12Keys,indexeswillbe createdatintervalsofoneoctave.
5. SelectIndex. YoucanalsoselectIndexbyholdingdownthe ENTERswitchandplayingapadoranoteonthe keyboard.Forthisexample,select001. Ifyouwanttocreateastereomultisample,checkthe Stereobox,andpresstheOKbutton. Ifyouwanttocreateamonauralmultisample, unchecktheStereobox,andpresstheOKbutton. 4. PresstheCreatebuttontocreateanindex. Immediatelyafterthepoweristurnedon,Index willshow001/008.Thisindicatesthatthereareeight indexes,andthatthefirstindexisselected(seethe illustrationbelow). PresstheCreatebuttonseveraltimes.Eachtimeyou pressit,anindexwillbecreated.Thekeyboard displaywillindicatethezoneandoriginalkey locationofeachindex. Note:Theindexthatiscreatedwhenyoupressthe CreatebuttonwillbecreatedaccordingtotheP0: RecordingRecordingpageCreateZonePreference settings.(ThesesettingscanalsobemadeinP3: MultisampleEditpage,CreateZonePreference) 6. AssignasampletotheIndex. IfRAMmemoryalreadycontainssamples,use SampleSelecttoselectthesampleandassignit. Ifyouwanttorecordanewsample,youcansample itnow. Thesampleyourecordwillbeautomatically assignedtotheindexyouselectedinstep4. Theassignedsamplewillsoundwhenyouplaythe keyboardintherangeoftheindextowhichthe sampleisassigned. 7. Repeatsteps5and6toassignasampletoeach index. Thenumberandorderoftheindexesina multisample,therangeofeachindex,andthe originalkeypositioncanbefreelychangedlaterif desired.(SeeMultisampleeditingonp.145)
133
Index01
Index02 Index03...Index08
C4 key Keyboard range By holding down the ENTER switch and playing a note, you can select the corresponding index, and the specified key will be the base key and will be shown in blue.
134
Connect a mic
1. ConnectamictotherearpanelAUDIOINPUT1 jack. 2. PresstheAUDIOINPUTMIC/LINEswitchsothat itsintheMIC(outward)position,andsetthe LEVELknobnearthecenter. Formoredetails,seeAudioinputsettingson page 126.
Youhavenowmadethesettingsnecessaryfor sampling. Note:Takealookatthesettingsthathavebeenmade. AudioInput:Inputs1and2havebeenroutedtothe L/Rbus,withtheirPansethardleftandhardright respectively,andinputlevelssetto127. SourceBUS:L/R Thesound(s)senttotheL/Rbuswillbesampled.With thesettingsabove,thisincludesInputs1and2. Trigger:SamplingSTARTSW SamplingwillstartwhenyoupresstheSAMPLING START/STOPswitch. RecordingLevel:+0.0 Thisisthedefaultsettingforrecordinganexternal input. Saveto:RAM YouwillbesamplingtoRAMmemory. 9. PresstheRecordingtabtogototheP0:Recording Recordingpage.
MIC
Sampling Setup
1. GototheSamplingP0:RecordingAudioInput page. PresstheSAMPLINGbuttontoenterSampling mode.MakesurethattheSamplingP0:Recording pageisdisplayed. Ifitisnot,presstheEXITswitch,andthenpressthe AudioInputtab. 2. ChoosethemenucommandAutoSampling Setup. Adialogboxwillappear.AutoSamplingSetup automaticallysetsmanyoftheparameters necessaryforsampling.Youcanusethesesettings asaguidelinewhensampling.
135
UnderRECSampleSetup.notethatSamplingMode hasbeensettoLMono.Thismeansthatthesoundof theinternalLchannelwillbesampledinmono. Next,letschangetheTriggersetting.Thiscontrols howsamplingwillstart.Currently,itssettostartwhen youpresstheSamplingSTART/STOPbutton.Well changeittomakesamplingstartwhentheaudioinput exceedsaspecifiedvolume. 10.GobacktotheSamplingP0:RecordingAudio Inputpage. 11.Makethefollowingsettings. Trigger:Threshold Withthissetting,samplingwillstartwhentheinput exceedsaspecificvolume. ThresholdLevel:30dB Fromtherecordreadystate,recordingwillstart automaticallywhentheaudioinputexceeds30dB. PreTriggerREC:005ms Recordingwillbeginimmediately(5ms)before samplingisstarted,sothattheattackofthesoundis notlost. 14.Whenyouvefinishedmakingadjustments,press theSAMPLINGRECswitch.
Record
15.PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitch. TheKRONOSwillbeinrecordreadymode. 16.Speakintothemic,sayingtheword(s)youwantto sample. (Example:Its) Recordingwillstartwhenthelevelexceedsthe Level30dBsetting. 17.Whenyouvefinishedsayingtheword(s),press theSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitch. Thiscompletesthesamplingoperation.Thenew samplewillbeautomaticallyassignedtoSample (SampleSelect).
136
Connect a mic
1. ConnectyourmictotherearpanelAUDIOINPUT 1jack.(SeeSamplingyourvoicefromamic,and playingitbackasaoneshotsampleonpage 135)
Setup
2. IntheP0:RecordingAudioInputpage,makethe followingsettings. INPUT1 BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.):IFX1 Pan:C064 Level:127 ThisspecifiestheinputlevelandpanoftheINPUT 1jack,andassignsIFX1busasthedestination. SamplingSetup SourceBus:L/R 5. Speakintothemic,andverifythatreverbis applied. YoucanusetheIFX1page(IFX1tab)toeditthe effectsettings. 6. MakesurethattheBusSel.thatfollowsIFX1isset toL/R. 7. PresstheEXITswitch,andthenpressthe RecordingtabtogototheP0:Recording Recordingpage.
137
9. SelectIndex. Ifyouwanttocreateanewindex,presstheCreate button. 10.Samplethesound. PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitch,andthenthe SAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtoenterrecord readymode. Speakthewordyouwanttosample. Recordingwillstartwhenthelevelexceedsthe Level30dBsetting. PresstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtostop sampling. 11.Playthekeyboard. PresstheOrigKeykeytohearthesoundyou sampled.
138
Editing loops
PresstheC2key,andverifythatreverbisapplied. AlsomakesurethattheBusSel.followingIFX1is settoL/R. 6. PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitch,andthenthe SAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitch. ThesampleassignedtoC2willplayautomatically, andresamplingwillbegin. Whenthesamplefinishesplaying,resamplingwill end. Thesamplethatwascreatedbyresamplingwill automaticallybeassignedtoSampleSelect. Note:InSamplingmode,theP8RoutingpageBus SelectparameterwillautomaticallybesettoL/R whenresamplingends.Thispreventsaninsert effectfrombeingappliedinduplicatewhenyou monitortheresultsofresamplingthroughaninsert effect. Ifyouwanttoapplyaninserteffectonceagain,re selectIFX1. Note:Asanalternativetoautomaticallyresampling asdescribedabove(ResampleAuto),youcan simplysamplethesoundsthatyouplayfromthe keyboard(ResampleManual). InSampleSelect,assignthesamplethatyouwill resample,andsetResampletoManual.SetTrigger toNoteOn,andsetSampleModetoStereoas desired.Thensetthebusandeffectasdescribedin steps2and7,presstheSAMPLINGRECandthen theSTART/STOPswitch,andthenpresstheC2key tostartresampling.Whenyouwanttostop resampling,presstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOP switch.
5. IntheP8:InsertEffect,InsertFXpage,setIFX1to 101:ReverbHall,andturnIFXOn/OffON.
Editing loops
Youcanedittheplaybackaddressatwhichthesample willbelooped.TheP2:LoopEditpageletsyoudothe followingthings. Youcanspecifytheloopingaddressesbyediting Start,End,andLoopStartwhilewatchingthe waveform.FunctionslikeZoomIn/Out,UseZero, andGridmakeeditingeasy. Youcanturnloopingon/off,adjustthetuningof theloopplayback,applya+12dBplaybackboost, orreversetheplayback. YoucanusetheTimeSlicefunctionto automaticallydetecttheattacksofkickandsnare notesetc.inarhythmloopsample(alooped samplecontainingadrumpattern),and automaticallyslicethesampleattheappropriate locations.Thisfunctioncanautomaticallycreate performancedata(notes)toplaythedivided samplesattheappropriatemoments,lettingyou playthisphraseinSequencermodeatthedesired tempowithoutaffectingthepitchoftheindividual notes.Youcanalsodothingslikechangingthe pitchofjustthesnaredrum,replacingitwithan entirelydifferentsample,orchangingtheplayback
139
timingofthephraseinthesequencertotransform theoriginalrhythmloopintoanentirelydifferent rhythmloop.(Stereosamplesaresupported.) YoucanusetheTimeStretchfunctiontomodifythe tempowithoutchangingthesamplespitch.When executingTimeStretch,youcanchooseeither Sustaining(suitableforloopsofsustainedsounds suchasstringsorvocal)orSlice(suitablefor loopsofdecaytypesoundssuchasdrums).(Stereo samplesaresupported.) Sometimeswhenloopingasampleofpitched instrumentssuchasstringsorwinds,thelooped portionmayplaybackinanunnaturalway.By executingtheCrossfadeLoopfunctionyoucan eliminatethisproblemsothattheloopsounds right.
Start (Red)
End (Blue)
ZOOM
Loop settings
1. Selectthesampleforwhichyouwishtomakeloop settings. Toselectthesample,usetheSampleSelectorIndex parametersofP2:LoopEditpageoroftheP0: Recording,Recordingpage. IfyouuseSampleSelecttoselectthesample,be awarethattheassignmenttotheindexwillalso change. 2. IntheP2:LoopEditpage,usetheLoopcheck boxtoturnloopplaybackon/offforthesample. Loopingwillbeturnedoniftheboxischecked. Thiswilloperatebetweentheaddressesyouspecify instep3. LoopOn:StartEndLoopStartEnd(Loop StartEndisrepeated) LoopOff:StartEnd
Use Zero
IftheUseZerocheckboxischecked,onlythose addresseswherethewaveformdatacrossesthezero levelwillbefoundautomaticallywhensearching, andcanbeset.Thisletsyoueasilymakeaddress settingswherenoiseislesslikelytooccurwhen looping.
Toplaythesample,pressthekeytowhichthe sampleisassigned(thekeyrangethatishighlighted inKeyboard&Pad). AsamplewaveformthatwassampledwithSample ModesettoStereowillbedisplayedintwolevels. TheupperlevelistheLchannel,andthelowerlevel istheRchannel. 3. SetthestartaddressinStart,theloopstart addressinLoopStart,andtheendaddressin End.
Truncate
5. Ifnecessary,usethepagemenucommand Truncatetodeleteunwanteddatathatfalls outsidethestart(orloopstart)andendaddresses. SelecttheFront&Endradiobutton. Inthisexample,wewillnotchangethesettingsof theSavetoNo.andOverwritecheckboxes,so presstheOKbuttontoexecute.
140
Inthedialogboxesofsomepagemenuitems,there isaSavetoNo.settingthatletsyouspecifythe samplenumbertowhichtheeditedsamplewillbe saved.Atthistime,avacantsamplenumberwillbe selectedautomatically,soyouwillchangethe settingonlyifyouwanttospecifythesave destinationnumber. IfyoucheckOverwriteinthedialogboxofthe command,thedatapriortoeditingwillbedeleted andoverwrittenbytheediteddata.Normally,you willexecutetheWriteoperationwithoutchecking this,sothattheunediteddataispreserved.When youarecompletelyfinishedwithyourediting,you canusethepagemenucommandDeleteSampleto deleteunneededsamples.
141
3. Specifythenumberofquarternotebeatsinthe sample,anditstempo. IfyouknowthetempoinBPM,settheSourceBPM accordingly. IfyoudonotknowtheBPM,useBeattoenterthe totalnumberofbeats,andtheBPMwillbe calculatedautomatically. 4. PresstheOKbutton. Thesamplewillautomaticallybesliced,anda dialogboxwillappear. PresstheSavebuttontosavethedata. Youwillreturntothedialogboxofstep4. Ifyouwanttocreatetheperformancedataina pattern: Inordertoauditiontheperformancedataasit wouldbeifcreatedasapattern,presstheSave buttononceagaintogototheSaveSamples&MS dialogbox. TurnProgramandSeq.EventOn(checked) Whenyouplaythekeyboard,C2willplaythe originalsample(Source),andD2andsubsequent keyswillplaythedividedsamples. Whilelisteningtoeachdividedsample,adjust Sensitivitysothateachdrumstrikeorotherrhythm instrumentsoundisdividedintoitsownsample.In somecases,itmaynotbepossibletoslicethe samplecleanlyevenifyouadjustSensitivity.Ifthe attackofthenextsoundisincludedintheendofthe precedingsample,orifonesamplecontainstwo notes,youwillneedtoeditthesamples. Ifyouwanttoedit,holddowntheENTERswitch andselecttheIndexthatisassignedtothenotethat youwanttoedit.(Thisportionofthewaveform displaywillbehighlighted.)Thenyoucanmake adjustmentsbyadjustingStartorEnd,andbyusing DividetoseparateorLinktocombine. Formoreinformation,seeTimeSliceonpage 740 oftheParameterGuide. 5. PresstheSavebutton. TheSaveSamples&MSdialogboxwillappear. Hereyoucansavethetimeslicedsamplesandthe multisample. Atthistime,settheitemsintheSaveWithareato specifytheconversiondestinationfortheprogram thatwillusethesamplesandmultisample,andfor theperformancedata(trackorpattern)thatwillbe usedinSequencermodetorecreatetherhythm loopsample. PresstheSavebuttontosavethedata. Youwillreturntothedialogboxofstep4. 6. PresstheExitbutton. Program:asdesired(forinstance,UG001) Pattern:On Song:001,Pattern:U00,Meter:4/4 RPPR:On(checked),Key:C#2,Track:01
142
7. PresstheSEQbuttontoenterSequencermode, andselect000forSongSelect.
information,seeTimeStretchonpage 745ofthe ParameterGuide. 8. InSongSelect,choose001. Thefollowingsongdatahasbeenset/created automaticallyasyouspecifiedinstep5. P0:Play/RECpage Song:001,Meter:4/4,Tempo:112,RPPR:On P0:Play/RECMIDITrackProgSelect/Mixerpage Track01Program:asdesired(forinstance,UG001) P5:Pattern/RPPR,RPPRSetuppage Key:C#2,Assign:On, Pattern:User,U00,Track:Track01 Patterndata:1measure(D2)
IntheP0:Play/RECMIDITrackProgSelect/Mixer page,presstheC#2key.TheRPPRfunctionwill beginplayingpatternU00. IntheP5:Pattern/RPPR,PatternEditpage,pressthe SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtostartplayback ofpatternU00. WhenyoupresstheC#2keyintheP5: Pattern/RPPR,RPPRSetuppage,theRPPRfunction willstartplayingpatternU00. Inthesamewayasinstep7,changingtheplayback tempowillnotaffectthepitch. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtostart playback. Asanexample,setq (Tempo)to100.Noticethat thepitchdoesnotchangewhenyouplaybackata differenttempo. Ifthebeatoftheoriginalrhythmloopsampleisnot reproducedcorrectlywhenyouchangethetempo, orifobtrusivenoiseisheard,thisisbecausethe samplewasnotslicedappropriatelyinstep4.The wayinwhichthepercussioninstrumentsounds weredividedwillhaveamajorimpactonthe qualityoftheplaybackwhenthetempoischanged. Youwillneedtoadjustthewayinwhichthe samplesaredividedinstep4. Thesilencebetweensamplesmaybecomeobtrusive ifyouplaybackataslowertempo,ornoisemay occurbetweensamplesifyouplaybackatafaster tempo.Toavoidsuchproblems,youcansetStretch NewBPMorRatioinstep5tothetempoat whichyouwanttoplayback,andexecutetime stretchtoadjustthelengthofeachsample.Formore
143
Ifyouwanttoauditiontheselectedregion,pressthe PlaybuttonintheLCDortheSAMPLING START/STOPswitch.Theselectedregionwillplay atthepitchofthebasekey(thebluekeyinthe keyboarddisplay).Youcanspecifythebasekeyby holdingdowntheENTERswitchandplayinganote onthekeyboard. Whenyouplayakeytowhichthesampleis assigned(thehighlightedrangeofthekeyboard displayedinKeyboard&Pad),thesamplewillbe playedbackaccordingtoitsloopsettings. TheprocedureforusingtheZOOMandUseZero checkboxesisthesameasforP2:LoopEdit. 4. Fromthelistofpagemenu,selectthedesired editingcommand.Maketheappropriatesettings inthedialogbox,andpresstheOKbuttonto execute. Fordetailsonthemanysampleeditingfeatures,see Sampling:PageMenuCommandsonpage 726of theParameterGuide.
144
Multisample editing
Multisample editing
Editingamultisampleisaccomplishedwithanumber ofoperationsi.e.creatingindexesforthemultisample andassigningasampletoeachindex,editing operationssuchasdeleting,copying,andinserting indexes,anddetailedsettingssuchassampleleveland pitchforeachindex. MultisampleeditingisperformedinP3:Multisample. YoucanalsodosomebasiceditsintheP0:Recording Recordingpage. TheCreatebuttonhasthesamefunctionasthe CreatebuttoninP0:Recording(seeCreating multisampleindexesand samplingP0: Recording onpage 133).
2. UseMultisample(MS)toselectthemultisample thatyouwishtoedit. 3. SelecttheIndex. Youcanalsoselectanindexbyholdingdownthe VALUEcontrollerorENTERswitchandplayinga noteonthekeyboard. 4. Pressthebuttonstomodifythenumberororderof theindexes,andeditthem. Todeletetheselectedindex,presstheCutbutton. TheInsertbuttonisusedinconjunctionwiththe CutandCopybuttons.Thecontentsoftheindex thatwasCutorCopiedwillbeinserted.
EQ and controllers
TheP4:EQ/Controllerpageletsyouuseamid sweepablethreebandEQtoadjustthesound.Youcan alsousethecontrolsurfacetocontroltheEQ.Notethat thisisfortemporaryuseinSamplingmodeonly;it doesnotaffectthesampledataitself. HereyoucanalsoassignthefunctionsofSW1/2,Real TimeKnobs58,andthenotenumbersandvelocities playedbypads18.
145
ThiswillsetRangeStartandRangeEnd. IfyoupresstheENTERswitchthreeormoretimes, RangeStartandRangeEndwillrespectivelybeset Themethodgivenaboveapplieswhensomething otherthanRangeStartorRangeEndisselected (highlighted). IfRangeStartorRangeEndareselected (highlighted),thesettingwillbeupdatedeachtime youpresstheENTERswitch. IfRangeStartorRangeEndareselected (highlighted),thisregionwillplayback. Whenyoufinishmakingsettings,pressthe SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtostopplayback oftheaudioCD. 10.Verifytheregionthatwillberipped. SelecteitherRegionStartorRegionEnd(the displaywillbehighlighted),andpressthe SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch.TheCDwill playfromRangeStarttoRangeEndandthenstop. Ifyouwanttoadjustthelocation,usetheVALUE controllerstomodifytheRangeStartorRangeEnd settings,ormovethecursortoaparameterother thanRangeStartandRangeEndandrepeatstep8 tomakethesettingonceagain. Ifyouwanttomovethetrackplaybackstart locationtothebeginningofthetrack,pressthe LOCATEswitch. 11.WhenyouhavefinishedsettingRangeStartand RangeEnd,selectthepagemenucommand Destination. Adialogboxwillappear. Specifythedestinationtowhichtherippedsample willbewritten.
SelectDISKifyouwanttoripthesampletomedia. UseDriveSelecttoselectthedrive,andusethe OpenandUpbuttonstoselectthedirectoryin whichthedatawillbesaved.Alsospecifyaname fortheWAVEfilethatwillbesaved. 12.PresstheOKbuttontoexecuteripping,orpress theCancelbuttontocancelwithoutexecuting. WhenyoupresstheOKbutton,theObey CopyrightRulesdialogboxwillappear. 13.CarefullyreadtheCOPYRIGHTWARNINGin theQuickStartGuide,andifyouconsenttothe terms,presstheOKbuttontobeginripping.Ifyou donotconsenttotheterms,presstheCancel buttontocanceltheoperation.
146
2. ChooseConvertMSToProgramtoopenthe dialogbox.
Compare
InSamplingmode,thereisnoComparefunctionthat letsyoureturntothestatepriortoediting. Ifyouwanttopreservethestatepriortoediting,usea functionsuchasCopySampleorCopyMStocopythe multisampleorsamplebeforeyoubeginediting.For moreinformation,seeCopySampleonpage 727of theParameterGuide,andCopyMS(Copy Multisample)onpage 729oftheParameterGuide.
3. Pressthetexteditbuttontoopenthetextedit dialogbox,andinputanewprogramname(upto 24characters).Bydefault,thiswillbethenameof themultisample. 4. EnableordisableUseDestinationProgram Parametersasdesired. UseDestinationProgramParametersunchecked: Whenyouexecutethecommand,themultisample ofthedestinationProgramwillbereplacedbythe multisampleyouselecthere,andtheotherProgram parameterswillbeinitializedsothatitreproduces thesoundheardinSamplingmode. TheprogramwillbeconvertedwithanOscillator Mode(Program11a)ofSingle. UseDestinationProgramParameterschecked: Whenyouexecutethecommand,themultisample oftheconversiondestinationprogramwillbe replacedbythemultisampleyouselecthere,butthe otherprogramparameterswillnotbeinitialized. Choosethisifyouwanttousetheparameter settingsofanexistingprogram. IfyoucheckUseDestinationProgramParameters, pleasebeawareofthefollowingpoint. ThedestinationprogramsOscillatorModemustbe Single.Ifthisisnotthecase,themessageOscillator Modeconflictswillappearwhenyouattemptto executethecommand.Tosolvethis,changethe OscillatorModesettingofthedestinationProgram. 5. UsetheToProgramfieldtospecifythe conversiondestinationprogram. WerecommendthatyouuseProgrambanksUSER GorAAGGforsavingProgramscreatedin Samplingmode. 6. PresstheOKbuttontoexecute. 7. PressthePROGRAMbuttontoenterProgram mode,selecttheconvertedprogram,andtryitout.
147
148
Mixing a KARMA drum phrase with a live guitar input, and sampling the result
HereshowyoucanresampleKARMAtogetherwith anexternalaudioinputsource. Inthisexample,wewillexplainhowaguitar connectedtotheAUDIOINPUTjackcanbeplayed alongtoadrumphraseplayedbytheKRONOS,and howbothcanbesampledtogether. Samplingcanbeperformedinasimilarwayin CombinationandSequencermodesaswellasin Programmode. 1. PressthePROGRAMbuttontoenterProgram mode,andselectthedrumprogramthatyouwant toresample. 2. TurnKARMAon(KARMAON/OFFswitchlit), playthekeyboard,andverifythatthedrum phraseplays. TurnLATCHon.PresstheLATCHswitchtomakeit light. Alsoadjustthetempoqasdesired. 3. PresstheKARMAON/OFFswitchtoturnoff KARMA. 4. ConnectyourguitartotherearpanelAUDIO INPUT1jack. PresstheAUDIOINPUTMIC/LINEswitchinward toselecttheLINEposition,andsettheLEVELknob ataboutthecenter.
Guitar Effect unit
LINE
Ifyouconnectaguitarwithpassivepickups(i.e.,a guitarthatdoesnotcontainapreamp),youwillbe unabletosampleitatthecorrectlevelbecauseofthe impedancemismatch.Suchguitarsshouldbe routedthroughapreamporaneffectunit. 5. PresstheAudioIn/SamplingtabtogototheP0: PlayAudioInput/Samplingpage. Makethefollowingsettings. AudioInput UseGlobalSetting:Off INPUT1 BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.):L/R Pan:asdesired Level:127 RECBus:Off TheinputfromAUDIOINPUT1willbesenttothe L/Rbus.
149
RECORDINGLEVEL RecordingLevel:0.0 Thisisthedefaultsettingforresampling. SamplingSetup SourceBus:L/R ThesoundsenttotheL/Rbuswillbesampled. Trigger:SamplingSTARTSW PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitchtoenterrecord standbymode.ThenpresstheSAMPLING START/STOPswitchtostartsampling. MetronomePrecount:4 WhenyoupresstheSAMPLINGRECswitchto enterrecordstandbymodeandthenpressthe SAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtostartsampling, afourbeatcountwillsound,andthenrecording willbegin.(Themetronomewillnotsoundduring recording.) Saveto:RAM ThesamplewillberecordedtoRAMmemory. Mode:Stereo ThesoundoftheinternalL/Rchannelswillbe sampledinstereo. MetronomeSetup Bus(Output)Select:L/R Level:asdesired TheoutputofthemetronomewillbesenttotheL/R bus. 6. Playyourguitaratthevolumethatyouwillbe recording. IfthedisplayindicatesADCOVERLOAD!(AD converterinputoverload),turntherearpanel [LEVEL]knobtowardMINtoadjustthelevel appropriately. Thebestaudioqualitywillbeobtainedatthe highestpossiblelevelthatdoesnotcausean overload;i.e.,alevelthatisslightlybelowthepoint whereADCOVERLOAD!isdisplayed. 7. PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitch. Playyourguitar,andthelevelmeterwillindicate thevolumeatwhichtheguitarwillbesampled.
PresstheKARMAON/OFFswitchtoturniton, playthekeyboardtostartthedrumphrase,and playyourguitarwhileadjustingthefinalvolume. IftheCLIP!indicationappears,usetheVALUE controllertolowertheRecordingLevelslider (locatedintherightsideofthedisplay)below+0.0 toanappropriatelevel. Ifthebalancebetweeninstrumentsisnottoyour liking,usetheLEVELknobortheperformance editorAmpLeveltoadjustthebalance. 8. Whenyouhavefinishedmakingadjustments, presstheSAMPLINGRECswitch. PresstheKARMAON/OFFswitchtoturnoff KARMA. 9. PresstheKARMAON/OFFswitchtoturniton, andthenpresstheSAMPLINGRECswitchto enterrecordreadymode. WhenyoupresstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOP switch,acountdownwillbegin.Playthekeyboard duringthecountdown. Afterafourbeatcountdown,recordingwillstart. Playyourguitar.KARMAwillalsostartafterthe countdown. 10.PresstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtostop recording. 11.PresstheKARMAON/OFFswitchtoturnitoff. 12.Listentothesoundthatwassampled. GototheSamplingP0:RecordingRecordingpage. PresstheSAMPLINGbutton,thentheEXITswitch, andthentheRecordingtabintheupperlineofthe LCDscreen. UseMultisampleSelecttoselectthemultisample thatyouresampled. PlaytheC2key,andyouwillhearthesoundthat wasresampled. 13.Ifyouwanttoconvertthismultisampleintoa program,choosetheConvertMSToProgram pagemenucommand,selectthedesiredprogram, andexecute.(SeeConvertingamultisampletoa programonpage 146)
Sampling a guitar from the audio inputs, while listening to a KARMA drum phrase
Herewellexplainhowyoucansamplejustthesound ofanexternalinputsourcewhilelisteningtoa performancegeneratedbyKARMA. Youcandothisbymodifyingthesettingsinstep5of theprecedingMixingaKARMAgenerateddrum phrasetochangethemasfollows. INPUT1 BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.):Off RECBus:1 TheinputfromAUDIOINPUT1willbesenttoREC bus1. SamplingSetup SourceBus:REC1/2 ThesoundsenttoRECbus1/2willbesampled.The soundoftheinternaltonegeneratorsenttotheL/R buswillnotbesampled. Mode:LMono ThesoundoftheinternalLchannelwillbesampled inmonaural. Modifythesettingsasshownabove,sampleyour playing,andthenlistentothesample.
150
In-Track Sampling
In-Track Sampling
Inthisexample,wellshowthesoundofaguitar connectedtotheAUDIOINPUT1jackcanbeaddedto yoursong. 1. InSequencermode,selectthesongtowhichyou wanttoaddtheguitarsound. Youcaneithercreateasong,oruseDiskmodeto loadapreviouslycreatedsong. 2. ConnectyourguitartotherearpanelAUDIO INPUT1jack. PresstheAUDIOINPUTMIC/LINEswitchinward toselecttheLINEposition,andsettheLEVELknob ataboutthecenter. Ifyouconnectaguitarwithpassivepickups(i.e.,a guitarthatdoesnotcontainapreamp),youwillbe unabletosampleitatthecorrectlevelbecauseofthe impedancemismatch.Suchguitarsshouldbe routedthroughapreamporaneffectunit. 3. GototheSequencerP0:Play/RECAudio Input/Samplingpage. 4. WewillbemodifyingtheAudioInputsettings,so turntheInputUseGlobalSettingoff. 5. ChoosetheAutoHDR/SamplingSetuppagemenu command. Thedialogboxwillappear. 6. ChooseInTrackSampling. 7. MakethefollowingsettingsforInTrack Sampling. SourceAudio:AudioInput1/2 TheinputfromtheAUDIOINPUT1and2jacks willbesampled. MonoL/MonoR/Stereo:MonoL Thesoundwillbesampledinmono. To:asdesired ThetrackyouwanttouseforInTrackSampling. MIDInotedatatotriggerthesamplewillbe recordedinthetrackyouselected. Program:asdesired Theconvertdestinationprogramnumber.When samplingiscompleted,anewmultisamplewillbe automaticallycreated,convertedtoaprogram,and assignedastheprogramforthetrack. 8. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethecommand. PreparationsforInTrackSamplingarenow completed. Letstakealookatthesettingsthatweremade. AudioInput INPUT1 BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.):Off Pan:L000 Level:127 RECBus:1/2 TheinputfromAUDIOINPUT1willbesenttoREC bus. RECORDINGLEVEL RecordingLevel:0.0 Thisisthedefaultsettingforsampling. SamplingSetup SourceBus:REC1/2 ThesoundsenttoREC1/2buswillbesampled. Trigger:SamplingSTARTSW PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitchtoenterrecord standbymode.ThenpresstheSAMPLING START/STOPswitchtostartsampling. Saveto:RAM ThesamplewillberecordedtoRAMmemory. Mode:LMono Thesoundoftheinternalleftchannelwillbe sampledinmono. 9. Forthisexample,changethesettingsasfollows. Pan:C64 Trigger:Threshold,ThresholdLevel:asdesired SampleTime:asdesired
151
10.Playyourguitaratthevolumethatyouwillbe recording. IfthedisplayindicatesADCOVERLOAD!(AD converterinputoverload),turntherearpanel [LEVEL]knobtowardMINtoadjustthelevel appropriately. Forthebestsound,adjustthelevelashighas possiblewithoutallowingtheADCOVERLOAD ! indicationtoappear. 11.PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitch. Whenyouplayyourguitar,thelevelmeterwill indicatethevolumeatwhichtheguitarwillbe sampled. IfthedisplayindicatesCLIP!,usetheVALUE controllerstolowertheRecordingLevelslider(in therightofthedisplay)below+0.0toan appropriatelevel. 12.Whenyouhavefinishedmakingadjustments, presstheSAMPLINGRECswitch. 13.PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitch,andthenthe SAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtoenter recordingstandbymode.
PresstheLOCATEswitchtoresetthesongplayback locationtothebeginningofthesong,andpressthe SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtoplayback. Beginplayingatthepointwhereyouwantto record. SamplingwillbeginwhentheThresholdLevel volumeisexceeded. 14.Atthepointwhereyouwanttostopsampling, presstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Songplaybackandsamplingwillend. SamplingwillalsostopifthespecifiedSample Timeisreached. 15.PresstheLOCATEswitchtoreturntothe beginningofthesong,andpresstheSEQUENCER START/STOPswitch.Noticethatthesampled audioisplayedbackalongwiththesong. FordetailsonhowtheComparefunctionworksfor InTrackSampling,refertoInTrackSamplingon page 151.
152
Trigger:SequencerSTARTSW PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitchandSTART/STOP switchtoenterrecordstandbymode.Thenpress theSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtostart recording. Saveto:DISK Thesamplewillbesavedonthemediayou specifiedinSelectDirectory. Mode:Stereo ThesoundoftheinternalL/Rchannelswillbe sampledinstereo. 7. SelectthepagemenucommandSelectDirectory, andspecifythedestinationtowhichtheWAVE filewillbewritten. UseDriveSelectandtheOpenandUpbuttonsto selectthedirectoryinwhichtheWAVEfilewillbe saved. Pressthetexteditbuttontogotothetexteditdialog box,andenterafilename. LeaveTakeNo.checked.Thenumberattherightof TakeNo.willbeinputasthelasttwocharactersof thefilename. Thisnumberwillincrementeachtimeyousample, ensuringthatthefilenamewillnotbethesameeven ifyousamplerepeatedly. Afteryouhavemadethesettings,presstheDone buttontoclosethedialogbox. 8. SetSampleTimetothelengththatyouwantto sample. Setthistoavalueslightlygreaterthanthelengthof thesong. 9. SettheSampletoDiskparametertothedesired bitdepth. Youcansampletodiskateither16bitor24bit resolution. 10.Settherecordinglevel. PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitch. Note:Itwilltakebetweenseveralsecondstonearlya minutefromthemomentyoupresstheSAMPLING RECswitchuntiltheKRONOSentersstandbymode (i.e.,untiltheSAMPLINGRECswitchchangesfrom blinkingtolit).Thistimeisrequiredinorderto allocatesufficientspaceonthedisk. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtoplay backthesong,andadjustthesamplingvolume whileyouwatchthelevelmeters.Thedefault settingis0.0dB.Ifthelevelistoolow,usethe VALUEcontrollertoraisethelevelashighas possiblewithoutcausingtheCLIP!indicatorto appear. Whenyoufinishmakingadjustments,pressthe SAMPLINGRECswitch. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtostop thesongplayback.ThenpresstheLOCATEswitch. 11.Startsampling. PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitchandthenthe SAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtoenter recordingstandbymode. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtoplay backthesong.Samplingwillbeginatthesametime.
153
154
Features
Basic settings for the entire KRONOS Audio input settings Sample management MIDI settings for the entire KRONOS MIDI controller settings in External mode Footswitch and pedal setup MIDI settings for the KARMA sliders, on-screen pads, and VJS User scales Edit category/sub category names for Programs, Combinations and KARMA Edit Wave Sequences Edit Drum Kits View system information Authorize options
P1: MIDI
P2: Controllers /Scales P3: Category Name P4: Wave Sequence P5: Drum Kit P6: Options Info
155
5 4 3 2
Velocity effect
1
8 6 5 4 3 2 1 9
8 7 9
1 Soft
Strong
127
Keyboard
Sound
Curve 4 MIDI
Curve 19
Pre
Post
5. SettheAfterTouchCurvetosuityourplaying style. AfterTouchCurve3isthedefault,andshouldwork formostplayers. Curve1requiresgreateramountsofpressure,while Curve5produceseffectswithonlylightpressure. Curves68areforspecialpurposes;formoredetails, seeAfterTouchCurveonpage 754oftheParameter Guide. AfterTouchcurves
For a setting of PreMIDI
After Touch (KBDMIDI Out) 127
8:RANDOM
5 4 7 3 6 2 1
Aftertouch effect
4 7 6 3 2 1
8:RANDOM
156
Global Settings
Basic Setup
Tuning and transpose settings Velocity/aftertouch curve settings Effect bypass settings
Beep setting
157
MIDI settings
Global MIDI Channel
TheGlobalMIDIChannelisthemostimportantMIDI relatedsettingintheKRONOS.Itdeterminesthemain MIDIchannelusedforbothProgramandCombination modes,forinstance.TosettheGlobalMIDIChannel: 1. GototheGlobalP1:MIDIpage. 2. IntheMIDISetupsection,settheMIDIChannel asdesired. 3. UsetheWriteGlobalSettingmenucommandto savetheMIDIClocksetting. Formoreinformation,seeWritingGlobalsettingson page 181.
External Controllers
YoucanusethecontrolsurfacetotransmitMIDICC messagestoexternalMIDIdevices.Eachslider,knob, andswitchcanbeassignedtoaseparateMIDI controllerandMIDIchannel. Youcancreateupto128differentExternalSetups.For instance,youmightmakeonesetupforcontrolling severaldifferentpiecesofMIDIgearonstage,another forcontrollingasoftwaresynthesizer(suchasoneof KorgsLegacyCollectionsynths),andsoon.
158
Global Settings
1. OntheGlobalExternal1page,settheExternal ModeSetupparametertotheExternalSetupthat youdliketouse. 2. PressthePROGbuttontoenterProgrammode. 3. UnderCONTROLASSIGN,presstheEXTbutton. ThisputstheControlSurfaceintoExternalmode. 4. GototheControlSurfacepage. LookattheSetupparameterontherighthandsideof thedisplay.NoticethattheExternalSetupyouselected instep1isstillactive. 5. UsetheSetupparametertoselectadifferent ExternalSetup. 6. PresstheCOMBIbuttontoenterCombination mode. 7. UnderCONTROLASSIGN,presstheEXTbutton. 8. GototheControlSurfacepage. LookattheSetupparameterontherighthandsideof thedisplay.NoticethattheExternalSetupyouselected inProgrammodeisstillactive.Theselectionstays activeuntilyouchangeit,regardlessofwhatsound youselectorwhichmodeyourein.Thismakesiteasy toselectdifferentKRONOSsoundswithoutdisrupting anyexternalMIDIcontrol,andviceversa.
Assignable Pedal
Youcanspecifythefunctionthatwillbeperformedby anassignablepedal(theoptionalXVP10EXP/VEL pedalorEXP2footcontroller)connectedtothe ASSIGNABLEPEDALjack. ThisiscontrolledbytheFootPedalAssignparameter. Youcanchoosefromthefollowingfunctions: Mastervolume Alternatemodulationsource Effectdynamicmodulationsource Portamentopitchchangespeed
Assignable Switch
FootSwitchAssignletsyouassignafunctiontoa footswitch(suchastheoptionalKorgPS1)connected totherearpanelASSIGNABLESWITCHjack. Youcanchoosefromthefollowingfunctions: AMS(AlternateModulation)sourceforcontrolling sounds
159
Volume Pan Pan(followinginserteffects) Sendlevelstothemastereffects Duplicatethefunctionofanothercontroller,suchas thejoystickorribbon Note:Youcanusethisasasourceforalternate modulationoreffectdynamicmodulation,anduseit tocontrolprogramparametersoreffectparameters.In thiscase,setFootSwitchAssigntoFootSW(CC#82), andFootPedalAssigntoFootPedal(CC#04).
Page
P1 Program Basic: Scale P2 Pitch: Scale, Use Programs Scale P2 Pitch: Scale, Use Programs Scale
Hereishowtosetthescaletypeforeachtimbrein Sequencermode. 1. Createauseroctavescaleorauserallnotesscale. Selectakey,andusetheVALUEcontrollerstoadjust thepitch.Therangeof99raisesorlowersthepitch approximatelyonesemitoneaboveorbelowthe standardpitch. Note:Youcanalsoselectakeybyholdingdownthe ENTERswitchandplayingthedesirednoteonthe keyboard. OntheUserScalepage,youcancreateyourown originalscales.TheseincludesixteendifferentUser OctaveScales,inwhichthepitchofeachnoteofthe octaveisrepeatedforalloctaves,andoneUserAll NoteScale,inwhichthepitchofeachofthe128notes canbespecifiedindependently. Byadjustingthepitchofeachkeyintherangeof99 cents,youcanraiseorloweritbyapproximatelyone semitonerelativetothenormalpitch. Theuserscalesyoucreateherecanbeusedby specifyingthescaleforaprogram,foreachtimbreofa combination,orforeachtrackofasong. Note:Youcancopyoneofthepresetscalesandeditit tocreateanoriginalscale.Todoso,usethepagemenu commandCopyScale. 2. PresstheSEQbuttontoenterSequencermode. 3. PresstheTrackParametertabandthenthePitch tabtogototheP2:TrackParametersPitchpage. 4. IfyouwanttheTracktousethescalesavedwith itsindividualProgram,checkthetracksUse ProgramsScalecheckbox. Tracksthatarenotcheckedwillusethescalespecified byScaleType(SongsScale). 5. SetType(SongsScale)toselectthescaleforthe currentlyselectedsong.
160
Global Settings
161
Automatically loading RAM and EXs sample data Using the KSC Auto-Load list to select which samples to load
KSCstandsforKorgSampleCollection.KSCfiles containlinkstoRAMand/orEXssampledata, includingMultisamples,Samples,andDrumSamples. LoadingaKSCfileloadsallofthelinkedsampledata. YoucanloadKSCfilesinDiskmode.However,the KRONOScanalsoautomaticallyloadoneormoreKSC filesatstartup.TheGlobalKSCAutoLoadpagelets youkeepalistofyourfavoriteKSCfiles,andselect whichonesfromthelistareloadedautomatically.You canalsoloadKSCfilesimmediately,withoutre starting,directlyfromthispage. Notethatyoucankeepfilesinthelistwithoutloading them.Forinstance,youmighthaveoneKSCfilefora recordingproject,andadifferentKSCfileforalive band.Thelistletsyoukeepthemathandforeasy loadingwhendesired,andmayoftenbemore convenientthanusingDiskmode. Note:TheKSCAutoLoadsettingsaresaved automatically,andarenotpartoftheGlobalPCGfile. Donotturnoffthepowerforatleast10seconds aftermakinganychangestotheAutoLoadsettings. Thisallowsthesystemtimetocompletetheprocess, whichincludessavingthesettingstotheinternal disk. KSCisaddedtothelistjustasifithadbeenaddedby usingAddKSC.Otherwise,anyautomaticallyadded KSCsareclearedfromthelistatthenextstartup.
162
RAM:ThesampleswillbeloadedintoRAM.Thishas theadvantageofallowingreversesampleplayback. VirtualMemory:ThesampleswilluseVirtual Memory.Thisgenerallyallowsyoutoloadmorelarge samplesatonce.Notethatthesamplesmaystill requireasignificantamountofRAM. KSCSettings:KSCscanstoreseparateloadmethod settingsforeachMultisampleorDrumSample,based onthesettingswhentheKSCwassaved.SettingLoad methodtoKSCSettingsusestheseindividualsettings.
Max numbers exceeded for RAM Multisamples, RAM Samples, or indexes in RAM Multisamples
TheKRONOScanhaveupto4,000RAM Multisamples,16,000RAMSamples,and16,000 indexesinRAMMultisamples.Ifanyoftheselimits wouldbeexceededbytheselectedautoload,then therearetwoindicationsinthegraphic: Thenumbersfortheaffecteddatatype(e.g., numberofRAMSamples)areshowninred Thebargraphforthedatatypeturnsred,instead ofblue,andextendstofilltheentirelength
163
Adialogappears.Therearemanyoptionshere;you cansaveeitherUserSamplesorEXsSamples,orboth; therearevariousoptionsforsavingonlyasingle MultisampleorSamplefromtheuserdata.Inthiscase, weregoingtosaveeverything. 17.SetIncludetoBothUserandEXs. 18.SetUserSaveDataOptionstoAll. 19.PressOKtosavethefile. Thatsit!Youvenowcreatedandsavedyourown.KSC file.Youcannowloadthislater,orsetitto automaticallyloadatstartup. Toreloadyourprevioussetofautoloadedsamples, followtheinstructionsunderApplyingchanges immediatelyonpage 162.
164
Contents
Factory Wave Sequences Initialized Wave Sequences Factory Wave Sequences Initialized Wave Sequences
Programming Basics
TheWaveSequenceparametersarespreadovertwo pages.TheSeqParameterspagehascontrolsforthe WaveSequenceasawhole,suchasthestartandend steps,looping,andmodulation. TheStepParameterspagegoesdeeperintothe structureoftheWaveSequence,allowingyoutoedit eachofthe64Steps. Programs,Combinations,andSongsalsohavea handfulofWaveSequencerelatedparameters,tomake iteasiertofitWaveSequencesinwithothersounds andrhythmiccomponents(suchasKARMA). TheWaveSequencegraphic,shownonboththeSeq ParametersandStepParameterspages,givesyoua quickoverviewofthesequence,ataglance: Thecurrentstepismarkedbyaredarrow. RedboxesareMultisamplesteps. GreenboxesareTiesteps. WhiteboxesareReststeps. ThelengthoftheWaveSequence,fromtheStart SteptotheEndStep,isshownbyarectangular outline. TheLoopishighlightedinblue. OntheStepParameterspage,thehorizontalscroll baratthetopofthegraphicshowsyoutheeight stepscurrentlydisplayedonthescreen. AtthebottomrightofthegraphicisaSolobutton. Whenthisisturnedon,theWaveSequencewill playonlythecurrentstep,includingitsfadeinand fadeout.
165
WaveSequencegraphic
Whats in a step?
WaveSequenceshave64steps(althoughyoudont havetouseallofthemseeSettingthelengthofthe sequenceonpage 166).Eachstepincludes: Atypesetting,whichmakesthestepeitherplaya Multisample,continuetheprevioussteplikeatied note,orplayonlysilencelikeamusicalrest. AselectedMultisample,whichsetsthebasicsound ofthestep. MultisampleReverseandStartOffsetparameters, whichmodifythebasicsoundoftheMultisample. Volume,coarsetuning,andfinetuningforthe Multisample. Aduration,whichcontrolshowlongthesteplasts. Youcansetthedurationineithermillisecondsor musicalbeats. Acrossfadetime,whichsetshowlongittakesto fadeintothenextstep. Fadeinandfadeoutshapesforthecrossfade,for subtlecontrolofthetransitionbetweenthisstep andthenextstep. TwoAMSoutputvalues,whichcanbeusedto controlotherProgramparameters.
166
MonoandstereoMultisamplesarestoredindifferent Banks.Eachstepcanbeeithermonoorstereo.Note thatevenifonlyonestepusesastereoMultisample, theentireWaveSequencebecomesstereo,anduses twiceasmanyvoicesitsthepricethatyoupayfor power! 4. SettheLevel(volume)asdesired. Thiscanbeusefulforeveningouttheperceivedlevels ofdifferentMultisamples,orforaccentingstepsin rhythmicsequences. 5. SettheTransposeandTuneasdesired. TransposesetstheMultisamplescoarsetuning,in semitones.Youcanusethistochangetheoctavefor individualsteps,tocreatemelodies,ortocreate interestingvariationsonpercussionsoundsbyextreme transposition. Tunecontrolsthefinetuning,incents(1/100ofa semitone).Smallvariationsintuningcancreatean interesting,organicfeel. 6. UseReverseandStartOffsettochangetheway thattheMultisampleplays. ReverseplaystheselectedMultisamplebackwards, withoutlooping.(Ifindividualsampleswithinthe MultisamplearealreadysettoReverse,theywillstill playinreverse,regardlessofthissetting.) StartOffsetletsyouselectfromupto8pre programmedsamplestartpoints(forROMandEXs Multisamples),orbetweenthenormalstartpointand theloopstart(forRAMMultisamples).
Using Insert/Cut/Copy/Paste
YoucanusetheInsert,Cut,Copy,andPastebuttonsto copyalloftheparametersfromonesteptoanother,or tomoveasteptoadifferentpositioninthesequence. Toinsertacopyofastepintothesequence: 1. Selectthestepyoudliketocopy. Youcandothisbytouchinganyofthesteps parameters,orbydirectlyeditingtheStepparameter undertheWaveSequencegraphic.Theselectedstepis shownbyaredarrowontheleftsideofthescreen,as wellasaredarrowinthegraphic. 2. PresstheCopybutton. Yourenowreadytoinsertorpastethestep. 3. Selectthestepwhichyoudliketofollowthenew step. 4. PresstheInsertbutton. Thecopiedstepisinsertedattheselectedposition.The previouslyselectedstep,andallstepsfollowingit, movedowntomakeroomfortheinsertedstep. Toremoveastepfromthesequence: 1. Selectthestepyoudliketoremove. 2. PresstheCutbutton. Theselectedstepwillberemovedfromthesequence, andallfollowingstepswillshiftuptofillinthespace.
4. SettheIntensityasdesired. ThismeansthattheAMS1outputwillmodulatethe FilterFrequency.Now,youjustneedtosetupthe WaveSequencetosendvaluesout: 5. GototheWaveSequenceStepParameterspage. 6. Foreachstep,enterthedesiredvalueforAMS Out1. 7. GototheOSC1BasictaboftheOSC/Pitchpage. 8. SetMS1tousetheWaveSequenceyoueditedin step5. TheFilterFrequencywillnowchangewitheverystep. YoumaywonderwhatiftheProgramusesmorethan oneWaveSequence,andeachissendingoutdifferent AMSvalues?Nottoworry.Underthehood,eachWave Sequenceactuallyhasitsowncompletevoice structure,whichallowstheAMSvaluestobedifferent foreachone.
167
WaveSequencestepDurations,Crossfadetimes,andFadeInandFadeOutshapes
Step 1 Duration Step 2 Duration Step 3 Duration Step 4 Duration
Volume
Time Step 1 Crossfade Xfade In = Log Step 2 Crossfade Xfade Out = Exp Step 3 Crossfade Xfade In = Off Step 4 Crossfade Xfade Out = Off
Xfade In = Lin
168
WaveSequenceSwing
Swing Resolution = Beat 1
3 3
Beat 2
Swing = 0%
Swing = +100%
Swing = 100%
Using Swing
Swingaddsahumanfeeltotherhythm,andprovides aneasywaytoturnasquarerhythmintoashuffle groove. Thisworksbyadjustingthepositionoftheupbeats, relativetotheWaveSequencesSwingResolution setting.Forinstance,iftheSwingResolutionissetto 1/8,Swingaffectseveryother8thnote. WhiletheSwingResolutionisstoredintheWave Sequence,theSwingamountissetintheProgram, CombiTimbre,orSongTrack.Thisletsyouuseasingle WaveSequenceindifferentPrograms,Combis,and Songs,eachwithdifferentamountsofswing. Forinstance,toturnan8thnoterhythmintoashuffle: 1. CreateorselectaWaveSequencewithan8thnote rhythm. 2. OntheSeqParameterspage,makesurethat SwingResolutionissettoan8thnote. 3. CreateorselectthePrograminwhichyoudliketo usetheWaveSequence. 4. GototheOSC1BasictaboftheOSC/Pitchpage. 5. SetMS1tousetheWaveSequenceyouselectedin step1. 6. GototheProgramBasictaboftheBasic/Vector page. 7. UnderWaveSequence,settheSwingparameterto +100%. Thismakesthe8thnotesintoatriplet,shufflepattern. Positivevaluesmaketheupbeatslater,andnegative valuesmakethemearlier.WhenSwingissetto+300%, upbeatswillbemovedallthewaytothenextdown beat.Atthispoint,thenotesontheupbeatswillnotbe heardatall. IfyouareusingtheWaveSequenceinconjunction withKARMA,youmaywishtoadjustKARMAs swingamountaswell.
Swing = +200%
Swing = +300%
+300
Quantize Triggers
QuantizeTriggersallowsyoutoforcemostTempo modeWaveSequencenoteonstobeinsync,makingit easiertoplayalongwithotherrhythmicelements. WhenQuantizeTriggerisOn,noteonsarequantized to8thnotesusingthecurrenttemporeference.(See belowforafewmoredetails.) Thetemporeferencecancomefromdifferentsources, dependingonthecurrentmode,andwhetherornot KARMAison:
169
InProgramandCombimodes,ifKARMAisoff, noteonsaresynchronizedwiththesounding TempomodeWaveSequence,ifany. InProgramandCombimodes,ifKARMAison, noteonsaresynchronizedwithKARMA. InSequencemodeduringplaybackorrecording, noteonsaresynchronizedwiththesequence. InSequencemode,whilethesequencerisstopped, noteonsaresynchronizedwithRPPRand KARMA. EachProgram,eachCombiTimbre,andeachTrackina SonghasitsownQuantizeTriggerssetting. ToturnonQuantizeTriggersinaProgram: 1. GototheProgramBasictaboftheBasic/Vector page. 2. ChecktheQuantizeTriggersbox. ToturnonQuantizeTriggersinaCombiorSong: 1. GototheWaveSequence/KARMAtabofthe TimbreParameterspage(forCombis),orTrack Parameterspage(forSongs). Eachofthe16TimbresorTrackshasitsownQuantize Triggersparameter.Ifyoulike,youcansetthemall separately. 2. SettheQuantizeTriggerscheckboxesasyoulike.
QuantizeTriggers
170
Note-On Advance
Thisfeatureletsyouadvancethestartpointofthe WaveSequencebyonestepwitheachnewnoteon.If LoopRepeatsisnotsettoOff,NoteOnAdvancewill stepthroughtheloop,payingattentiontotheloop directionandnumberofrepeats. Forinstance,letssaythattheWaveSequenceStart Stepis2,andtheEndStepis6.Also,theLoopStartis setto3,theLoopEndissetto5,andtheLoop DirectionissettoForward. IfRepeatTimesisOff,NoteOnAdvancewillmake theWaveSequenceplayasfollows: 1stnote:2,3,4,5,6 2ndnote:3,4,5,6 3rdnote:4,5,6 4thnote:5,6 5thnote:6 6thnote:2,3,4,5,6 7thnote:3,4,5,6 8thnote:4,5,6 9thnote:5,6 10thnote:6 11thnote:2,3,4,5,6 etc IfRepeatTimesis1,NoteOnAdvancewillmakethe WaveSequenceplayasfollows: firstnote:2,3,4,5,3,4,5,6 2ndnote:3,4,5,3,4,5,6 3rdnote:4,5,3,4,5,6 4thnote:5,3,4,5,6 5thnote:3,4,5,6 6thnote:4,5,6
Duration modulation
Durationmodulationletsyoudynamicallycontrolthe stepdurationandcrossfadetimes.Youcanspeedupor slowdowntheWaveSequencesothatitrunsbetween 1%and400%oftheoriginalrate. ByusingVelocity,keytracking,ornotenumberasthe AMSsource,youcanmaketheWaveSequenceson everynotehaveslightlydifferenttiming(or dramaticallydifferenttiming,forthatmatter!)Thiscan beveryusefulformakingacrossfadedWave Sequencesoundmoreorganic.Forinstance,tomake theWaveSequencemovefasterwhenyouplayat highervelocities: 1. GototheSequenceParameterspage. 2. UnderModulationandDuration,selectVelocity astheAMSsource. 3. SettheIntensitytoavaluelessthan100%,suchas 90%. Valuesbelow100%makethedurationsshorter,sothe WaveSequencemovesmorequickly.Valuesabove 100%makethedurationslonger,sothesequence movesmoreslowly.
171
7thnote:5,6 8thnote:6 9thnote:2,3,4,5,3,4,5,6 10thnote:3,4,5,3,4,5,6 11thnote:4,5,3,4,5,6 12thnote:5,3,4,5,6 13thnote:3,4,5,6 14thnote:4,5,6 15thnote:5,6 etc Finally,ifRepeatTimesisINF,NoteOnAdvancewill maketheWaveSequenceplayasfollows.Notethatthe WaveSequenceneverreturnstothestartstep,sinceits outsideoftheloop: firstnote:2,3,4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5 2ndnote:3,4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5
172
Contents
Factory Drum Kits GM2 Drum Kits User Drum Kits
173
174
8. SetDS2sBottomVelocityto001,anditsXfade Rangeto0. 9. SetDS1sBottomVelocityto80. Now,DS2willsoundwhenyouplaysoftly,at velocitiesof79orlessandDS1willsoundwhenyou playharder,withvelocitiesof80ormore. Youcanalsoseethissplitvisually,inthegraphiconthe rightsideoftheLCD. 10.Next,setDS1sXfadeRangeto20,anditsCurveto Linear. Noticethatthegraphicnowshowsthetworanges taperingintooneanother.Between80and100,DS2 willfadeout,andDS1willfadein,creatingagradual velocitytransitioninsteadofahardsplit.
1. InProgrammode,gototheProgramBasictabof theBasic/Vectorpage. 2. UnderKeyZone,makesurethattheHoldcheck boxischecked. OnceyouveturnedonHoldfortheProgram,the functioniscontrolledonanotebynotebasis accordingtosettingswithintheDrumKit. 3. InGlobalmode,gototheVoiceMixertabofthe DrumKitpage. 4. Foreachkey,settheEnableNoteOffReceive parameterasdesired. Ifthisparameterisunchecked,thekeywillbeheld. Ifitischecked,thekeywillnotbeheld. IfyouturnoffHoldintheProgram,nokeyswillbe heldregardlessoftheirEnableNoteOffReceive setting.
Using Hold
TheProgramHoldparametercanbeespeciallyuseful fordrumprograms,sinceitletsthesamplesringout naturallyregardlessofhowlongyouholddownthe note.Thewaythatthisworksdependsonsettingsin boththeProgramandtheDrumKit,asdescribed below. ToenableHold:
175
176
177
178
Saving data
ThefollowingUpdateProgram/Update Combinationdialogboxwillappear.
2. Towritethedata,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel withoutwriting,presstheCancelbutton.
WaveSequences DrumKits EachtimeyouselectoneoftheseitemsaSetList, Program,etc.itscopiedintothedatatypesedit buffer.Whenyoumakeedits,thechangesareapplied toversionintheeditbuffer,andnottothestored version. UsingthemenucommandWritecopiestheeditbuffer backtothestoredversion,makingtheedits permanent. Notethatthereisonlyoneeditbufferforeachdata type.Forinstance,ifyoustarttoeditProgramINT A000,andthenchangetoProgramUSERG127,the editstoINTA000willbelost. Changingtoadifferentdatatypedoesnotclearthe editbuffer,however.Forinstance,youcanedita Program,switchtoCombimodetohearhowthe ProgramsoundsinaCombination,andthenswitch backtoProgrammodewithoutlosingyoureditsto eithertheProgramortheCombination.
Editing applies to the data in the edit buffer. Programs or combinations will play according to the data in the edit buffer. When you write, the program or combination settings will be saved in internal memory. Edit Buffer Write Select Edit When you select a program or combination, its data is called from internal memory into the edit buffer.
Internal Memory
Program INTA 0...127 Combination INTA 0...127 Wave Seq INT 0...149 Drum Kit INT 0...39
Compare
TheCOMPAREbuttonletsyougobackandforth betweenthestoredversionofthesoundandthe versionintheeditbuffer.TheLEDontheCOMPARE buttonletsyouknowwhichversionyourelisteningto. Forinstance: 1. SelectaCombination. 2. ChangeTimbre1toplayadifferentProgram. 3. PresstheCOMPAREbutton. TheCOMPARELEDlightsup,andTimbre1returnsto theoriginalProgram. 4. PresstheCOMPAREbuttonagain. TheCOMPARELEDturnsoff,andTimbre1switches backthenewProgram.
179
1. Pressthetexteditbutton toopenthetextedit dialogbox.(SeethegraphicTexteditdialog, below.) 2. PresstheClearbuttontodeletethepreviousname. 3. PresstheShiftbuttontoswitchtouppercase characters,andpressthecharacterP. 4. PresstheShiftbuttonagaintoswitchtolowercase characters,andpressthecharactersi,a,n,o. ThetextwillnowreadPiano. 5. PresstheSpacebuttontoenteraspace,andthen pressthecharacters0,1. ThetextwillnowreadPiano01. 6. PresstheOKbuttontoclosethedialogbox. Ifyoudontneedtomakeanycorrections,pressthe OKbuttonagaintocompletetheWritecommand, includingtheeditedname.
Editing names
YoucanchangethenamesofSetLists,Programs, Combinations,Songs,UserPatterns,DrumKits,Wave Sequences,Multisamples,Samples,andmore,as showninthetablebelow.Youcanalsochangethe namesofProgram,Combination,andKARMA CategoriesandSubCategories. Asanexample,hereshowtochangethenameofa ProgramtoPiano01usingtheWritepagemenu command: Texteditdialog
Text Cursor
Character buttons
Shift button Switches between uppercase and lowercase characters. Delete button Deletes the character to the left of the cursor. Cancel button, OK button If you are satisfied with the text that you input, press the OK button. If you wish to discard your input and exit the text edit box, press the Cancel button.
Clear button Delete all characters of the text. Space button Insert a space at the cursor location.
Tracks Patterns RAM Multisamples RAM Samples Categories & sub categories Files
Sequencer P4: Track Name Sequencer P5: Pattern Name Sampling P04 page menu command: Rename MS Sampling P04 page menu command: Rename Sample Global P3: Program, Combination, and KARMA Category tabs Disk Save: Save AllSave Audio CD Track List, Disk Utility page menu command: Rename
Effect Presets
Songs Regions
180
Saving data
Memory protect
MemoryProtectletsyoupreventcertaintypesofdata frombeingoverwrittenaccidentally.Thereare individualcheckboxestoenableMemoryProtectfor differentpartsofthesystem,asdescribedbelow. ForPrograms,Combinations,Songs,SetLists,Drum Kits,WaveSequences,andKARMAGEs,Memory Protectprevents: UsingtheWritecommandtosaveedits Loadingthedatatypefromdisk ReceivingdumpsofthedatatypeviaMIDISysEx WhenenabledforSongs,MemoryProtectalso preventsrecordinginSequencermode. WhenenabledforInternalHDDSave,MemoryProtect preventssavinganydatatotheinternaldisk. Beforesavingedits,loadingdata,andsoon,usethe followingproceduretoturnthememoryprotectoff. 1. PresstheGLOBALswitchtoenterGlobalmode. 2. GototheGlobalP0:BasicSetupBasicpage,and selecttheBasicpage. PresstheBasictabatthebottom,andthenpressthe Basictababoveit.
Therearetwowaystowriteglobalsettings.
181
Media setup
Beforesavingorloadingdata,makesurethatthe desireddiskorUSBstoragemediaisselected.
182
Saving data
5. WaitafewsecondstoallowUSBdevicestobe recognized. 6. UseDriveSelecttoselectthedesireddevice. Ifyouareusingaremovabledisk,insertthemedia. AfteryouexchangemediainyourUSBdevice,press theLCDscreentomaketheKRONOSdetectthe media.Whenthemediahasbeendetected,theLCD screenwilldisplayinformationaboutthemedia. 7. Ifthemedianeedstobeformatted,executethe Formatoperation. Mediarequiringformattingisindicatedas UnformattedinDriveSelect.Formoreinformation, seeFormattingmediaonpage 184. 7. Pressthetexteditbuttonandenteranameforthe files.(SeeEditingnamesonpage 180.) AllofthefilescreatedbySaveAllwillsharethisname, butwithdifferentfileextensions.Ifyouloadoneof thesefileslater,youllbegiventheoptionto automaticallyloadalloftheotherrelatedfilesas wellahandytimesaver. 8. Fornow,leavealloftheboxescheckedinthe Selectionbuttondialogs. Thereareindividualcheckboxesforeachbankof ProgramsandCombis,andforvariousothertypesof data.Leavingallofthesecheckedensuresthatyoure savingeverythingyoullneed.
9. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheSaveoperation. Allofthedatawillbesaved,creatingahandfulof differentfiles.Fordetails,seeFiletypesincludedin SaveAll,below. Whenthesaveiscomplete,thesystemreturnstothe Savepage,andthedisplaywillshowtheresulting file(s).Theamountoftimerequiredwilldependonthe amountofdatabeingsaved. Ifafilewiththesamenamealreadyexistsonthe media,youwillbeaskedwhetheryouwantto overwrite.Ifyouwishtooverwrite,presstheOK button.Ifyouwishtosavewithoutoverwriting,press theCancelbutton,redotheoperationfromstep6,and renamethedatainstep7beforesavingit.
Split files
Ifthedatadoesnotfitontotheselectedvolume,the Nospaceavailableonmediumdialogboxwill appear.YoucanpresstheOKbuttontodividethefile willbedividedandsaveittomultiplevolumesof media(suchasmultipleUSBsticks).Ifyoudontwant todividethefile,presstheCancelbutton,andsavethe filetolargercapacitymedia. Formoreinformation,seeSaveAll(PCG,SNGand KSC)onpage 842oftheParameterGuide.
183
4. UnchecktheGlobalSettingandSetListcheck boxes. Ifyouresavingjustoneortwobanksofsounds,you dontneedtosavethese. 5. IfthesoundsrelyonuserDrumTrackpatterns, leaveDrumTrackPatternchecked. 6. Pressthetexteditbuttonandenteranameforthe file.(SeeEditingnamesonpage 180.) 7. PressOKtosavethesounds.
Data dependencies
WhenusingSaveAll,SavePCG&SNG,andSave PCGtosaveCombinations,youshouldalsoremember tosavetheProgramsusedbyeachtimbre(ortheDrum KitsandWaveSequencesusedbythePrograms)atthe sametime. SimilarlywhensavingPrograms,youshouldalso remembertosavetheDrumKitsandWaveSequences usedbytheprograms. Note:Ifyourprogramsordrumkitsusemultisamples andsamplesthatwerecreatedinonKRONOS,we recommendthatyouuseSaveAlltosavethedata. WhenyouuseSavePCGorSaveSamplingDatato individuallysaveaprogramordrumkit,ora multisampleorsamplethatyoucreated,we recommendthatyousavethemunderthesame filenameinthesamedirectory.WhenyouuseLoad PCGtoloada.PCGfile,theidenticallynamed.KSC filewillalsobeloadedsothatthecorrect multisamples/sampleswillcorrespondautomatically.
Formatting media
Newlypurchasedmediaormediathathasbeenused byanotherdevicemaynotbeabletobeusedasis.In thiscase,youmayneedtoformatthemediabeforeyou canuseitwiththeKRONOS. TheKRONOSisshippedwiththeinternaldisk alreadyformatted. WhencreatingaudioCDs,youdontneedtoformat theCDR/RWmedia. Whenyouformat,alldatasavedonthatmediawill beerased.Ifyouhadusedacomputeretc.tosetup thatdrivesothatitcanbeusedasmultipledrives (partitions),thisdatawillalsobeerased.Besureto doublecheckbeforeyouformat. Afterformatting,itisnotpossibletopressthe COMPAREswitchtoreturntothepreviousstate. 1. Makesurethatthemediayouwanttoformatis inserted. (SeeMediasetuponpage 182) 2. PresstheDISKbuttontoenterDiskmode. 3. SelecttheDiskUtilitypage.PresstheFiletab, andthentheUtilitytab. 4. PressDriveSelect,andchoosethedrivethatyou wanttoformat.
184
Saving data
5. Pressthepagemenubuttontoaccessthepage menu,andpressFormattoopenthedialogbox.
6. InVolumeLabel,usethetexteditbuttonto accessthetexteditdialogbox,andspecifythe volumelabel. Thepreviouslyspecifiedvolumelabelwillbe displayed.Ifnovolumelabelhadbeenspecifiedfor themedia,orifanonDOSmediawasinserted,this willindicateNEWVOLUME. 7. Specifytheinitializationformat. QuickFormat:NormallyyoushoulduseQuick Formattoinitializethemedia. Selectthisifthemediahasalreadybeenphysically formatted,orifyouwanttoformatmediathathas beenUDFformattedbytheKRONOS.Sinceonlythe systemareaofthemedianeedbeformatted,thiswill requirelesstime. Note:FortheinternaldiskyoucanonlyselectQuick Format. FullFormat:Selectthiswhenformattingmediathat hasnotbeenphysicallyformatted,ormedia(CDRW) thathasnotbeenUDFformatted. Note:Normally,itisnotnecessarytoperformaFull Formatonmediathathasbeenphysicallyformattedat 512bytes/block.ExecutetheQuickFormatforsuch media. Note:YouwillnormallyselectFullFormatforCDRW mediaetc.thathasnotbeenUDFformatted.Ifanerror messageofMedianotformattedappears,execute FullFormat. Dependingonthecapacityofthemedia,executingFull Formatmayrequireasubstantiallengthoftime. 8. Specifythefilesystem. UseFAT16toformatmediaof4GBorless(suchas flashmedia),anduseFAT32toformatlargermedia (theoretically,upto2Terabytes). 9. PresstheOKbuttontoformat,orpresstheCancel buttonifyoudecidetocancel. WhenyoupresstheOKbutton,amessagewillaskyou forconfirmation.PresstheOKbuttononceagainto executetheFormatoperation. YoumustformataCDR/RWdiscifyouwanttouse itforpacketwriting,orifithaspreviouslybeen usedbyanotherdevice. YoudonotneedtoformataCDR/RWdiscthatyou willusetocreateanaudioCD. YoumustusetheKRONOStoformatthemedia. TheKRONOSwillnotcorrectlyrecognizemedia thathasbeenformattedbyanotherdevice.
185
186
AppendwillleaveallcurrentlyloadedRAMand/or EXsdataintact.RAMMultisamplesandSampleswill beloadedintothenextavailablevacantnumbers followingtheexistingdata. ClearRAMwilleraseallmultisamplesandsamples fromsamplememory(RAM),andloadthedatainthe sameconfigurationwithwhichitwassaved.Existing EXsdataisleftintact. ClearRAM&EXsissimilartoClearRAM,above,but alsounloadsexistingEXsdatabeforeloadingthenew .KSCfile.Thisfreesupthemostmemoryforthenew .KSC. Youcanusetheinformationatthebottomofthedialog box,includingMemoryRequired,(Memory) Available,andEnoughslotsforSamples&MS,to determinewhetherornotyouneedtofreeuproomfor thenew.KSC. 12.SettheLoadMethodasdesired. ThissetsthepreferredwaytoloadtheEXssamplesin theKSC:loadthemintoRAM,oruseVirtualMemory. Notethatifthedataisextremelylarge,andwouldnot fitintoRAMregardlessofwhichothersampleswere loaded,thedatawilluseVirtualMemoryregardlessof thissetting. ThesesettingsapplyonlytoEXsdata;usersamplesare alwaysloadedintoRAM. RAM:ThesampleswillbeloadedintoRAM.Thishas theadvantageofallowingreverseplayback. VirtualMemory:ThesampleswilluseVirtual Memory.Thisgenerallyallowsyoutoloadmorelarge samplesatonce.Notethatthesamplesmaystill requireasignificantamountofRAM KSCSettings:KSCscanstoreseparateloadmethod settingsforeachMultisampleorDrumSample,based onthesettingswhentheKSCwassaved.SettingLoad methodtoKSCSettingsusestheseindividualsettings. 13.PresstheOKbuttontoloadthedata. NeverremoveordisconnectUSBstoragedevices whiledataisbeingloaded.
187
Supportedfiletypes
DOS file
.PCG file
All programs
1 program
(Grey)
All combinations 1 combination bank I-A...G, U-A...G 1 combination DOS directory
(Red)
All drum kits (User) 1 drum kit bank INT, U-A...GG 1 drum kit DOS directory (created by Save SEQ on the KRONOS)
(Purple)
All wave sequences 1 wave sequence bank INT, U-A...GG 1 wave sequence DOS directory (created by Save Sampling Data on the KRONOS)
(Grey)
All set lists 1 set list 1 slot Undefined DOS file
Global settings
(Blue)
.SNG file
1 song (000-199)
Track
All regions
Region
(Red)
DOS file
.KFX file
.MID file
.EXL file All effects All presets (U) 1 effect All presets (U) 1 effect preset (U) .KCD file
.KGE file
All GE
1 GE USER-A...USER-L
1 GE .SYX file
All Template
(Grey)
.exsins
.KSC file
All multisamples
1 multisample
.KMP file
All drumsamples
1 drumsample
.KSF file
All multisamples
.AIF file
Partition
Volume
AKAI S1000/S3000
AKAI format Sample file .WAV file (24bit)
(Purple)
188
189
190
Usethedriveselect,OpenandUpbuttonstogoto thedirectorythatcontainstheWAVEfile,andselect theWAVEfilethatyouwanttoaddtothelist. YoucanpressthePlaybuttontoplaybackthe sampleforauditioning.Alternatively,youcanpress theSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtoplayit. IfyouhaveselectedaWAVEfilewithasampling frequencyotherthan44.1kHzor48kHz,itwillnot bepossibletopresstheInsertbutton. 48kHzWAVEfileswillbeautomaticallyconverted to44.1kHzwhenyouusetheWritetoCD command. Toaddthefile,presstheInsertbutton. Youcancontinueaddingfilesuntilyoupressthe Exitbutton.Thefileswillbeaddedtothetracklist intheorderinwhichyouselectedthem.Ifyouwant
191
toaddalltheWAVEfilesinthedirectory,pressthe InsertAllbutton. Note:IfyouchecktheMultipleSelectoption,youll beabletoselectmultipleWAVEfilesandinsert theminasingleoperation. Whenyouhavefinishedaddingfilestothelist, presstheExitbuttontoclosethedialogbox. NoticethattheWAVEfileshavebeenaddedtothe tracklist. UseSpeedtosetthewritingspeed.Thiswillindicate thespeedssupportedbytheCDR/RWdriveyouare using.Inthisexample,settheSpeedtothelowest valueavailable(suchas1x). Insomecases,fasterspeedsmaycausewriteerrors. UseModetospecifythewritingmethod. Note:Dependingonthedriveyouareusing,itmaynot bepossibletowriteatthespecifiedspeed.We recommendthatthefirsttimeyouwrite,youselect Testtoperformawritingtestinordertodeterminethe speedcapabilitiesofyourdrive.Testwillnotwrite datatotheCDR/RWmedia,butwillperformallother processingjustaswhendataisactuallywritten.Ifan erroroccurs,thedisplaywillshowthemessageError inwritingtomedium. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethewritingtest. Afterverifyingthatdatacanbewrittencorrectlyatthe specifiedspeed,selectWrite. ExecutefinalizetoospecifieswhetherFinalizationwill beexecutedaftertheaudiotrackshavebeenwrittento theCDR/RWmedia.Iffinalizationhasbeenexecuted, thedisccanbeplayedbackonaCDplayer,butitwill nolongerbepossibletoaddmoretracks. Note:Ifyouonlywanttoexecutefinalization,usethe FinalizeAudioCDcommand. 6. WhenyouarereadytowritetotheCDR/RW media,ortoexecuteawritingtest,presstheOK button.Tocancelwithoutexecuting,pressthe Cancelbutton. WhenyoupresstheOKbutton,theObey CopyrightRulesdialogboxwillappear. 7. CarefullyreadCOPYRIGHTWARNINGon page 3oftheQuickStartGuide,andifyou consenttotheterms,presstheOKbuttontobegin burningtheCD.Ifyoudonotconsenttotheterms, presstheCancelbuttontocanceltheoperation. Inordertoavoiderrors,donotsubjectthedriveto physicalshockorvibrationwhileCDR/RWmedia isbeingwritten.
YoucanalsousethePlaybuttontoplayany44.1kHz or48kHzWAVEfile. ToaddotherWAVEfilestothetracklist,pressthe Insertbuttononceagain. Ifyouwanttoaddanothertrack,selecttheWAVEfile thatfollowsthetrackyouwanttoadd.Ifyouwantto addthetracktotheendofthetracklist,select ====End====.ThenpresstheInsertbutton. TodeleteaWAVEfilefromthetracklist,selectthe WAVEfilethatyouwanttodelete,andpresstheCut button.Subsequenttrackswillbemovedforwardin thelist. Note:Formoredetailsonothereditingoperations, pleasesee11c:DriveSelect,Commandbuttonson page 820oftheParameterGuide,andSwapTrack onpage 850oftheParameterGuide. 4. InsertablankCDRorCDRWdiskintothedrive. IntheMakeAudioCDpage,useDriveSelecttoselect theexternalUSBCDR/RWdrive.TheCDR/RWdrive isshownasCDD:BlankDisc. AnaudioCDcannotbecreatedonadiscthat containsdataotherthanaudio(e.g.,files).Inthis case,itwillnotbepossibletoselectthemenu commandsWritetoCDorFinalizeAudioCD. Note:SincesomeaudioCDplayersareunabletoplay backCDRWmedia,werecommendthatyouuseCD RmediaforaudioCDs. 5. SelectthemenucommandWritetoCDtoopenthe dialogbox,andspecifyhowtheCDwillbe written.
192
2. InDriveSelect,selectyourUSBCDR/RWdrive. DriveSelectwillindicateAudioCD. 3. Toallowmonitoring,settheCDR/RWDrive AudioInputasfollows. LEFT:Bus(IFX/Indiv.)L/R,FXCtrlBusOff,REC BusOff,Send1/Send2000,PanL000,Level127 RIGHT:Bus(IFX/Indiv.)L/R,FXCtrlBusOff,REC BusOff,Send1/Send2000,PanR127,Level127 Volume:127 4. UseTracktoselectthetrack,andpressthe SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtobegin playback.
193
194
Using Effects
Effects overview Effects basics
TheKRONOSprovides12inserteffects,twomaster effects,andtwototaleffects,togetherwithamixerthat controlstheroutingoftheseeffects.Alloftheseare stereoin/out. Specificparametersoftheseeffectscanalsobe controlledinrealtimefromtheKRONOScontrollers orviaMIDImessagesusingDynamicModulation (Dmod),byMIDI/TempoSync,orbyusingacommon LFOortheVectorEGtoapplysynchronizedchangeto differingmodulationeffects. Pleasenotethatpowerusedbytheeffectsmay sometimeshaveanimpactontheavailablenumberof voices(althoughgenerallyonlyinextremeconditions). Formoreinformation,seeAboutpolyphonyon page 16.
What is REMs
*?
Effect types
Youcanchoosefrom185differenteffectsinthe followingcategories: Effecttypes
Dynamics: 000010 EQ/Filter: 011026 OD/Amp/Mic: 027039 Cho/Fln/Phs: 040054 Mod/P.Shift: 055076 Delay: 077099 Reverb/ER: 100108 Mono-Mono: 109140 Effects which control volume, such as compressors, limiter, and gates Effects which control frequency content, such as EQ, multi-mode filter, exciter, and wah Overdrive and amp modeling effects such as guitar/bass amps and mic preamps Choruses, Flangers, Phasers, and other pitch and phase modulation effects Other modulation effects such as tremolo and rotary speaker, and pitch shifters Delays Reverb and early reflections Chains of two mono effects in series
(ResonantstructureandElectroniccircuit ModelingSystem)isKorgsproprietarytechnologyfor digitallyrecreatingthenumerousfactorsthatproduce andinfluenceasound,rangingfromthesound productionmechanismsofacousticinstrumentsand electric/electronicmusicalinstruments,tothe resonancesofaninstrumentbodyorspeakercabinet, thesoundfieldinwhichtheinstrumentisplayed,the propagationrouteofthesound,theelectricaland acousticresponseofmicsandspeakers,andthe changesproducedbyvacuumtubesandtransistors.
Mono/Mono: Dual Mono parallel effects, with independent 141185 mono effects for the left and right inputs
195
Using Effects
Effect I/O
Insert effects
InsertEffects(IFX112)arestereoin/stereoout.Ifyou setWet/DrytoDry,theinputsignalwillpassthrough withoutbeingprocessedbytheeffect.Ifyouset Wet/DrytoWet,theprocessedsignalwillbeoutputin oneofthefollowingways:
Mono In - Mono Out Wet Mono In - Stereo Out Stereo In - Stereo Out
+ Effect
Total Effects
ThetotaleffectsTFX1andTFX2arestereoin/stereo out.TheDry(unprocessed)sideoftheWet/Dry parametersendsthestereoinputsounddirectlytothe stereooutput.ThewayinwhichtheWet(processed) sideisoutputdependsonthetypeofeffect,asfollows.
Mono In - Mono Out Wet Mono In - Stereo Out Stereo In - Stereo Out
+ Effect
Master Effects
TheI/OsofMasterEffectsMFX1andMFX2arestereo in/stereoout.Send1andSend2determinethesend leveltotheMasterEffects. MastereffectswillnotoutputtheDry(unprocessed) signalspecifiedinWet/Dry.OnlytheWet(processed) signalwillbeoutput.Theoutputsignalsfromthe MasterEffectsareroutedtotheL/Rbuswiththe outputlevelspecifiedbyReturn1andReturn2.These outputsignalsaremixedwiththeoutputsignalsfrom thebusspecifiedbyBusSelect(P8:Routingpagein eachmode)L/R,orwiththeoutputsignalsfromthe busspecifiedbyBusSelect(InsertFXpageineach mode)L/R,thenroutedtothetotaleffect.
Set List EQ
SetListshaveanadditionaleffectsslotnotavailablein theothermodes:adedicatedninebandgraphicEQ appliedtothesoundafterTFX2,whichtailorsthe soundfromthemainstereooutputs(includingthe analogL/Routputs,S/PDIF,andUSB). Formoreinformation,seeGraphicEQonpage 119.
Programmode
Oscillator1 Oscillator2 Filter1 Filter2 Driver1 Driver2 Amplifier1 Amplifier2 EQ EQ
Send
Master Effect 1, 2
Drum Track
196
Effects overview
Thenyoucanusethemastereffectstocreateoverall ambience,andusethetotaleffectstomakefinal adjustments. InCombinationmodeyoucanmakethesesettingsfor eachcombination,andinSequencermodeyoucan makethemforeachsong. InSequencermode,youcanswitchbetweeneffectsor modifytheeffectparametersandrecordthesechanges, sothateffectswillswitchautomaticallyoreffect parameterswillbemodifiedautomaticallyasthesong playsback.
InSequencermodeyoucanalsousetheeffectswhen recordingexternalaudiosourcestoaudiotracks. UsetheP0AudioInput/Samplingpageofeachmode tomakeaudioinputsettings.Alternatively,youcan checkUseGlobalSettingandmakethesesettingsin theGlobalmodeP0:BasicSetupAudiopage. NormallyyouwillleaveUseGlobalSettingchecked. Uncheckthisifyouwantprogramsandcombinations tousetheirownsettings.Forexamplewhenwriting theprogramasavocodereffectprogram. Wheneffectsareappliedtotheaudioinputs,certain effecttypesorparametersettingsmaycause oscillationtooccur.Ifthisoccurs,adjusttheinput level,outputlevel,oreffectparameters.Pleasebe awareofthisparticularlywhenusinganeffectthat hasahighgain.
Sampling mode
InSamplingmode,theanalog,S/P DIF,andUSBaudio inputs,aswellasplaybackfromaUSBCDdrive,can beprocessedbyinserteffects,mastereffects,andtotal effects,andthensampled.UsetheP0:Recording AudioInputpagetomakeaudioinputsettingsfor Samplingmode.ThesesettingsapplyonlytoSampling mode. Samplesthatyouveassignedasamultisamplecan alsobeprocessedbytheinserteffects,mastereffects, andtotaleffects,andthenresampled.
Audio Inputs
Youcanalsouseaudiofromtheanalog,S/P DIF,and USBaudioinputsinPrograms,Combinations,and Songs. Youcanapplytheinserteffects,mastereffects,and totaleffectstoexternalaudiosourcesandsample them,orusetheKRONOSasa6in(AUDIOINPUT1 2,S/P DIFINL,R,andUSB)6outeffectprocessor. Youcanalsouseanexternalmicinputtocontrola vocodereffect(093:Vocoder),andmodulatethe internalsounds.Forexamples,seeVocoder(Program mode)onpage 857oftheParameterGuideand RhythmicVocoder(Combinationmode)onpage 858 oftheParameterGuide.
CombinationandSequencer modes
Send
Master Effect 1, 2
EQ
EQ
Audio Track 1
EQ
Audio Track 16
EQ
Samplingmode
AUDIO INPUT (1, 2) USB B (1, 2) S/P DIF IN (L, R) Audio CD
Send
Master Effect 1, 2
Send
Master Effect 1, 2
Return
Sampling
EQ
Resampling
AudioInput
Oscillator1 Oscillator2
Filter1 Filter2
Driver1 Driver2
Amplifier1 Amplifier2 EQ
Send
Master Effect 1, 2
197
Using Effects
2. UseBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)tospecify thebustowhichtheoscillatoroutputwillbesent. Ifyouwanttheoscillatoroutputtobeinputto inserteffect1,chooseIFX1. L/R:Theoutputwillnotbesenttothetotaleffects. Afterpassingthroughthetotaleffect,thesoundwill besenttoAUDIOOUTPUT(MAIN)L/MONOand R. IFX112:TheoutputwillbesenttoinserteffectIFX 112. 14,1/23/4:TheoutputwillbesenttoAUDIO OUTPUT(INDIVIDUAL)14.Itwillnotbesentto theinserteffects,themastereffects,orthetotal effects. Off:TheoutputwillnotbesenttoAUDIO OUTPUT(MAIN)L/MONO,R,orto (INDIVIDUAL)14.Choosethisifyouwantthe signaltobeseriesconnectedtothemastereffectsat thesendlevelsspecifiedbySend1(MFX1)and Send2(MFX2). 3. OSCMFXSendspecifiesthesendlevelfromeach oscillatortothemastereffects. ThiscanbesetonlywhenBusSelect (IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)iseitherL/RorOff. IfBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)issettoIFX1 12,thesendleveltothemastereffectsissetby Send1andSend2(InsertFXpage)afterthesignal passesthroughtheinserteffects. 4. FXControlBus(AllOSCsto)sendsthe oscillator1and2outputtotheFXControlbus.Use thisifyouwanttheaudioinputtotheeffecttobe controlledbyadifferentsound. YoucanusethetwoFXControlbusestocontrol effectsfreely.
Insert effects
1. GototheInsertFXpage.
2. Choosetheeffecttypethatyouwanttousefor eachinserteffectIFX112. Whenyoupressthepopupbutton,alleffectswillbe displayed,organizedintoninecategories.Usethe pageslocatedatthelefttoselectacategory,and selectaneffectfromthatcategoryontheLCD screen. YoucanusetheCopyInsertEffectpagemenu commandtocopyeffectsettingsfromanother programetc.Also,youcanuseSwapInsertEffect toexchange(forexample)IFX1andIFX12. 3. PresstheOn/Offbuttontoturnontheinsert effect. Eachtimeyoupressthebutton,theinserteffectwill beswitchedon/off.WhenOff,theresultwillbethe sameaswhen000:NoEffectisselected.Theinput soundwillbeoutputwithoutchange.
198
4. MakeChainsettings. IftheChaincheckboxischecked,theinserteffect willbeconnectedinseries.Sincetheoutputofthe oscillatorisbeingsenttoIFX1instep2,making settingsasshowninthediagramstep6would connectallfiveinsertioneffectsIFX1IFX2 IFX3IFX4IFX5inseries,sothattheseeffects wouldbeinsertedintotheoutputoftheoscillator. 5. MakesettingsforPan(CC#8),BusSel.(Bus Select),Send1,Send2,RECBusandCtrlBusfor thesoundafterithaspassedthroughtheinsert effects. Ifyouvespecifiedachain,thesettingsthatfollow thelastIFXinthechainwillbevalid(exceptfor CtrlBus). Pan:SetsthepanoftheIFXoutput. BusSel.(BusSelect):Specifiestheoutput destination.NormallyyouwillsetthistoL/R.Ifyou wishtosendthesoundthathaspassedthroughthe inserteffectstoAUDIOOUTPUT(INDIVIDUAL) 14,select14,1/2,or3/4. Send1,Send2:Setsthesendlevelstothemaster effects.Forthisexample,setthisto127. CtrlBus:TheFXControlBusesletsyoucreate effectssidechains.Sidechainsletyoucontrolan effectwithoneaudiosignal(thesidechain),while theeffectprocessesacompletelydifferentaudio signal.Thisisconvenientforusewithvocoders, compressorsandlimiters,gates,etc.Formore information,seeFXControlBusesonpage 856of theParameterGuide. RECBus:Thesoundprocessedbytheinserteffect willbesenttotheRECbus.IntheP0Audio Input/Samplingpage,youcansettheSampling SetupSourceBustoaRECbus,andsamplethe signalthatissenttotheRECbus.Usethisifyou wanttosampleonlythesoundofanaudioinput sourcebeingprocessedbyaninserteffect(andnot samplethesoundoftheoscillatoroutput). Alternatively,thedirectsoundfromtheaudio inputscanbemixedwiththesoundprocessedbyan inserteffect,senttoaRECbus,andsampled. 6. GototheP8:InsertEffectInsertFXpage,andedit theparametersoftheinserteffectyouselected. PresstheIFX112tab,usethetabsattheleftto selectIFX112,andedittheeffectparameters. Effect1On/Off:Turnstheinserteffecton/off.This islinkedwiththeon/offsettingintheInsertFX page. P(EffectPreset):Selectsaneffectpreset.The KRONOSinternalmemorycontainseffect presetswhichareparametersettingsforeacheffect from001:St.DynaCompressorthrough185: Mt.BPMDly//Mt.BPMDly. Effectparametersyoueditaresavedaspartofeach program,buteffectpresetsallowyoutosave favoriteparametersettingsforeacheffect.Formore information,seeEffectPresetsonpage 207.
Wet/Dry
Effect On/Off
P (Effect preset)
Effect Parameters
Fordetailsontheindividualeffects,see: Dynamicsonpage 885oftheParameterGuide EQandFiltersonpage 898oftheParameter Guide Overdrive,Ampmodels,andMicmodelson page 914oftheParameterGuide Chorus,Flanger,andPhaseronpage 923ofthe ParameterGuide ModulationandPitchShiftonpage 936ofthe ParameterGuide Delayonpage 957oftheParameterGuide ReverbandEarlyReflectionsonpage 979ofthe ParameterGuide MonoMonoSerialonpage 984oftheParameter Guide Mono/MonoParallelonpage 1000ofthe ParameterGuide
Master effects
Theinputlevelstothemastereffectsaresetbythe Send1&2levels.IfSend1&2arezero,themaster effectswillnotbeheard.Send1goestoMFX1,and Send2goestoMFX2. 1. GototheProgramP9:Master/TotalEffect Routingpage.
2. InMFX1andMFX2,selectthetypeofeachmaster effect.
199
Using Effects
Theprocedureisthesameaswhenselectingan inserteffect. 3. PresstheOn/Offbuttontoturnonthemaster effect. Eachtimeyoupressthebutton,themastereffect willbeswitchedon/off.WhenOff,theoutputofthe mastereffectwillbemuted. 4. UseReturn1andReturn2toadjusttheoutput levelsofthemastereffects. Note:Foreacheffect,theWetvalueoftheWet/Dry parameteristheoutputlevelattheeffect.The returnvalueismultipliedwiththis(Return=127 willbex1.0)todeterminetheactualoutputlevelof themastereffect. 5. SelecttheMFX1andMFX2pages,andsetthe parametersforeachselectedeffectasdesired.
Theoutputfromthemastereffectsissenttothetotal effectsviatheReturn1andReturn2settingsonthe ProgramP9:Master/TotalEffectRoutingpage. Afterbeingprocessedthroughthetotaleffects,the signalgoestotheAUDIOOUTPUT(MAIN)L/MONO andRoutputs. 1. GototheProgramP9:Master/TotalEffect Routingpage. 2. ChoosethedesiredtotaleffectforTFX1andTFX2. Theprocedureisthesameaswhenselectingan inserteffect.(Seestep7) 3. PresstheOn/Offbuttontoturnthetotaleffectson. Thetotaleffectwillbeswitchedon/offeachtime youpressthebutton.IfthisisOff,theresultwillbe thesameasif000:NoEffectisselected.Theinput soundwillbeoutputwithoutchange. 4. AccesstheTFX1orTFX2pages,andeditthe parametersofeacheffecttoadjustthefinalsound asdesired. FordetailsontheUsingeffectsinProgramsstep 11.
Total Effects
IfyouuseBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)tochoose L/Rastheoscillatoroutput,orifyousetthepostIFX BusSelecttoL/R,thesignalwillgothroughthetotal effect.
200
TrackMixerpage,sothatthesignalssenttotheREC bus(es)canberecordedtothedisk.
Insert effects
Continuingfromtheabove: 1. GototheCombinationP8:InsertEffectInsertFX page.
SamplingSetupSourceBustoaRECbus,and samplethesignalthatissenttotheRECbus.Use thisifyouwanttosampleonlythesoundofan audioinputsourcebeingprocessedbyaninsert effect(andnotsamplethesoundoftheoscillator output).Youcanalsousethisifyouwanttosample onlyaspecifictimbre.Alternatively,thedirect soundfromtheaudioinputscanbemixedwiththe soundprocessedbyaninserteffect,senttoaREC bus,andsampled. Note:InSequencermode,youcanalsochooseaREC busastheRECSourceforeachtrackintheP0 AudioTrackMixerpage,sothatthesignalssentto theRECbus(es)canberecordedtothedisk. YoucanuseMIDItocontroldynamicmodulation (Dmod)foreacheffect,thepostIFXpan(CC#8), andSend1andSend2. Anasterisk*isshownattherightofCh01Ch16 forthechannelnumberoftracksroutedtoIFX.If youveroutedmultipletracksthathavediffering MIDIchannelsettings,thisspecifiesthechannelon whichtheywillbecontrolled.
2. Choosetheeffecttypethatyouwanttousefor eachinserteffectIFX112. Pressthepopupbutton,andchooseaneffectfrom theninecategories. 3. PresstheOn/Offbuttontoturnontheinsert effect. Eachtimeyoupressthebutton,theinserteffectwill beswitchedon/off.WhenOff,theresultwillbethe sameaswhen000:NoEffectisselected.Theinput soundwillbeoutputwithoutchange. 4. MakeChainsettings. IftheChaincheckboxischecked,theinserteffect willbeconnectedinseries. MakesettingsforPan(CC#8),BusSel.(Bus Select),Send1,Send2,RECBusandCtrl Busforthesoundafterithaspassedthroughthe inserteffects. Ifyouvespecifiedachain,thesettingsthatfollow thelastIFXinthechainwillbevalid(exceptfor CtrlBus). Pan:Setsthepan. BusSel.(BusSelect):Specifiestheoutput destination.NormallyyouwillsetthistoL/R.Ifyou wishtosendthesoundthathaspassedthroughthe inserteffectstoAUDIOOUTPUT(INDIVIDUAL) 14,select14,1/2,or3/4. Send1,Send2:Setsthesendlevelstothemaster effects.Forthisexample,setthisto127. CtrlBus:TheFXControlBusesletsyoucreate effectssidechains.Sidechainsletyoucontrolan effectwithoneaudiosignal(thesidechain),while theeffectprocessesacompletelydifferentaudio signal.Thisisconvenientforusewithvocoders, compressorsandlimiters,gates,etc.Formore information,seeFXControlBusesonpage 856of theParameterGuide. RECBus:TheIFXoutputwillgototheRECbus.In theP0AudioInput/Samplingpage,youcansetthe
201
Using Effects
Insert effects
1. GototheInsertFXpage.
2. UseBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)tospecifythebusto whicheachaudioinputwillbesent. Forexampleifyouwantthesignalfromadevice connectedtoAUDIOINPUT1tobeinputtoinsert effect1,settheINPUT1BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)to IFX1. 3. UseSend1andSend2tospecifythesendlevelof eachtimbretothemastereffects. ThiscanbesetonlyifBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)isset toL/RorOff. IfBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)issettoIFX112,thesend levelstothemastereffectsaresetbySend1and Send2(InsertFXpage)followingtheinserteffects. 4. SetPLAY/MUTEandSoloOn/Offasdesired.You canusethecontrolsurfacetomakethesesettings. 5. UsePantosetthepanningoftheaudioinput. Ifyoureinputtingastereoaudiosource,youwill normallysettheinputstoL000andR127 respectively. 6. UseLeveltoadjusttheleveloftheaudioinput. Normallyyouwillleavethisat127. 7. FXControlBussendstheoutputofthetimbreto anFXControlbus. TheFXControlBusesletsyoucreateeffects sidechains.Sidechainsletyoucontrolaneffect withoneaudiosignal(thesidechain),whilethe effectprocessesacompletelydifferentaudiosignal. Thisisconvenientforusewithvocoders, compressorsandlimiters,gates,etc.Formore information,seeFXControlBusesonpage 856of theParameterGuide. 8. RECBussendstheaudioinputtoaRECbus.
2. Choosetheinserteffectthatyouwanttouseon theaudioinput. Pressthepopupbutton,andchooseaneffectfrom theninecategories. 3. PresstheOn/Offbuttontoturnontheinsert effect. Eachtimeyoupressthebutton,theinserteffectwill beswitchedon/off.WhenOff,theresultwillbethe sameaswhen000:NoEffectisselected.Theinput soundwillbeoutputwithoutchange. 4. MakeChainsettings. IftheChaincheckboxischecked,theinserteffect willbeconnectedinseries. 5. MakesettingsforPan(CC#8),BusSel.(Bus Select),Send1,Send2,RECBusandCtrl Busforthesoundafterithaspassedthroughthe inserteffects. Ifeffectsarechained,thesettingsthatfollowthelast IFXarevalid(exceptforCtrlBus). Pan:Setsthepan. BusSel.(BusSelect):Specifiestheoutput destination.NormallyyouwillsetthistoL/R.Ifyou wishtosendthesoundthathaspassedthroughthe inserteffectstoAUDIOOUTPUT(INDIVIDUAL) 14,select14,1/2,or3/4. Send1,Send2:Setsthesendlevelstothemaster effects.Forthisexample,setthisto127. CtrlBus:Thesignalprocessedbytheinserteffect willbesenttotheFXControlbus.Usethisifyou wanttouseanothersoundtocontroltheaudio beinginputtoaneffect.YoucanusethetwoFX Controlbusestocontroleffectsfreely. Formoreinformation,seeFXControlBuseson page 856oftheParameterGuide.
202
RECBus:Thesoundprocessedbytheinserteffect willbesenttotheRECbus.IntheP0AudioInput page,youcansettheSamplingSetupSourceBusto aRECbus,andsamplethesignalthatissenttothe RECbus.NormallyyouwillsamplewithSource BussettoL/RandRECBusturnedOff.Howeverby usingtheRECbus,thedirectsoundoftheaudio inputandthesoundprocessedbytheinserteffect canbemixedtoaRECbusandsampled. 6. AccesstheIFX112pagesandedittheparameters ofeacheffect. Formoredetails,seestep6underUsingeffectsin Programs,beginningonpage 198. Fordetailsonapplyinganeffecttoanexternalaudio inputandsamplingtheresult,seeSamplingexternal audiothroughinserteffectsonpage 137.
203
Using Effects
5. UsePantosetthepanningoftheaudioinput.If youreinputtingastereoaudiosource,youwill normallysettheinputstoL000andR127 respectively. 6. UseLeveltoadjusttheleveloftheaudioinput. Normallyyouwillleavethisat127. 7. FXControlBussendstheoutputofthetimbreto anFXControlbus. Usethiswhenyouwanttheaudioinputtoaneffect tobecontrolledbyanothersound.TherearetwoFX Controlbuses,whichgivesyouagreatdealof freedomforcontrollingeffectsfreely. 8. RECBussendstheaudioinputtoaRECbus. IntheP0AudioInput/Samplingpage,youcan chooseaRECbusastheSamplingSetupSourceBus sothatthesignalsenttotheRECbuscanbe sampledorrecorded(onlyinSequencermode). NoisecanentertheKRONOSviathesebuses;see Avoidingextraneousnoiseonpage 91. Ifyouwanttosavetheeditedsettingsinthe KRONOS,youmustwritethem.UsetheGlobal modepagemenucommandWriteGlobalSetting todothis. 9. IfyouwanttousetheGlobalmodeInputsettings intheothermodes,checktheUseGlobal Settingoption. Ifyouwanttomakeindependentsettingsfor programs,combinations,andsongs,uncheckthis setting.
204
Dmod Example
Asanexample,letssetupdynamicmodulationto controlaneffectparameterinrealtime. 1. AsdescribedintheprocedureforUsingeffectsin Programsonpage 198,setIFX1to091:L/C/RBPM Delay.Verifythatyourehearingadelayeffect. 2. GototheProgramP8:InsertEffectIFX1page.
MIDI/Tempo Sync
MIDI/TempoSyncletsyousynchronizeeffectsLFOs anddelaytimestothesystemtempo.Formore information,seeTempoSynchronizationon page 855oftheParameterGuide.
205
Using Effects
Forthisexample,setDelayBaseNotetoe andTimes tox1sothattheeffectwillbeeasilyunderstandable. Thedelaytimewillrepeatatanintervalofa8thnote. 4. RotatetheTEMPOknob,andthedelaytimewill change. Whenyou(pushthejoystickawayfromyourselfand) presstheSWswitch,thefeedbacklevelwillrise,and thedelayswillbecomelonger. 5. WhenyouturnontheKARMAON/OFFswitch, KARMAwillbeginplaying.
SelectanydesiredKARMAGE.Whenyourotatethe TEMPOknob,thedelaytimewillchangein synchronizationwiththechangingtempoofthe KARMA. Dependingonthespecificdelayeffect,youmay hearanoiseifyouchangethetempowhilethedelay issounding.Thisisbecausethedelaysound becomesdiscontinuous,andisnotamalfunction. Forsomeeffects,youcansynchronizetheLFO frequencytothetempo.Settheeffectparameters MIDI/TEMPOSynctoOn,andBPMtoMIDI.For moreinformation,seeTempoSynchronizationon page 855oftheParameterGuide.
Common FX LFO
TwoCommonFXLFOsareavailableformodulation effects,suchaschoruses,filters,phasers,etc.IntheP8 CommonFXLFOpageofProgram,Combination, Sequencer,orSamplingmodes,youcanspecifythe resetconditionsandspeedofCommonFXLFO1and 2. Normally,theLFOsoftwoormoremodulationtype effectsusedsimultaneouslywillnothave synchronizedphaseevenifyousetthemtothe identicalFrequency,sincetheLFOsarebeing generatedindependently. HoweverifyouselectCommon1orCommon2forthe LFOTypeparameterofamodulationtypeeffect,the effectwillusenotitsownindividualLFObutthe CommonLFOyouspecifyhere.Thisallowsyoutouse asingleCommonFXLFOtosimultaneouslycontrol twoormoremodulationtypeeffectssuchasflanger, phaser,orautopanwiththesamephase.Sinceyoucan makeindependentsettingsforLFOwaveformand phaseoffsetforeacheffect,youarefreetocreate complexcombinationsofeffects.
Common FX LFO
LFO Type = Common1
Common FX LFO1
Frequency[Hz] Reset
Stereo Flanger
Waveforem = Triangle Phase Offset = 0 [deg]
Stereo Phaser
Waveforem = Sine Phase Offset = 0 [deg]
206
Effect Presets
Effect Presets
EffectPresetsletyoueasilystoreandrecallallofthe settingsforanindividualeffect.Youcanstoreupto16 userpresetsforeacheffecttype,inadditionto15re writablefactorypresets.
Effect On/Off P (Effect preset)
Thesamepresetsappearinallofthemodes(Program, Combination,Sequence,andSampling),andsetsof presetscanbesavedtoandloadedfromdisk. Notethateditstoeffectsparametersareautomatically storedwiththeProgram,Combination,orSongyou dontneedtostorethemasanEffectPreset.Presetsjust makeiteasiertoreuseyourfavoritesettings. Forinstance,youcansaveanEffectPresetwhile workingonaparticularProgram,andthenlateruse thesameEffectPresetinadifferentProgram,Combi, orSong. Note:Programs,Combinations,andSongssavethe effectsparametersettings,buttheydontsavethe numberoftheselectedEffectPreset.Ifyouselectan EffectPreset,andthensavetheProgram,theEffect Presetsettingwillrevertto.
207
Using Effects
208
Using KARMA
Overview - What is KARMA?
KARMAstandsforKayAlgorithmicRealtimeMusic Architecture,namedafteritsinventor,StephenKay. KARMAgeneratesMIDIdata,usingmanydifferent algorithmsseamlesslyintegratedtoprovidea powerfulmusicgenerationengine.Basedonthe notesandchordsyouplay,KARMAcreatesphrases andpatternsinrealtime,generatingnotjustnotesbut MIDIcontroldataaswell.TheKARMAarchitecture allowsthevariousalgorithmstobereconfiguredand variedinrealtime,asyouplaythem. Forexample,youcancreatethedynamictempo changesthatoccurwithinaharpglissando,the synchronizedchangesinvolumeandtonethatoccur aspartofabrassphrase,therandomnesswithina drumphrase,thecrescendoanddiminuendoofafill in,changesinphraseortoneofatechnogroove, complexinterweavingphrasesthatwouldbe impossibletoplayonakeyboard,guitarstrumming andfingerpickingsimulationswithnaturalsounding changes,andbackinggroovesthatfollowyour keyboardplayinginrealtimeallunderyourcontrol. KARMAletsyouproducephrasesandpatternsatafar moremusicalandflexiblelevelthanconventional arpeggiatorsorpatternplaybackfunctions. OntheKRONOS,KARMAisdesignedtoworkinclose conjunctionwiththenumerousotherfunctions,giving youunbelievableperformancepoweronstageorinthe studio.
KARMA modules
AKARMAmoduleusesaGE(GeneratedEffect)to createaphraseorpattern. InProgrammode,onlyoneKARMAmodule(A)is used.InCombinationorSequencermodes,four KARMAmodules(A,B,C,D)canbeused.For example,eachmodulemightbeusedtogenerate phrasesandpatternsforaseparatesound,suchas drums,bass,guitar,andpiano. InProgrammode,theKARMAmoduletransmits andreceivesallMIDIdataontheGlobalMIDI channelspecifiedbyMIDIChannel. InCombinationandSequencermodes,theMIDI datafromeachKARMAmoduleistransmittedand receivedontheInputChannelandOutput Channelspecifiedforeachmodule.
Basedonnotedatafromthekeyboard,theGEuses variousinternalparameterstocontrolhowthenote datawillbedeveloped,andhowrhythm,chord structure,andvelocityetc.willbecontrolledto generateaphraseorpattern.MIDIcontrolchangesand pitchbenddatacanalsobegeneratedin synchronizationwiththephraseorpattern.Asa capabilityuniquetotheKRONOS,KARMAcan generateMIDIexclusivemessagestocontrolwave sequencing,whichswitchesbetweenmultisamplesetc. ofaprograminrealtime.Thisletsyoucreatephrases andpatternsinwhichthetonecolorandnotepitches changeindependently. TheKRONOSprovidesalargenumberofGEsthatcan beusedforavarietyofinstruments,performance techniques,andmusicalstyles.
GE (Generated Effect)
ThephrasesandpatternsproducedbyaKARMA modulearecreatedbyaGE(GeneratedEffect).
MIDI IN
KARMA function
GE
(Generated Effect)
MIDI OUT
Phrases or patterns
Tone generator
209
Using KARMA
....
32: Repeat: Repetitions:
Phrases or patterns
GE RTP, Perf RTP (Real-Time Parameters)
GE Parm 01 (Rhythm: Swing) Module Parm (Env1 Trigger)
Dynamic MIDI
KARMA module A
x xx x
GE : #0010: Drums1
GE Real-Time parameters: 01 ... 32
Output Ch = 02ch
Drums Pattern
KARMA module B
Input Ch = 01ch
Output Ch = 03ch
Bass Riff
KARMA module C
Input Ch = 01ch
Output Ch = 04ch
E.Guitar Riff
KARMA module D
Input Ch = 01ch
Output Ch = 05ch
E.Piano Phrase
Dynamic MIDI
RTC Model
AllofthepresetGEshaveaninternallyspecifiedRTC Model.TheRTCModelisacertainstandardizationof themorethantwohundredinternalparametersofthe
210
youreswitchingthroughvariousGEsthathavethe sameRTCModel,youwillbeabletocontrolthemina uniformmannerandmakevalidcomparisonsbetween them,sincetheirdefaultstatewillbethesame.Of course,youarefreetoedittheGErealtimeparameters. Inthepreloadedprogramsandcombinations,the KARMACONTROLSslidersandswitchesare assignedinauniformmannerdependingontheRTC ModelfortheGEusedbyeachmodule.Forexampleif aKARMAmoduleusedbyaprogramorcombination usesaGEoftheDrum/Percussioncategory,the KARMAREALTIMECONTROLSslidersandKARMA SWITCHESwillbeassignedsothatSlider1controls theswingandSlider2controlsthepatternvariation. Ofcourse,youarealsofreetoedittheREALTIME CONTROLSassignments. EachGEisassignedoneofthefollowingRTCModels. DP1Drum/Perc BL1Bass/Lead DM1DrumMelodic GV1GatedVel/Pattern GC1GatedCCs CL1Comp/Lead WS1WaveSeq1 WS2WaveSeq2 EG1DualEnvGen LF1DualLFOs MR1MelodicRepeat MB1MelRpt/Bend RB1RealTimeBend CustomafewGEsmayrequirespecialRTC setups,outsideofthenormalRTCModels.Inthis case,theassignmentofRTCControlsisleftupto thesounddesignerofthespecificProgramor Combination. Anexampleis2028:VJSMotion.IfyouloadthisGE, itclearsallRTCModelassignments(whentheGE LoadOptionsaresettothedefaultsetting).With suchGEs,itsgenerallybesttocopytheModule fromanexistingProgram,sothatyouhavean exampleofhowtomapthecontrols.
Dynamic MIDI
DynamicMIDIisafunctionthatusestheKRONOS controllersorMIDIcontrolmessagestocontrolspecific functionsofKARMA. Forexample,thisenablesyoutousethejoystickto playstrummedguitarchords,useafootswitchto controltheRun/MutestatusofaKARMAmodule,or usethedamperpedaltolatchaKARMAmodule. Youllbeabletocontroltheminrealtimewhileyou play.
KARMA CONTROLS
ThesearefrontpanelcontrolsusedtocontrolKARMA. Thesettingsofthesecontrolscanbesaved independentlyforeachprogram,combination,and song.
ON/OFF switch
ThisswitchesKARMAon/off.
LATCH switch
Ifthisison,thephraseorpatternwillcontinueplaying evenafteryouremoveyourhandfromthekeyboard.
211
Using KARMA
SCENE switches
Theseswitchesletyoustorethesettingsofsliders18 andswitches18aseightdifferentscenes(SCENE1 8).InCombinationorSequencermodes,scenescan storeseparatesettingsforeachmodule,andyoucan usetheMODULECONTROLswitchandtheScene Matrixfunctiontocontrolthis. Formoreinformation,see75d:ModuleControl SceneMatrixonpage 479oftheParameterGuide.
212
Asyoustepthroughtheprograms,youllfindsome programsforwhichtheKARMAON/OFFswitchLED islit. Pressakeyoronscreenpad(on theP1:Basic/VectorPadspage), andKARMAwillbeginplaying. InotherProgramsaswell,you canpresstheON/OFFswitch (LEDlit)toturnKARMAon. Note:IftheDrumTrackison, andtheTriggerModeissetto WaitKBDTrig,theDrumTrack willstartplaying simultaneously.
213
Using KARMA
Modifying the phrase or pattern generated by the KARMA module: KARMA CONTROLS 18 sliders, KARMA SWITCHES 18, SCENE 18 switches
Parametersusefulforcontrollingthephraseorpattern arealreadyassignedtotheKARMACONTROLS18 sliders,KARMASWITCHES18,andSCENE18 switches.Youcanoperatethesecontrollerstocreatea widerangeofchangesinthephraseorpatternthats playing. 1. GototheProgramP0:PlayKARMAGEpage.
Thelowerpartofthedisplayshowsthenamesofthe slidersandswitchesthatareassignedinthisprogram. Inthepreloadedprograms,theKARMACONTROLS slidersandKARMASWITCHEShavealreadybeen assigned. 2. OperatethefrontpanelKARMACONTROLS18 slidersandKARMASWITCHES18. Thepatternorphrasewillchangeaccordingly. Youcanalsoturntheswitcheson/offbypressingthem inthedisplay.Youcanoperatetheslidersbyselecting themandthenusingtheVALUEcontrollertoadjust thevalue.
Thesavedvalueisshownatthelowerrightofeach sliderorswitch.
Making the performance continue after you remove your hand from the keyboard: the LATCH switch
YoucanmakeKARMAcontinueplayingevenafter youremoveyourhandfromthekeyboard. LEDlit:Latchison.Theperformancewillcontinue evenafteryouremoveyourhandfromthekeyboard. LEDdark:Latchisoff.Theperformancewillstop whenyouremoveyourhandfromthekeyboard.
214
3. UsethefrontpanelSCENE18switchestochoose ascene. Theslidersandswitcheswillchangetothesettings thatweresavedinthesceneyouchose. Eachoftheeightscenescontainsthevaluesofsliders 18andswitches18.BypressingaSCENE18switch tochooseascene,youcaninstantlyrecallsettingsfor theeightslidersandeightswitches. Evenifyouswitchscenes,thechangesyoumakeusing sliders18andswitches18areremembereduntilyou selectanotherprogram.Whenyouwriteaprogram, yoursliderandswitchsettingsaresavedinthe respectivescene18.
1. UsetheREALTIMECONTROLknobstoeditthe soundoftheprogram,andusetheslidersand switchestomodifythesavedsettingsineach scene. 2. HolddowntheRESETCONTROLSswitch,and presstheCONTROLASSIGNRT KNOBS/KARMAswitch. TheRealTimeControlsknobsettingswillbereset(to thecentervalueof064),andthesettingsofallscenes willreturntotheirstoredsettings. IfyouveusedtheRESETCONTROLSswitchto resettheRealTimeControlsknobsandtoreturnall scenestotheirsavedsetting,thereisnowayto returntotheeditedsettingsofstep1.
2. Inthedisplay,presstheGESelectpopupbutton toopentheGESelectmenu.
215
Using KARMA
Whenyouplaythekeyboard,thenameofthechord detectedbyeachKARMAmodulewillappearinthe ChordfieldofKARMAModuleInfo. Asyoustepthroughthecombinations,youwillnotice thattheKARMAON/OFFswitchLEDislitforsome combinations. Withthesecombinations,KARMAwillbeginplaying whenyouplaythekeyboard. Note:IftheDrumTrackison,andTriggerModeisset toWaitKBDTrig,theDrumTrackwillstartplaying simultaneously. Evenforothercombinations,youcanpressthe KARMAON/OFFswitch(LEDlit)toturnonKARMA. Thedisplayedchordnameisthechordthatisdetected bythemoduleselectedbythefrontpanelMODULE CONTROLswitch.Thewayinwhichchordsare detectedwilldependonthesettingsoftheKARMA module.
216
4. UsethefrontpanelSCENE18switchestochoose ascene. ThischangesthescenefortheKARMAmodule(s) selectedbytheMODULECONTROLswitch. IfMODULECONTROLissettoMASTER,each KARMAmodulewillchangetothescenethatissaved asthemastersetting. Eachoftheeightscenescontainsthevaluesofsliders 18andswitches18.BypressingaSCENE18switch tochooseascene,youcaninstantlyrecallsettingsfor theeightslidersandeightswitches. Evenifyouswitchscenes,thechangesyoumakeusing sliders18andswitches18areremembereduntilyou selectanothercombination.Whenyouwritea combination,yoursliderandswitchsettingsaresaved intherespectivescene18.
Name display for the KARMA CONTROLS 18 sliders and KARMA SWITCHES 18
JustasintheequivalentpageofProgrammode,the CombinationP0:PlayKARMAGEpagedisplaysthe slidersandswitchesassignedtothecombination,and theirnames. Inthecombination,thenameshowninsquarebrackets [ ]isthecategoryoftheprogramselectedforthe timbrebeingcontrolledbytheKARMACONTROLS 18slidersandKARMASWITCHES.Thistellsyouthe timbrewhosephraseisbeingcontrolledbythe KARMACONTROLS18slidersandKARMA SWITCHES. Ifmultipletimbresarebeingcontrolled simultaneously,thiswillindicate[MLTI].
Thelowerpartofthedisplayshowsthenamesofthe slidersandswitchesthatareassignedinthis combination. Inthepreloadedcombinations,theKARMA CONTROLSslidersandKARMASWITCHEShave alreadybeenassigned. 2. UsethefrontpanelMODULECONTROLswitch toselectthemodulethatyouwanttocontrol. IfyouselectMASTER,youwillbecontrollingallfour KARMAmodulessimultaneously. IfyouselectAD,youwillbecontrollingthe correspondingKARMAmodule. 3. OperatethefrontpanelKARMACONTROLS18 slidersandKARMASWITCHES18. Theslidersandswitcheswillcontrolthepatternor phrasegeneratedbytheKARMAmoduleselectedby theMODULECONTROLswitch.Ifyouveselected MASTER,youllbeabletocontrolthemoduleon/off statusandvarythepatternsandphrasesgeneratedby alloftheKARMAmodules. Youcanalsooperatetheslidersandswitchesinthe displayorusingtheVALUEcontroller,justasin Programmode. TheKARMAmoduleandthetypeorvalueofthe parameterbeingcontrolledbytheslidersandswitches isshownintheKARMAModuleInfoKARMA Valuefield.ThisletsyouseetheKARMAmoduleand parametersthatarebeingaffectedbyyourslideror switchoperations.
KARMA module
Value Parameter
217
Using KARMA
IfyouturnSoloOn(checked),onlythatKARMA modulewillsound.Thisisusefulwhenyouare selectingaGE,orwhenyouwanttoauditionthe phrasethatamoduleisgenerating. ModuleswhoseSoloisOn(checked)willsound evenifRunisOff(unchecked). TheSolosettingisclearedwhenyouswitchto anothercombination.Itisnotsavedwhenyouwrite thecombination. KARMAmoduleAwillsound.
KARMAmoduleBwillsound.
KARMAmodulesAandBwillsound.
218
Editing KARMA
Editing KARMA
Thissectionexplainshowtomakesettingsfor KARMAineachmode.Fordetailsonhowtoperform usingKARMA,seePerformingwithKARMAon page 213.
Selecting a GE
HereshowtoselecttheGEusedbytheKARMA module. 1. GototheProgramP7:KARMAGESetup/Key Zonespage.
219
Using KARMA
2. Specifythecopysourcemode,bank,andnumber. IfyouwanttocopytheGErealtimeparametersettings andscenesettingsfromthecopysourceprogram, choosetheGERTPControlSettings&Scenesoption (checked). Ifyouwanttocopyperformancerealtimeparameters settingsandfrontpanelsettingsfromthecopysource program,choosethePerf.RTP&PanelSettings option(checked). Ifyoutocopythepadsettingsfromthecopysource program,choosethePadsoption(checked). 3. PressOKtoexecutethecopy,orpressCancelif youdecidetocancel.
CC Offset
Usethisifyouwanttocontroltheeffectsorthesound oftheprogramwhileKARMAison.Forexample,you mightusethistodecreasethebrightnessofthesound orraisetheresonanceofthesoundinconjunctionwith thephrasethatsbeinggenerated.Alternatively,you mightusethistocontroleffects,forexampleby turningonadelayeffectinconjunctionwitha generatedphrase. UseCCNumbertospecifytheMIDIcontrolchange number.ChooseoneoftheCCnumbersinthe70s whichcontrolthesound,oranAMSorDmodsource (see72c:CCOffsetonpage 111oftheParameter Guide). Intheexampleshownintheprecedingpage,CC#74 andCC#71arecontrollingfiltercutoffandresonance level.
220
Editing KARMA
GE Real-Time Parameters
HereyoucanedittheGErealtimeparametersthatare selectedbytheKARMAmodule.Youcanalsoassign GErealtimeparameterstotheKARMACONTROLS slidersandKARMASWITCHESsothatyoucanuse themtocontrolthephraseorpatterninrealtimewhile youperform. Note:IfyouusetheAutoRTCSetupfunctionofLoad GEOptions,thestandardsliderandKARMA SWITCHassignmentsfortheRTCModelofthatGE willautomaticallybemadewhenyouselectaGE.(See SelectingaGEonpage 219) 1. GototheProgramP7:KARMAGERealTime Parameterspage.
Control Transpose
Thisletsyoutransposethenotedatabeinginputtothe KARMAmoduleinsemitonesteps.Thiswillcontrol thepitchofthephraseorpatterngeneratedbythe KARMAmodule.Forexampleifyouwanttolowera bassphrasebyoneoctave,setthisto12.
UseGERTCSelecttoswitchthesetofGErealtime parametersyouwanttosee.
ThesebuttonsdisplayGErealtimeparameters116or 1732. ThenumberandtypeofGErealtimeparametersyou caneditherewilldifferdependingontheselectedGE. (Therewillbeamaximumof32.)IneachGE,the parametersmostusefulforcontrollingthephraseor patternareprovidedaspresets. Note:RTCModel:EveryGEcontainsaninternal settingthatindicatesitsRTCModel.Basedonthetype orpurposeoftheGE,theRTCModelprovidesa certaindegreeofstandardizationtotheover200 internalparametersoftheGE.Bydefault,GEsthat havethesameRTCModelwillbepresetwiththesame GErealtimeparameters. 2. UseVALUE,MIN,andMAXtospecifythe value,minimumvalue,andmaximumvalueof eachGErealtimeparameter. WhenyouselectaGE,thedefaultparametervalues thatarepresetforthatGEwillbeassigned.
Note Trigger
Thisspecifiesthetriggeringconditionsforthephrase orpatterngeneratedbytheGE.Trytheseoutandsee howtheydiffer. Any:Triggeringwilloccureachtimeyouplayakey, andthephraseorpatternwillplayfromthebeginning. AKR:Triggeringwilloccuronlythefirsttimeyouplay akeyafterhavingreleasedallnotesonthekeyboard.
221
Using KARMA
Forthisexample,setMin,Max,andValueto 24,+0,and12respectively. 4. UseAssigntoassignthedesiredcontroller. Forthisexample,wellassignSlider1. 5. UsePolaritytospecifythepolarityofcontrol. Forthisexample,specify+. WhenyousetCONTROLASSIGNtoRT KNOBS/KARMAandoperateslider1,theTranspose settingwillchangeinsemitonestepsoverarangeof 24to+0,with12asthecentervalue. Note:IfyousetParametertoTransposeOctave,the changewilloccurinstepsofoneoctaveoverarangeof 24to+0,with12asthecentervalue. IfyouselectTransposeOctave/5th,thechangewill occurinalternatingstepsofanoctaveorafifth,overa rangeof24to+0with12asthecentervalue.For exampleifthisparameterisattheMinsettingandaC3 noteissounding,movingslider1from000toward127 willcauseapitchchangeofC3G3C4G4 C5.
Asanexample,wellshowhowyoucanuseaKARMA CONTROLSslidertocontroltheKARMAmodule parameterTranspose. 2. UseGroupandParametertoselectthe parameteryouwanttocontrol. Forthisexample,setGroup:Mix,andParameter: Transpose.TurnAon(checked)sothatthesliderwill controlKARMAmodule[A]. 3. Specifytherangeandvaluethatyouwantto control. Thesettingoftheparameterwillbeassignedby default(12inthisexample),asdescribedunder7 3b:ModuleParameterControlonpage 113ofthe ParameterGuide.
222
Editing KARMA
1. GototheGlobalBasicpage. 2. UnderLoadKARMAsettingwhenchanging,set theProgramscheckboxasdesired. ChecktheboxtoloadtheindividualPrograms KARMAsettings. UnchecktheboxtokeepKARMAsettingsthesame, evenwhenchangingPrograms. Formoreinformation,seeLoadKARMAsettings whenchangingonpage 755oftheParameterGuide.
Selecting a GE
HereshowtoselecttheGEusedbyeachKARMA module.(SeeEditingKARMAinProgrammodeon page 219) 1. GototheCombinationP7:KARMAGE Setup/KeyZonespage. Note:Alternatively,youcanmakethesesettingsinthe CombinationP0:PlayKARMAGEpage. 2. PressLoadGEOptionstoopenthedialogbox, turnAutoRTCSetupon,andchecktheUserRTC ModelandResetScenesoptions. LoadGEOptionsspecifieswhetherthesettingsof theKARMACONTROLSslidersandKARMA SWITCHESwillbeautomaticallyset,initialized,or maintainedwhenyouselectaGE. Forthisexample,wellchoosetosetthesliderand switchfunctionsforKARMAmodulesA,B,C,andD tothestandardsettingsfortheRTCModelofthe selectedGE,sothatyoullbeabletocontrolthephrase orpatternimmediately. 3. UseGESelecttoselecttheGEusedbythe KARMAmodule. UseTempotosetthetempoofthepatternorphrase generatedbytheGE. UseKARMAT.Sigtospecifythetimesignatureof thepatternorphrasegeneratedbytheGE.Ifyouselect GE/TSthetimesignaturespecifiedbytheGEforeach modulewillbeused;withanyothersetting,thetime signatureofallGEswillchangetemporarily.
223
Using KARMA
Whenyoustrikepads14,KARMAmodulesADwill eachtriggeradifferentGEwhichwillplayphrasesor patternsontimbres25. 6. ForKARMAmoduleA,turnGchAlsoon (checked). 7. TurnoffKARMA. Whenyouplaythekeyboard,timbre1willsound. Whenyoustrikepads14,timbres25willsound. 8. TurnonKARMA. Whenyouplaythekeyboard,timbre1willsound. KARMAmoduleAforwhichyouturnedGchAlso on(checked)willtriggeritsGEandplayaphraseor patternontimbre2. Whenyoustrikepads14,KARMAmodulesADwill triggertheirrespectiveGEsandplayphrasesor patternsontimbres25.
Setting example 2
ThisexampleshowshowtheTimbreThruoption works. Selectapianoprogramfortimbre1,abassprogramfor timbre2,andadrumprogramfortimbre3. Wellplaytimbre1manuallyfromthekeyboard. KARMAmoduleAwillbeusedtoplayabassphrase ontimbre2,andKARMAmoduleBtoplayadrum phraseonKARMAmoduleB.(Makesurethatthe globalMIDIchannelis01.) 1. SettheMIDIChannelfortimbres1,2,and3.
Setting example 1
ThisexampleshowshowtheGchAlsooption works. 1. SetMIDIChannelforthefollowingtimbresas follows. Timbre1:Gch Timbre2:2ch Timbre3:3ch Timbre4:4ch Timbre5:5ch 2. SettheMIDIchannelsforthepadsasfollows. Pad1:MIDIchannel=2ch Pad2:MIDIchannel=3ch Pad3:MIDIchannel=4ch Pad4:MIDIchannel=5ch 3. ForeachKARMAmodule,setInputChannel andOutputChannelasfollows. KARMAmoduleA:InputCh=2ch,OutCh=2ch KARMAmoduleB:InputCh=3ch,OutCh=3ch KARMAmoduleC:InputCh=4ch,OutCh=4ch KARMAmoduleD:InputCh=5ch,OutCh=5ch 4. TurnKARMAoff. Whenyouplaythekeyboard,timbre1willsound. Whenyoustrikepads14,timbres25willsound. 5. TurnKARMAon. Whenyouplaythekeyboard,timbre1willsound. Forthisexample,settimbre1to01,timbre2to02,and timbre3to03.Sinceeachtimbreissettoaseparate channel,theKARMAmodulesettothecorresponding channelwillplayonlythattimbre.
224
Editing KARMA
2. SettheInputChannelandOutputChannelof eachKARMAmoduleasfollows.
GE Real-Time Parameters
HereshowtoedittheparametersoftheGEselected foreachKARMAmodule. 3. ForKARMAmodulesAandB,turnRunon (checked),andsetGESelecttoGE.(SeeRun andSolosettingsonpage 223.) KARMAmoduleA:selectabassphraseastheGE KARMAmoduleB:selectadrumphraseastheGE WhenKARMAison,yourplayingonthekeyboard willsoundapianoontimbre1,andwill simultaneouslybesenttoKARMAmodulesAandB. ThebassphrasegeneratedbymoduleAissenton MIDIchannel02toplaytimbre2. ThedrumphrasegeneratedbymoduleBissenton MIDIchannel03toplaytimbre3. 4. UseTimbreThrutospecifywhatwillsound whenKARMAisoff. WhenKARMAisoff,playingthekeyboardwill normallysoundonlythetimbresthatmatchtheglobal MIDIchannel(Ch01). Inthisexample,thiswillbethepianosoundproduced bytimbre1(Ch01). IfTimbreThruison(checked),youllbeabletoplay timbresthatdifferfromtheglobalchannelwhen KARMAisoff. ForKARMAmoduleA,turnTimbreThruon (checked).WhenKARMAisoff,playingthekeyboard willsoundthepianooftimbre1(Ch01)aswellasthe bassoftimbre2(Ch02). 2. Inthetabsattheleft,selectMasterA. 3. SetMIN,MAX,VALUE,ASSIGN,and POLARITY. IntheMastertabs,specifyingASSIGNletsyouedit theMIN,MAX,VALUE,andPolaritysettings. 4. MakesettingsinthesamewayforMasterB,C, andD. ThesettingsyoumakehereareusedwhenMODULE CONTROLissettoMASTER. MasterletsyoucontrolanyparametersofmodulesA, B,C,orD.Youcanalsouseasinglecontrollerto simultaneouslycontrolmultipleparametersin differentmodules;forexample,youmightuseSlider1 tocontroltheRhythm:Swing%parameterof modulesA,B,C,andD. 1. GototheCombinationP7:KARMAGEReal TimeParameterspage.
225
Using KARMA
MODULE CONTROL
KARMA CONTROLS
MODULE CONTROL
MASTER
KARMA SWITCHES
A B C D
KARMA CONTROLS
WiththeappropriateASSIGNsettings,aGE realtimeparameterof(forexample)moduleAcan controlledindependentlybyMasterandModuleA. Forexampleyoucanmakesettingssothatthe SwingparameterofadrumGEonmoduleAis controlledinMASTERbyslider1overarangeof0 50%,andinMODULEAbyslider1overarangeof 50100%. Master:050% ModuleA:50100% Inthiscase,ifyouswitchMODULECONTROL betweenMASTERandAwhileusingslider1to controltheparameter,theparameterwilloperatein itslastcontrolledstate.IfyousetSwingto0%in MASTER,andthenswitchtomoduleA,Swingwill remainat0%aslongasyoudontmoveslider1. HoweverSwingwillchangeonceyoumoveslider1 tocontroltheparameterintherangeof50100%. 1. SetMODULECONTROLtoMASTER,andset slider1totheminimumposition.Swing operatesat0%. 2. ChangeMODULECONTROLtoA.Swing operatesat0%. 3. Moveslider1tothemaximumposition. Swingoperatesat100%. Theinternalsettingsareautomaticallycontrolledso thatthephrasebeinggenerateddoesnotchange abruptly.IntheaboveexamplewhenyouuseMASTER tosetSwingto0%andthenswitchtomoduleA,the displayedindicationis50100%buttheparameteris actuallyoperatingatavalueof0%.Inthisway,you needtobeawarethatthedisplayedindicationmaynot matchtheactualresult.
Inthesamewayasforaprogram,setGroup, Parameter,Min,Max,Value,Assign,and Polarity.Inacombination,youcanusethefour KARMAmodulesA,B,C,andD. Turnon(check)theA,B,C,and/orDboxesto selectthemodule(s)youwanttocontrol. Intheaboveexample,KARMAREALTIME CONTROLSswitches1,2,3,and4arecontrollingthe Run/MutesettingofmodulesA,B,C,andD respectively.
Naming the KARMA RTC sliders 18 and switches 18 for MASTER and module AD
Inthesamewayasforaprogram,youcanselectnames fortheKARMACONTROLSslidersandKARMA SWITCHES.Thesesettingsaresavedaspartofthe combination.
226
Editing KARMA
227
Using KARMA
228
Specifythecopysourceprogram.Turnon(check)GE RTPControlSettings&ScenesandPerf.RTP& PanelSettings.PressOKtoexecutethecopy. ThesettingsoftheKARMAREALTIMECONTROLS sliders,switches,andsceneswillbecopiedtoModule ControlA. 2. PresstheKARMAON/OFFswitchtoturnon KARMA. 2. GototheSequencerP7:KARMAGESetup/Key Zonespage. MakeMIDII/OsettingsfortheKARMAmodulesso thatKARMAmoduleAwillplaytrack1(SeeEditing KARMAinCombinationmodeonpage 223). ForKARMAmoduleA,settheInputChanneland OutputChannelto01and01respectively.Setting themtoTchandTchwillhavethesameresult.For moreinformation,see71c:MIDII/Oonpage 471of theParameterGuide. Whenyouplaythekeyboard,KARMAwillgeneratea drumpatternjustasitdidfortheprogram. 3. UsetheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchandthe START/STOPswitchtorealtimerecordontrack1. (SeeRecordingMIDIinrealtimeonpage 78) YoucanoperatetheKARMAREALTIMECONTROLS sliders/switchesandtheSCENEswitcheswhile recording,andthechangesinthepatternorsoundthat occurwillberecordedjustastheyoccur. ThesongtempoandKARMAtempocannotbeset independently. 4. IfyouwanttheKARMAmoduletobein synchronizationwiththesequencerduring recording,checktheQuantizeTriggeroption. AsspecifiedbytheMIDItracksMIDIChannelsetting andtheKARMAmodulesOutChannelsetting,the MIDItrackplayedbytheKARMAmoduleis displayedinred. 3. SelectaGEforKARMAmoduleA,andsetits parameters. YouarefreetoselectaGEandmakesettingsas desired,butinthisexamplewellusetheCopy KARMAModulepagemenucommandtocopyallof theprogramsKARMAsettings.Thisisaneasywayto setupandrecordthephraseorpatternthatthe programsKARMAisgenerating. 1. Usethepagemenubuttonlocatedinthetopleftof thescreentodisplaythepagemenu,andchoose CopyKARMAModule. Thetriggertimingwillbesynchronizedtosixteenth noteintervalsofthesequencerbeat.(See SynchronizingKARMAonpage 231) 5. YoucansynchronizetheKARMAmoduletothe starttimingofthesequencer. GototheSequencerP7:KARMAModuleParameters Triggerpage.
229
Using KARMA
SetthetracksyourenotrecordingtoeitherPlayor Mute.Howeverifyourerecordingtheperformanceof acombination,andnoneofthetrackshavealready beenrecorded,itsoktoleavealltrackssettoREC. 6. PresstheREC/WRITEswitchandthenthe START/STOPswitchtobeginrealtimerecording. (SeeRecordingMIDIinrealtimeonpage 78) Whileyourecord,youcanoperatetheKARMA REALTIMECONTROLSsliders,KARMASWITCHES, andSCENEswitchestovarythepatternorsound.The changesyoucreatewillberecordedjustasyoumake them.
Selectthecopysourcecombination.TurnIFXAll, MFXs,TFXs,andMultiRECStandbyon(checked). PressOKtoexecutethecopy. 3. Thesettingsofthecombinationstimbres116 willbecopiedtoMIDItracks116.Effectsettings, KARMAsettings,andallothercommon parameterswillbecopiedtothetracksofthesong. 4. ChooseTrackSelect.SelectatrackwhoseMIDI channelmatchestheglobalMIDIchannel. PresstheON/OFFswitchtoturnKARMAon,andplay thekeyboardand/orpadstomakeKARMAbegin playinginthesamewayasitdidinthecopysource combination.(Dependingonthetrackyouselectedin TrackSource,theperformancemaynotbethesame aswhenyouwereplayingthecombination.Besureto selectthetrackwhoseMIDIchannelisthesameasthe globalMIDIchannel.) 5. Performmultitrackrecording.Makepreparations forrecordingasdescribedinMulti(multitrack recording)onpage 80.TurnMultiRECon (checked).
ThesongtempoandKARMAtempocannotbeset independently.
230
Synchronizing KARMA
Synchronization basics
231
Using KARMA
Slave operation
ConnecttheMIDIOUTofyourexternalMIDIdevice totheKRONOSMIDIIN. SetMIDIClock(Global11a:MIDISetup)toExternal MIDI.TheKRONOSwillsynchronizetoMIDIrealtime clockandrealtimecommandmessagesitreceivesfrom theconnectedMIDIdevice. Note:IftheKRONOSissettoMIDIClock=Auto,it willalsosynchronizetotheexternalMIDIdeviceinthe samewayifMIDIrealtimeclockmessagesarebeing receivedfromtheexternaldevice. frontpanelSTART/STOPswitch.KARMAalsowillbe controlledinthesamewayaswhenyouoperatethe frontpanelSTART/STOPswitch.(See Synchronizationwithsongstart/stop) WhentheKRONOSreceivesaSongPositionPointer message,itwillchangethelocationofthesongjustas whenyouchangethesonglocationbyoperatingthe KRONOS,andKARMAwillbecontrolledinthesame wayaswhenyouchangethelocationontheKRONOS. InProgramandCombinationmodes,SongStart, Continue,andStopmessagesthattheKRONOS receiveswillcontrolKARMA. WhileKARMAisrunning,SongStart,Continue, andSongPositionPointermessagesreceivedbythe KRONOSwillresetKARMA,causingthegenerated phrasesorpatternstostartfromthebeginning. IfaSongStopmessageisreceived,KARMAwill stop.
Master operation
ConnecttheKRONOSMIDIOUTtotheMIDIINof yourexternalMIDIdevice. SetMIDIClock(Global11a)toInternal.The connectedexternalMIDIdevicewillsynchronizetothe MIDIrealtimeclockandrealtimecommandsit receives. Note:ThesameappliesifMIDIClock=AutoandMIDI realtimeclockmessagesarebeingtransmitted.For moreinformation,seeMIDIClock(MIDIClock Source)onpage 769oftheParameterGuide. theMIDIsystemrealtimemessageStarttobe sentatthetriggertiming. AftertheStartmessagehasbeensent,turningoff KARMAON/OFFwillsendtheMIDIsystem realtimeStopcommand.
232
Contents
Factory Drum Track patterns User Drum Track patterns
ThereareoptionstocontrolhowtheDrumTrack patternstarts,suchasstartingimmediatelywhenyou presstheDRUMTRACKbutton,orwaitinguntilyou starttoplaythekeyboard.Ifyourestartingthepattern byplayingthekeyboard,youhavetheoptionof startingitbyusingaspecificrangeofnotesor velocities. YoucanalsolinktheDrumTrackwithKARMA,so thattheyplayinsyncandstartandstoptogether. InProgrammode,theDrumTrackhasitsownmixer channel(includingEQ)andseparateeffectsrouting, forindependentcontrolofthesound.InCombinations andSongs,theDrumTrackplaysnormalTimbresand Tracks,withallthenormalcontrolsoverProgram selection,EQ,effectsrouting,andsoon.
233
Performing with the Drum Track Using the Drum Track in Program mode
InProgrammode,theDrumTracklivesalongsidethe mainProgram,similartoasecondMIDITrackin Sequencermode. Herewellexplainhowtomakethemostimportant settings.Formoredetails,pleasesee13:Drum Trackonpage 42oftheParameterGuide.
2. NotetheDrumPatternsection,intheupperleftof thedisplay. ThePatternparameterhastwopopupmenus.Theone ontheleftselectsbetweenthePresetandUserbanks; theoneontherightselectsthepatternwithinthebank. 3. Inthepopupmenuontheleft,selectthePreset bank. 4. Inthepopupmenuontheright,selectpattern P001:Pop&Ballad[All]. Next,notetheDrumProgramsectionofthepage(to therightoftheDrumPatternsection).Thisarea containsafewparametersforadjustingthebasic soundoftheDrumTrack. 5. PresstheProgrampopupmenu. TheCategory/ProgramSelectdialogappears.By default,theDrumcategorywillalreadybeselected. 6. SelectadrumProgramfortheDrumTracktoplay. Youcanactuallyselectanysound,evenoutsideofthe Drumcategorybuttheingeneral,thepatternswill onlymakesensewhenplayingadrumProgram. 7. UseVolumetoadjustthevolumeoftheDrum TrackProgram. 8. UseDetunetoadjusttheoverallpitchoftheDrum Programinonecentincrements. Onecentis1/100thofasemitone. Youcanadjustthepitchofindividualdrumsamples byeditingDrumKitsinGlobalmode.
External clock
IftheMIDIClockparameter(ontheGlobalMIDI Basicpage)issettoExternalMIDIorExternalUSB,or toAutoMIDIorAutoUSBifMIDIClockmessagesare beingreceived,thetempovaluewilldisplayasq = EXT,andtheKRONOSwillsynctotheincoming clocks.Whensyncingtoexternalclock,theTEMPO knobandTAPTEMPObuttonhavenoeffect.
Shift
ShiftletsyoutransposetheDrumTrackpatternin semitonesteps,causingdifferentinstrumentsofthe drumkittoplay.Thiswillgenerallycauseunexpected results,whichmayoftenbeinterestingexperiment andsee!
234
[MIXER] T18
[DRUM TRACK]
Thispagedisplaysandreflectsthecontrolsurface settings.Itsconvenienttowatchthispagewhileusing thecontrolsurface,sinceitshowstheparameternames andprecisevalues. Note:Youcanusethecontrolsurfaceregardlessofthe pagethatscurrentlyshowninthedisplay. 4. Useslider3toadjusttheDrumTrackvolume. 5. UsePlay/Muteswitch3totoggletheDrumTracks soundonandoff. NotethatthiscontrolsonlythesoundoftheDrum TrackProgram,andisindependentofwhetherornot theDrumTrackpatternisplaying. 6. PresstheMIXERKNOBSbuttonuntil theCHANNELSTRIPLEDlightsup. Thismakestheknobscontrolavirtual channelstrip,includingpan,EQ,and effectssends. 7. PresstheMIXSELECT3buttontoselecttheDrum TrackontheControlSurface. 8. Useknobs26toadjusttheDrumTracksEQ.
235
236
237
238
239
Specifying whether the Drum Track will play for each KARMA scene
JustasyoucaninProgrammode,youcanspecify whethertheDrumTrackwillplayforeachKARMA sceneinCombinationmodeandSequencermode.
Slave operation
ConnecttheKRONOSsMIDIINtoyourexternalMIDI devicesMIDIOUT,orconnecttheKRONOSsUSBB connectortoyourcomputersUSBport.Then,setup theKRONOSasdescribedunderMIDIClock synchronizationonpage 158.
Synchronizing the Drum Track with KARMA, the Sequencer, and RPPR performance
IfyouwanttheDrumTrackpatterntoplayinsync withthecurrentlyoperatingKARMAfunction, currentlyplayingsong,orRPPRperformance,turn TriggerSyncon. TriggerSyncOff:IftheTriggerModesettingisStart Immediately,theDrumTrackpatternwillbetriggered themomentyoupresstheDRUMTRACKswitch.If thisissettoWaitKBDTrig,theDrumTrackpattern willbetriggeredthemomentyouplaythekeyboard.It willnotsynchronizetothecurrentlyoperating KARMAfunctionortothecurrentlyplayingsong, pattern,orRPPR. TriggerSyncOn:Triggeringwillsynchronizetothe currentlyplayingsong,patternorRPPRperformance inunitsofameasure.Triggeringwillsynchronizeto thecurrentlyoperatingKARMAfunction(in Sequencermodeifthesongorpatternisstopped)in unitsofabeat. Note:IfyouwanttosynchronizeKARMAtothe currentlyrunningDrumTrack,enabletheQuantize Triggerparameter(ProgP7:KARMATrigger, Combi/SeqP7:KARMATriggerA/B/C/D). Note:IfyouwanttosynchronizetheRPPRpattern performancetothecurrentlyrunningDrumTrack,set theSyncparametertoBeatorMeasure.
Master operation
ConnecttheKRONOSsMIDIINtoyourexternalMIDI devicesMIDIOUT,orconnecttheKRONOSsUSBB connectortoyourcomputersUSBport. SettheGlobalMIDIClocktoInternal.Theconnected externalMIDIdevicewillsynchronizetotheMIDI realtimeclockandrealtimecommandsitreceives. Note:YoucanalsouseMIDIClock=AutoMIDIor AutoUSB,aslongasclockmessagesarenotbeing received.Fordetails,pleaseseeMIDIClock synchronizationonpage 158.
240
5. UsetheToDrumTrackPatternSelectfieldto specifytheuserDrumTrackpatternnumberthat willholdtheconverteddata.Whenyouexecute thecommand,thedatawillbeoverwrittenonto thisnumber. 6. IfyouselecttheAllPatternsavailableinSong ***option,allpatternsinthesongthatcontain notedatawillbeconverted,startingwiththe numberyouspecifiedinstep4. 7. IfyouexecutethiscommandwithNoteOnly selected,onlythenoteeventswillbeconverted. 8. PresstheOKbuttonortheENTERswitchto execute.Ifyoudecidenottoexecute,pressthe CancelbuttonortheEXITswitch. 9. AsdescribedinUsingtheDrumTrackin Programmodeonpage 234,settheDrumTrack PatternBanktoUser,andsetPatternNo.to theuserDrumTrackpatternyouconverted.Then playtheDrumTrackpattern.
241
242
Appendices
Troubleshooting Power supply
Power does not turn on
Isthepowercableconnectedtoanoutlet?Formore information,seeConnectionsonpage 20. IsthePOWERswitchturnedon? TurnontherearpanelPOWERswitch.See Turningthepoweron/offonpage 20.
LCD screen
Display is blank or incorrect
The power is turned on, but nothing is shown in the LCD screen. However, the KRONOS functions normally when you play the keyboard or perform other operations.
IstheLCDscreensbacklightbrightnessadjusted correctly? 1. PresstheGLOBALswitch,andthenpressthe EXITswitchtwice. 2. HolddowntheENTERswitch,andpressnumeric key6. TheLCDSetupdialogwillappear. 3. SelecttheBrightnessparameter,andincreasethe valueuntilthescreenisbrightenough. 4. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmthechange. Formoreinformation,see11h:PlayPage MS/WS/DKitDisplayonpage 41oftheParameter GuideandShowMS/WS/DKitGraphics,on page 148oftheParameterGuide.
The power is turned on, but the LCD screen does not display normally, or an error message is displayed. There is no sound when you play the keyboard, and the KRONOS does not function normally.
Itispossiblethatthesystemhasbeendamaged.Use theincludedAccessoryDiskstorestoretheKRONOS toitsfactorystate.
In Combination or Sequencer modes, cant edit the value of Timbre/Track parameters such as MIDI Channel or Status
Someparameterscantbeeditedwhilenotesare playing,eitherlocallyorfromMIDI.Ifthedamper pedalishelddown,orifitscalibrationisincorrect, notesmaybesustainingeveniftheyarentaudible.
243
Appendices
244
Troubleshooting
245
Appendices
Songs
Song does not play correctly after being loaded
Inthedialogboxwhenyousavedthedata,didyou checkalloftheitemsthatyouwantedtosave? AretheProgramsusedbytheSongthesameaswhen thesongwascreated? IfyouhaveswitchedProgrambanks,youcanuse thepagemenucommandChangeallbank referencestochangetheProgrambankforeach trackofaSong.Formoreinformation,seeChange allbankreferencesonpage 803oftheParameter Guide. Whensavingthesong,itisbesttouseSaveAllor SavePCG&SEQsothattheprogramsaresaved togetherwiththesong.Thenwhenloading,load boththe.PCGandthe.SEQdata. Haveyouloadedthemultisamplesandsamplesused bytheprogram? BeforeyouloadanOASYS.SNGfile,editthenameof thedirectorysothatitmatchestheKRONOSstandard: thesamenameasthe.SNGfile,followedby_A(for Audio).Inthecaseabove,youdrename WAMOZA_AtoWAMOZART_A.
Playback does not start when you press the SEQUENCER START/STOP switch
IstheMIDIClock(GlobalP1:MIDI)settoInternalor Auto?
246
Troubleshooting
Set Lists
Istherespaceremainingonthedisk? DeleteunwantedWAVEfiles. SaveacopyofimportantWAVEfilesonexternal media,andthendeletethemfromthedisk. AretheRECSourcesettingscorrect? AFilealreadyexistsmessageappears,andyoucant record. IntheP0:Play/RECPreferencepage,changethe nameoftheWAVEfilethatyouregoingtorecord. DeletethefilesintheTEMPfolder.
Set Lists
COMPARE doesnt affect Control Surface
WhenyoureinSetListmode,theCOMPAREbutton actsoneditstotheSetList,suchasthesoundsselected foreachSlot,holdtimes,comments,andsoon. ControlSurfaceeditsinSetListmodeapplytothe SlotsProgram,Combination,orSong,andnottothe SetListitself.ThismeansthatpressingCOMPAREin SetListmodewillnotrevertsuchedits. TorevertControlSurfaceeditsmadeinSetListmode: 1. Gotothesoundsnativemode. Forinstance,iftheSlotcontainsaProgram,goto Programmode. 2. PressCOMPARE. TheControlSurfaceeditswillbereverted.Youcan thenreturntoSetListmodeifdesired.
Sampling
Cant sample
Aretheaudioinputsettingscorrect? SeeAudioinputsdontworkproperlyon page 244 IsthereenoughfreeRAMmemoryforsampling? Istherefreespaceinmemory?Formoreinformation, see01f:FreeSampleMemory/Locationson page 684oftheParameterGuide,and09:Media Informationonpage 818oftheParameterGuide. InordertosampletoRAMmemory,youmust allocatesufficientspaceforsampling. Ifyouaresamplingtodisk,selectadifferentdisk. Formoreinformation,seeSelectDirectoryon page 149oftheParameterGuide Deleteunneededsamples.Formoreinformation, seeDeleteSampleonpage 726oftheParameter Guide. Saveimportantsamplesonexternalmedia,and thendeletethemfrommemory. Ifyouresamplingtotheinternaldisk,didyou unchecktheMemoryProtectInternalHDDSave dialogbox?(GlobalP0) IfyouresamplingtoexternalUSBstoragemedia,did youselectrecordablemedia?
247
Appendices
IstheTriggersettingcorrect?Formoreinformation, seeTriggeronpage 19oftheParameterGuide. InSamplingmodeifyouareresamplingwith ResamplesettoAuto,hasthesampletoberesampled beenassignedtothekeyboard,andselectedforKey? Applyinganinserteffecttoasampleandresampling theresultonpage 138. IstheSourceBussettingcorrect? Ifabufferoverrunerroroccurredmessageis displayedfrequentlywhenyouaresamplingtodisk, executethepagemenucommandCheckMedium (DiskUtilitypage)tofindandcorrectanyerrorson theselectedMSDOSformatmedia.Formore information,seeCheckMediumonpage 850ofthe ParameterGuide.
Time lag between pressing the SAMPLING REC switch and entering samplingstandby mode
Thelengthoftimeuntilyouentersamplingstandby modewilldependonthestateofthefreespaceonthe disk(i.e.,whetherthefreespaceiscontinuousor fragmented). Whensamplingtothedisk,pressingthe SAMPLINGRECswitchwillcausetheamountof spacespecifiedbySampleTimetobeallocated withinthedisk. SetSampleTimeonlyslightlylongerthanthe lengththatyouwillactuallysample;avoid specifyinganexcessivelylongsampletime.
KARMA
KARMA does not start
IstheKARMAON/OFFswitchturnedon(lit)? IfaKARMAmoduledoesnotstartinCombinationor Sequencermode,istheRunCheckBoxcheckedfor thatmodule?Also,aretheInputChannelandOutput Channelsettingsappropriate? IsMIDIClock(GlobalP1:MIDI)settoInternalor Auto? IntheGlobalP0:BasicSetuppage,couldAllKARMA Offbechecked? IstheKARMALINKEDLEDlit?Ifso,KARMAis linkedwiththeDrumTrack.StarttheDrumTrackto triggerKARMA.Formoreinformation,seeUsing KARMAandtheDrumTracktogetheronpage 239.
248
Troubleshooting
Drum Track
Drum Track
Drum Track does not start
IstheDRUMTRACKON/OFFswitchturnedon(lit)? IstheDRUMTRACK[ON/OFF]switchblinking? TriggerModeissettoWaitKBDTrig.Thedrumtrack patternwillstartwhenyouplaythekeyboardor receiveanoteon.SeeTurningtheDrumTrackonand offonpage 236. DoesthecurrentDrumTrackpatterncontaindata?If theresnodatainthepattern,theDrumTrackwont play. IfyoureinCombinationmode,istheOutputChannel settingappropriate?SeeUsingtheDrumTrackin Combinationmodeonpage 236. IfyoureinSequencermode,aretheInputChannel andOutputChannelsettingsappropriate?SeeDrum TracksettingsinSequencermodeonpage 238. IstheMIDIClockparametersetcorrectly?SeeMIDI Clocksynchronizationonpage 158. IntheGlobalP0:BasicSetuppage,isAllKARMA/DT Offchecked?SeeGloballydisablingKARMAandthe DrumTrackonpage 157. IftheDrumTrackstopswhenyouswitchtheKARMA Masterscene,haveyoucheckedtheDTRun(Drum TrackRun)checkboxoftheKARMAMasterscene?
Vector
Cant control the volume
IstheEnableVolumeControlcheckboxchecked? IstheCombinationorSequencermodeVJSAssign settingappropriate? HaveyoucheckedtheEnableProgramVectorVolume checkboxsothatthevolumecontrolofaprogramcan bereproducedinCombinationorSequencermode? InCombinationorSequencermode,aretheEnable CombiVectorCCorEnableSongVectorCCcheck boxeschecked? HaveyoucheckedtheEnableProgramVectorCC checkboxsothattheCCcontrolofaprogramcanbe reproducedinCombinationorSequencermode?
Drum Kits
The drum samples pitch does not change
YouhavelefttheAssigncheckboxunchecked,and wanttoplaythedrumsampleattheadjacentrighta semitonelower,butthepitchdoesnotchange. IfyouhaveselectedadrumprograminProgram mode,andthenwanttoeditthedrumkitinGlobal mode,gototheProgramP2:EditPitch,OSC1Pitch Mod.pageandsetPitchSlopeto+1.0beforeyou enterGlobalmode.
Wave Sequences
The wave sequence does not advance
IstheRuncheckboxchecked?
Effects
Effects are not applied
Haveyouselectedeffectprogram000? Selectaneffectotherthan000:NoEffectforIFX1 12,MFX1,2orTFX1,2.
249
Appendices
MIDI
The KRONOS does not respond at all to incoming MIDI data
AreallMIDIcablesconnectedcorrectly? IstheMIDIdatabeingreceivedonthechannelon whichitisbeingtransmitted?
CD-R/RW
CD-R/RW drive is not recognized, or Cant write
Wasthedrivesubjectedtophysicalshockorvibration whiledataisbeingwritten? IfyouareunabletosavedatasuchasPCGorSNG files,hasthediscbeenformatted? IfyouarewritingaudiotrackstocreateanaudioCD,it isnotnecessarytoformatthedisc. Areyouusingtherecommendedmediaforyourdrive? IfyouarewritingfromanexternalUSBdrivetoCD R/RW,itispossiblethatthetransferspeedis insufficient.
250
Troubleshooting
Other problems
WAVE files
Cant load
IstheWAVEfileinaformatthattheKRONOScan load? Only48kHzor44.1kHzWAVEfilescanbe insertedintoanaudiotrackinaSong,orintothe TrackCDList.
Cant preview
IstheWAVEfileinaformatthattheKRONOScan load? Only48kHzor44.1kHzWAVEfilescanbe previewedbypressingthePlaybuttoninthe directorywindow.
Other problems
Power turns off automatically
IftheKRONOSisnotcooledadequately,theinternal temperaturewillrise.Thepowersupplymayshut downautomaticallytoprotectthedevicefromhigh temperatures.
251
Appendices
B (Buffer)
Buffer overrun error occurred
Meaning:WhensamplingtoexternalUSBmedia,the processingcouldnotkeepupwiththesampling.To solvethisproblem: ExecutetheDiskUtilitypagemenucommand CheckMedium.Thentrythesamplingoperation again.Ifthisdoesnotresolvetheproblem,copy severalfilesfromthatmediatoothermedia,delete thosefiles,andthentrythesamplingoperation again. Note:Samplingmaynotbepossiblebecauseofthe mediayoureusing.Pleaseusetherecommendedtypes ofmedia. Note:IftheBufferoverrunerroroccurrederror messageappears.thedatauptothepointtheerror occurredhasbeensampled,butthedataatthepoint theerroroccurredmaynotplaybackcorrectly.
C (Cant calibrateCompleted)
Cant calibrate
Meaning:Calibrationcouldnotbeperformed correctly. Tryagain. Meaning:IftheGlobalmodeMemoryProtect parameterInternalHDDSaveischecked,writingto theinternaldiskisprohibited.Thiserrormessagewill appearifyouattempttorecordonaudiotracksinthis state. UnchecktheInternalHDDSaveitem,andtrythe recordingagain.
252
D (DestinationDisk)
Wheneveryouusedigitalaudioconnections,make surethatallconnectedsystemsaresetsothatthere isoneandonlyonewordclockmaster.Youcanset thewordclockfortheKRONOSusingtheGlobal pageSystemClockparameter.Formore information,seeSystemClockonpage 756ofthe ParameterGuide. Makesurethatyourexternaldeviceiscorrectly transmittingadigitalsignal. Makesurethatthesamplerateoftheexternal deviceis48kHz. Makesurethatthereisnoproblemwiththecable.
CLIP!
Meaning:TheCLIP!indicationwillappearifthe signallevelexceeds0dB. Thesignalbeingsampledorrecordedtoanaudio trackhasoverloaded;usetheRecordingLevel slidertoadjustthelevel. Note:Whenusingtheanalogaudioinputs,youwill obtainthewidestpossibledynamicrangeifyouadjust theMIC/LINEgainselectswitchandtheLEVELknobs ashighaspossiblewithoutallowingADC OVERLOAD!toappear.Inaddition,youshouldset Level(02a)to127,andadjustRecordingLevelas highaspossiblewithoutallowingCLIP!toappear.
Completed
Meaning:Executionofthecommandendednormally.
Could not execute Capture Random Seed, because the selected Start Seed is assigned as an RTParam
Meaning:IftheKARMAmodulesStartSeed parameterhasbeenassignedasaperformance realtimeparameter,thismessagewillappearwhen youattempttoexecutetheCaptureRandomSeed command;thecommandcannotbeexecuted.(Press theOKbuttontoclosethemessage.) InthePerfRTPpage,canceltheperformance realtimeparameterassignmentforStartSeed.
CLOCK ERROR!
Meaning:TheGlobalSystemClockissettoS/P DIF, buttheclockatthedigitalinputisnotbeingdetected correctly.
D (DestinationDisk)
Destination and source are identical
Meaning:Whencopyingorbouncing,thesamesong, trackorpatternwasselectedforboththesourceand destination.Tosolvethisproblem: Selectadifferentsong,track,orpatternforthe sourceanddestination.
Destination is empty
Meaning:Whenediting,thetrackorpatternthatwas specifiedasthedestinationcontainsnomusicaldata. Tosolvethisproblem: Selectatrackorpatternthatcontainsmusicaldata.
253
Appendices
PresstheOKbuttontodeleteallfilesand/or directorieswithinthatdirectory.
Disc full
Meaning:WhenusingtheWritetoCDcommandin theDiskmodeMakeAudioCDpage,thereis insufficientspaceremainingontheCDR/RWforthe datatobewritten. Eitherwritetoothermedia,orremoveunneeded tracks.
E (ErrorExceeded)
Error in formatting medium
Meaning: Anerroroccurredwhileperforminga physicalformat(fullformat)orhighlevelformat (quickformat)ofthemedia.Tosolvethisproblem: Useothermedia. Meaning: WhenexecutingtheDiskmodeUtilitypage menucommandConverttoISO9660Format,anerror occurredwhilerewritingtheUDFarea.Tosolvethis problem: Useothermedia.
Error: invalid option file Error in mount process. Please backup files
Meaning: AnerrorwasfoundonaUDFformatCD R/RWorDVDR/RWdisk.Tosolvethisproblem: Makeabackupofthedata,andstopusingthedisk whichcausedtheerror. Meaning:Whilepreparingtoinstallanoption(suchas anEXs),thesystemhasdetectedcorrupteddatainthe filestobeinstalled.Tosolvethisproblem: CopythefiletotheUSBmediaagain,orifthatfails, downloadthedataagain.
254
F (FileFront)
Error unloading Drumsamples. Error unloading Multisamples. Error unloading Exs Error unloading RAM
Meaning: WhenexecutingChangeloadmethodor Unloadalldatafromselectedbank,asamplecould notbeunloadedcorrectly.
multipleprogramsandonecombinationaccordingto itsstructure.Atthistime,themaximumnumberof KRONOSprogramsresultingfromthisconversionis limitedto16,whichisthemaximumnumberof programsthatcanbeusedinacombination.Tosolve thisproblem: LoadtheAKAIprogramsindividually,andedit themontheKRONOS. InsteadofusingAdvancedConversionLoad,load themultisamplesorsamples,andeditthemonthe KRONOS.
Exceeded 16 Programs
Meaning: Youexceeded16programswhile performingAdvancedConversionLoad.Whenan AKAIProgramisloaded,itwillbeconvertedinto
F (FileFront)
Failed. Source device not found Failed. Bad install.info - invalid SOURCE Failed. Bad install.info - VERSION missing Failed. Bad install.info - CRC fails
Meaning:WhenexecutingtheGlobalmodeUpdate SystemSoftwarecommand,thesemessageswill appeariftheupdatecouldnotbeperformedcorrectly. Tosolvethisproblem: Trytheupdateagain.Alternatively,tryagainusing anotherCD/DVDorUSBflashmemory. fromthedisk? [Restore][Delete] IfyouchooseRestore,afoldernamedTEMPwill remainontheinternaldisk.Ifyouthenrecordaudio tracksinthisstate,andusethedefaultnameinthe Preferencepage,thenamemaybeidenticaltothe alreadyexistingWAVEfile,causingthismessageto appear. Specifyadifferentname.(SequencerP0Preference page) UsetheDiskUtilitypagemenucommandDeleteto deletetheTEMPfolder. Meaning:Whensavinga.SNGfile,aseparate directoryiscreatedfortheSongsaudiofiles.The directorysnameconsistsofthe.SNGfilename followedby_A(forAudio).Ifthiserrorappears whensavinga.SNGfile,itcanmeanthatadirectory withthisnamealreadyexists.Tosolvethisproblem: Changethe.SNGfilenametosomethingotherthan thenameofanexistingdirectory,andthensavethe dataagain.
255
Appendices
Meaning:WhenexecutingtheCopycommandinthe DiskmodeUtilitypage,andyouusedawildcardto specifythecopyfilename,thespecifiedfilewasnot found.Alternatively,thelengthofthecopysourcepath nameexceeded76characters. Meaning:InDiskmodewhenyouusedtheOpen buttontoopenadirectory,thepathlengthincluding theselecteddirectorynameexceeded76characters. Meaning:WhenexecutingInsertintheDiskmode MakeAudioCDpage,youattemptedtousetheInsert AllbuttontoaddaWAVEfile,butnoWAVEfilewitha samplingfrequencyof44.1kHzor48kHzexistsinthe selecteddirectory. Checkthefileordirectory. Meaning:InDiskmodewhenloadinga.KCDfile,a WAVEfilelistedintheAudioTrackListcouldnotbe found. ThefilewhoseSizeisnotshownintheDiskmode MakeAudioCDpageistheonethatcouldnotbe found.Checkthefileordirectory,ordeleteitfrom theAudioTrackList.
File unavailable
Meaning:Youattemptedtoloadoropenafilewhose formatwasincorrect.
I (IllegalIndex)
Illegal file description
Meaning:Thefilenamethatyouspecifiedwhensaving afileorcreatingadirectorycontainedinvalid characters.Tosolvethisproblem: Changethefilenameyouarespecifying.Filenames notpermittedbyMSDOScannotbeusedasa filename.
256
H
HD Protected
Meaning:TheinternalSSDisprotected.Tosolvethis problem: OntheGlobalBasictab,underMemoryProtect, turnoff(uncheck)theInternalHDDSavecheck box.
K
Kronos system version ... update complete. Please restart the system.
Meaning:Thismessagewillappearwhenyouveused theGlobalP0pagemenucommandUpdateSystem Software,aftertheupdateiscomplete.Restartthe systemtousetheupdatedsoftware. Turnthepowerswitchoff,andthenonagain.
M (MasterMultisample)
Master Track cant be recorded alone
Meaning:Whenrealtimerecordingasingletrack,you attemptedtobeginrecordingwiththemastertrackas thecurrenttrack. SelectaMIDIorAudioTrackforrecording,instead oftheMasterTrack.
Medium changed
Meaning:WhenexecutingtheCopycommandinthe DiskmodeUtilitypage,themediawasexchangedor ejected,anditwasnotpossibletocopybetween separatemediaonthesamedrive.
Memory full
Meaning:InSequencermodewheneditingasong, trackorpattern,thetotaldataofallsongshasusedup allofthesequencedatamemory,andfurthereditingis notpossible.Tosolvethisproblem: Deleteothersongdataetc.toincreasetheamount offreememory. Meaning:WhilerealtimerecordinginSequencer mode,thereisnomorefreememorytoaccommodate therecordeddata,sorecordinghasbeenforcibly halted.Tosolvethisproblem: Deleteothersongdataetc.toincreasetheamount offreememory.
Memory overflow
Meaning:WhilereceivingexclusivedatainDiskmode SaveExclusive,allremaininginternalmemorywas usedup.Tosolvethisproblem:
257
Appendices
Mount Error
Meaning:Thismessagewillappearwhenyouexecute theGlobalmodeUpdateSystemSoftwarecommandif theCDcouldnotbeexecutedsuccessfully.Tosolvethis problem: Tryagain.Alternatively,tryagainusingadifferent CD.
Memory Protected
Meaning:Theinternalprogram,combination,song, drumkit,wavesequence,KARMAGE,orInternal HDDSaveisprotected. Meaning:Thesongwasprotectedwhenyouexecuted. InGlobalmode,turnoffwriteprotect,andexecute thewriteorloadoperationonceagain.
No medium
Meaning:WhenexecutingacommandinDiskmode, nomediawasinsertedinthedrive.Tosolvethis problem: Insertmediasuchasamountthedrive.
No Selected Item
Meaning:Whenyouattemptedtosaveasingleeffect withSaveEffectPreset,therewasnoeffecttobe saved. Ifyouwanttosaveasingleeffect,selecteitherthe PresetortheUsercheckboxbeforeexecutingthe save.
258
259
Appendices
P (PatternProgram)
Pattern conflicts with events
Meaning:ItwasnotpossibletoexecutetheBounce operationbecauseoneofthetrackscontaineda pattern,andthesamemeasureoftheothertrack containedeventsorapattern. Openthepattern.
260
R (Rear sampleRoot)
R (Rear sampleRoot)
Rear sample is empty
Meaning:WhenyouexecutedLinkintheSampling modeSampleEditpage,thesamplethatyouspecified astherearsampleisempty. Specifyasamplethatcontainsdataastherear sample,andexecuteonceagain.
S (SampleSource)
Sample data used in other sample(s) Continue?
Meaning:Othersample(s)usethesamesampledataas thesamplethatyouareediting.Tocontinueediting, presstheOKbutton. Loadthecorrect.PCGfile. Meaning:WhenloadingaKSFfilethatwassplitacross multiplemedia,theorderinwhichyouattemptedto loadthefileswasincorrect. LoadtheKSFfileinthecorrectorder.Toviewthe filenumberorderinwhichtheKSFfileswere saved,youcanchecktheTranslationpagemenu command.(Thesamplenameandnumberofthe firstKSFfilewillbedisplayed.)
261
Appendices
Specifyatrackorpatternthatcontainsmusical data.
Source is empty
Meaning:Nodataexistsinthetrackorpatternthat youspecifiedasthesource.
T (The clockTrack)
The clock battery voltage is low. Please replace the battery, and set the date and time in Disk mode.
Meaning:Thebatteryfortheclock/calendarfunction hasrunlow,andneedstobereplaced.YourKorg Distributorcanhelpyoufindaservicecentertoreplace thebattery. internaldisk.Sincethedatawasnotsavedassong data,allaudioeventsandregiondataweredeleted, butifnecessaryyoucansavetheseWAVEfilesanduse themtocreateanewsong. Ifyouwanttokeepthisdata,pressRestore.Ifyou wanttodeletethisdata,pressDelete.
There are un-saved audio files from your previous recording session. Do you want to restore these files, or delete them from the disk? [Restore] [Delete]
Meaning:TheWAVEfilescreatedwhenyourecorded audiotracksbeforepoweringoffwerenotsavedas songdata,andremainintheTEMPfolderofthe
Track is full
Meaning:IntheDiskmodeMakeAudioCDpage,you attemptedtoinsertatrackthatwouldmakethetotal exceed99tracks. Cutunneededtracks,andthenexecutetheInsert operationonceagain.
262
W (Wave)
W (Wave)
.WAV already exists. Overwrite?
Meaning:WhenimportingaWAVEfilethatrequires conversionto48kHz/mono,afileofthesamename alreadyexistsonthedisk.Tosolvethisproblem: Eitherdeletetheexistingfile,orrenameitbefore importing. Copythe.SNGfileandthedirectoryforthat.SNG file(thedirectorycontainingtheWAVEfilesit uses)tothesamedirectoryoftheinternaldisk,and thenloadthedataagain.
WAVE files on this external medium will not be played with sequencer audio track playback. Copy SNG and WAVE Directory to Internal HDD, and load SNG from internal HDD
Meaning:TheWAVEfileusedbytheSNGdatayoure loadinginDiskmodeexistsonexternalmedia,and willnotplaybackcorrectlywhenloaded.Audiotrack recordingandplaybackisavailableonlyonthe internaldisk.Tosolvethisproblem:
Y (You)
You cant undo this operation Are you sure?
Meaning:Onceyouentereventediting(evenifyou leaveeventeditingwithoutactuallyeditinganevent), itwillnolongerbepossibletoexecuteaCompareof thepreviousedit.Ifyouwishtoentereventediting, presstheOKbutton.Tocancel,presstheCancel button.
263
Appendices
Function
Save Load Sampling/Resampling WAVE File Play Make Audio CD Convert to ISO9660 Format Audio Track Recording Audio Track Edit
USB CD-R/RW USB CD-R/RW USB DVD-ROM (UDF Packet (ISO9660) (ISO9660, UDF) Write)
l l * x l l x x
1
x l * x l (source) x x
1
x l x l x x x x
l:supported
x :notsupported
*1:CDDA(audioCDs)canberippedinSampling
:notapplicable
s:partiallysupportedseethespecifiednote
264
3. UseDriveSelecttoselectHDD. TheLCDscreenwillshowthefilesandfoldersonthe internaldisk. 4. TouchtheFACTORYfoldertoselectit. 5. PresstheonscreenOpenbutton. TheLCDwillnowshowthecontentsoftheFACTORY folder. 6. SelectthePRELOAD.PCGfile. 7. PresstheLoadbutton. TheLoadPCGdialogboxwillappear.
265
Appendices
Specifications
Operating temperature +5 +35 C (no condensation) System/Keyboard System Keyboard KRONOS 88-key 73-key 61-key RH3 (Real Weighted Hammer Action 3)*1 RH3 (Real Weighted Hammer Action 3)*1 Natural Touch Semi Weighted
*1: The key weight of the RH3 keyboard differs in four stages across the pitch range (with low notes being heavier, and high notes being lighter), delivering a playing feel similar to that of a grand piano. Tone Generator Synthesis Types: 9 HD-1 AL-1 CX-3 STR-1 MS-20EX PolysixEX MOD-7 SGX-1 EP-1 Maximum Polyphony*2*3 HD-1 AL-1 CX-3 STR-1 MS-20EX PolysixEX MOD-7 SGX-1 EP-1 High Definition Synthesizer (PCM) Analog Synthesizer (Analog Modeling) Tonewheel Organ (Tonewheel Organ Modeling) Plucked String (Physical Modeling) Component Modeling Technology (Analog Modeling) Component Modeling Technology (Analog Modeling) Waveshaping VPM Synthesizer (VPM Synthesis) Premium Piano (Acoustic Piano) MDS Electric Piano (Electric Piano) 140 voices 80 voices 200 voices 40 voices 40 voices 180 voices 52 voices 100 voices*4 104 voices HD-1 EXi (Expansion Instruments)
*2: In rare cases, when a large number of processor-intensive effects are active simultaneously (for instance, more than 14 O-Verbs), polyphony may be slightly reduced. *3: A portion of the multicore processor in KRONOS is devoted to generating voices, and a separate portion is devoted to generating effects. KRONOS dynamically allocates the voice processing power between the engines as necessary. The quoted maximum numbers of voices apply when 100% of the voice processing power is devoted to a single engine. *4: 100 dual-stereo notes (equivalent to 400 mono voices) Preset PCM Build-in Expansion PCM Libraries 314 MB (ROM 1,505 multisamples, 1,388 drum samples) EXs1 EXs2 EXs3 EXs4 EXs5 EXs6 EXs7 EXs8 EXs9 Capacity of PCM RAM ROM Expansion Concert Grand Piano Brass & Woodwinds Vintage Keyboards ROM Expansion 2 SGX-1 German D Piano SGX-1 Japanese C Piano Rock Ambience Drums Jazz Ambience Drums
About 1GB, expandable to about 2GB*5 *5: The memory available for RAM samples will change based on the use of Expansion PCM libraries.
Wave Sequences
Support for stereo multisamples, synchronization of individual notes, and tempo-based settings.
266
Specifications
HD-1 Program
HD-1 Program
Control oscillator volumes and synthesis & effects parameters via the Vector Joystick and the tempo-synchronized Vector Envelope. Single: only OSC1, Double: OSC1 and OSC2. Double mode lets you layer two completely separate synth voices, each with their own velocityswitched oscillator, dual filter, EGs, LFOs, etc. Drums: One drum kit, Double Drums: Two drum kits. Virtual Memory Technology (VMT) plays large samples directly from the internal SSD. 8 velocity zones per oscillator, with switching, crossfades and layering. Each zone can play mono or stereo Multisamples or Wave Sequences. Two multi-mode filters per voices (low-pass, high-pass, band-pass and band- reject), Four-mode filter routings (single, serial, parallel and 24dB mode). Per voice non-linear driver and low boost circuit. Three bands, with sweepable mid. Three envelope generators, two LFOs per voice, common LFO, four key tracking generators, AMS (Alternate Modulation Source), two AMS mixers. Control oscillator volumes and synthesis & effects parameters via the Vector Joystick and the tempo-synchronized Vector Envelope. Common Step Sequencer, AMS (Alternate Modulation Source), Common LFO, 2 Key Tracking Generators. Three bands, with sweep-able mid Ultra-low-aliasing oscillators OSC1, OSC2, Sub-oscillator and noise generator; ring modulation, FM and Sync. External audio can be processed through the ring modulator, filter, driver, amp, and EQ. Two multi-mode filter (low-pass, high-pass, band-pass and band-reject) with four types of filter routings (single, serial, parallel and 24dB mode), MultiFilter mode (only Filter-A; modulatable mix of Low Pass, High Pass, Band Pass, and dry input, for creating a wide variety of unique filter types and effects). Per-voice non-linear driver and low boost circuit. Five Envelope generators, four per-voice LFOs, two Key Track generators, two AMS Mixers, Per-voice Step Sequencer. Phase-synchronous tonewheels (clean and vintage modes), percussion, key click, wheel brake. Four additional, user-specified drawbars, and expanded percussion. Rotary speaker, vibrato/chorus, amp modeling with overdrive, 3-band EQ. Controlled via nine front-panel sliders (via Tone Adjust). Upper, Lower Two AMS mixers. Includes physically modeled damping, decay, dispersion, nonlinearity, harmonics, dual pickups, and more. Most string parameters can be controlled in realtime. Three independent excitation sources can be used simultaneously: Pluck, Noise, and PCM. 16 preset pluck types, with modulatable width and randomization. Noise generator with saturation and dedicated lowpass filter. PCM Oscillator Korgs ultra-low-aliasing technology, as introduced in the HD-1. 4 velocity zones per oscillator. Uses any mono ROM, EXs, or RAM multisamples. Supports VMT. PCM can either be used as an excitation signal, or layered with the output of the string. Excitation Filter Dedicated 2-pole multimode filter for shaping the string excitation. Filter can be enabled/disabled separately for each excitation source. Low Pass, High Pass, Band Pass, and Band Reject modes.
Oscillator
Filters Driver EQ Modulation EXi Program Common Advanced Vector Synthesis Modulation EQ AL-1 Program Oscillators Audio Input Filters
Driver Modulation CX-3 Program Tonewheel Organ Modeling EX Mode Internal Effects Drawbar Control Split Modulation STR-1 Program Physically Modeled String
String Excitation
Run real-time audio through the string, including feedback through effects. Modeled feedback includes modulate-able instrument-to-amp distance and orientation. Dual multi-mode filters per voice; Single, Serial, Parallel (with split stereo output), and 24dB (4pole) configurations. Low Pass, High Pass, and Band Reject modes. Multi Filter mode (Filter A only). Modulatable mix of Low Pass, High Pass, Band Pass, and dry input, for creating a wide variety of unique filter types and effects.
Modulation
5 Envelopes, 4 per-voice LFOs, 2 Key Track generators, String Tracking generators, 4 AMS Mixers.
267
Appendices
MS-20EX Program Oscillators Audio Input Filters Patch Panel Patch Points
Ultra-low-aliasing oscillators. VCO1, VCO2, Ring Mod, Pink and White Noise Generator. Run real-time audio through the synthesis engine and ESP (External Signal Processor). 12dB/octave High Pass and Low Pass self-resonant filters. ESP section: 24dB/octave Low Cut and High Cut filters, available per voice. Patchable audio and modulation, at audio rates.
Keyboard: Keyboard CV Out, Keyboard Trigger Out, VCO1+VCO2 CV In, VCO2 CV In VCO: VCO1+VCO2 External Frequency Control In, VCO1 Out*, VCO2 Out* VCF: External Signal In, External HP Filter Cutoff Frequency Control In, External LP Filter Cutoff Frequency Control In, HPF Out*, LPF In*, LPF Out* VCO+VCF: Total External Modulation In VCA: External Initial Gain Control In, VCA In* EG: EG1 Envelope Signal Normal Out, EG1 Envelope Signal Reverse Out, EG1+EG2 Trigger In, EG1 Trigger In, EG2 Envelope Signal Reverse Out MG: Triangle Out, Rectangle Out Noise Generator: Pink Noise Out, White Noise Out Sample and Hold: Clock Trigger In, Sample Signal In, S/H Out Modulation VCA: Control Voltage In, Signal In, Signal Out Manual Controller: Control Wheel Out, Momentary Switch * New patch points not provided ESP: Signal In, AMP Out, BPF In, BPF Out, F-V CV Out, Envelope Out, Trigger Out on the original MS-20. Others: EXi Audio In*, Mixer 1 In*, Mixer 1 Out*, Mixer 2 In*, Mixer 2 Out* Use incoming audio as a trigger and/or CV source. MS-20: Original DAR and HADSR EGs 1 & 2, original MG (with MIDI sync), Sample-and-Hold, MVCA. KRONOS: 4 additional multi-stage Envelopes, 4 additional per-voice LFOs, and 4 AMS Mixers. VCO: Saw, Pulse, PWM Sub Oscillator: Off, 1 octave below, 2 octaves below 24dB (4-Pole) Low Pass self-resonant filter Integrated Polysix Chorus, Phase, and Ensemble. Integrated MIDI-synced arpeggiator, with adjustable Range, Mode, and Latch. Polysix: Original ADSR EG and MG (with MIDI sync). KRONOS: 2 additional multi-stage Envelopes, 2 additional per-voice LFOs, and 4 AMS Mixers. Combines Variable Phase Modulation (VPM), waveshaping ring modulation, PCM sample playback, and subtractive synthesis. Able to convert-load SYX files. 6 Phase and modulatable pitch per oscillator. VPM/Waveshaper/ 101 Waveshaper tables plus modulatable Drive and Offset. Ring Modulation Use as oscillators, or as Waveshapers or Ring Modulators for other signals. Oscillators PCM Oscillator Korgs ultra-low-aliasing technology, as introduced in the HD-1. 4 velocity zones per oscillator. Uses any mono ROM, EXs, or RAM multisamples. Supports VMT. PCM can be used as an FM modulator and/or layered with the VPM Oscillators. Noise generator with saturation and dedicated low pass filter.
PolysixEX Program
MOD-7 Program
Run real-time audio through the VPM Oscillators and filters. Dual multi-mode filters per voice (Low Pass, High Pass, Band Pass, and Band Reject modes). Two types of filter routing (parallel, 24 dB (4-pole)). Multi Filter mode (Filter A only): Modulatable mix of Low Pass, High Pass, Band Pass, and dry input, for creating a wide variety of unique filter types and effects.
Patch Panel
Supports both algorithm (78 types) selection and free patching. Three 2-in, 1- out mixers for scaling and merging audio, fully modulatable, with phase inversion. Main 6-input stereo mixer, with modulatable pan and volume, plus phase inversion.
10 Envelopes, 4 per-voice LFOs, 9 Key Tracking generators, Per-voice Step Sequencer, 4 standard AMS Mixers plus 4 simple AMS Mixers. Virtual Memory Technology (VMT) plays large samples directly from the internal SSD. Chromatically sampled at eight velocity levels, no looping. Damper resonance and mechanical noise. EXs6 - SGX-1 German D Piano; EXs7 - SGX-1 Japanese C Piano 32 or more Damper Resonance, Damper Noise, Mechanical Noise, Note Release
268
Specifications
EP-1 Program
EP-1 Program
MDS Electric Piano Electric Piano Model Types: 6 Oscillator Control Panel Control
Tine-type and reed-type electric pianos powered by Multi-Dimensional Synthesis (MDS), and vintage effects. Tine EP I, Tine EP II, Tone EP V, Tine EP DMP, Reed EP200, Reed EP200A Harmonic Sound Level, Attack Noise Level, Release Noise Level, Attack Brightness, Hammer Width Tine Type Reed Type Preamp Volume, Tone (Treble, Bass), Vibrate (On/Off, Intensity, Speed), Amp/Cabinet (On/Off, Drive) Preamp Volume, Tone (Treble, Bass), Vibrate (Intensity, Speed), Amp/Cabinet (On/Off, Drive)
Effect Types: 9 Combination Number of Timbres Master Keyboard Functionality Advanced Vector Synthesis Drum kit
Small Phase, Orange Phase, Clack Phase, Vintage Chorus, Black Chorus, EP Chorus, Vintage Flanger, Red Comp, VOX Wah 16 Maximum Keyboard and velocity splits, layers, and crossfades of up to 16 Programs and/or external MIDI devices. Control oscillator volumes and synthesis & effects parameters via the Vector Joystick and the tempo-synchronized Vector Envelope. 2,560 (1,536 or more preloaded [768 or more HD-1+768 or more EXi]) 1,792 (480 or more preloaded) 264 (78 or more preloaded) 128 set lists, 128 slots per set list
Assignable stereo/mono samples with 8 velocity zones per oscillator (with crossfade functions).
Number of User memory programs Programs/Combin User memory combinations ations/Drum kits User memory drum kits Set lists Number of set lists/slots
256 GM Level2 preset programs+ 9 GM Level 2 drum preset programs Each set list provides a 9-band graphic EQ, and a Tone Adjust function that allows program settings to be adjusted. Hold Time setting of Smooth Sound Transition (SST) supported for each slot. Sampling System Bit/Frequency Sampling time Samples Ripping Formats Editing Effects Insert Effects Master Effects Total Effects Timbre/Track EQ Effect Types Modulation Effects Control Busses Effect Presets KARMA KARMA Modules Generated Effects (GE) Controllers Open Sampling System (resampling, In-Track sampling) RAM: 16bit/48kHz Stereo/Mono Sampling Disk: 16 or 24 bit/48kHz RAM: Depends on the amount of available PCM RAM DISK: Maximum of 80 minutes stereo (879 MB: 16bit) 16,000 samples/4,000 multisamples (128 indexes per multisample) Direct sampling (ripping) from audio CD (CD-DA) Korg format, AKAI S1000/S3000 data (with advanced Program parameter conversion); SoundFont 2.0, AIFF, and WAVE formats Time Stretch, Time Slice, Crossfade Loop, and other standard editing features. 12, Stereo in / stereo out 2, Stereo in / stereo out 2, Stereo in / stereo out One 3-band EQ for each timbre/track 185 different Effects types (Any Effect type may be used for Insert, Master, or Total Effects.) Dynamic Modulation and Common LFO Stereo side-chaining for compressors, gates, vocoders, etc. 783, Maximum 32 per 1 effect (Preset User) One module in Program mode, four modules in Combination and Sequencer modes. 2,048 presets, 1,536 Users (96 come Preload) On/Off, Latch, Chord, Assign, Module, Control KARMA Realtime Control Sliders [1][8], KARMA Scene [1][8], KARMA Switches [1][8], KARMA Wave-Sequencing, GE Sub Category, Freeze Randomize, Time Signature Control, Tempo Synchronize Auto RTC (Real Time Control) setup Drum Track Preset patterns User patterns 697 preset (common with the preset patterns of the MIDI sequencer) 1,000 patterns Patterns created in Sequencer mode can be converted to drum track user patterns. 16-track MIDI sequencer + 16-track hard disk recorder + master track. 200 songs q /480 40.00300.00 (1/100 BPM resolution) 400,000 MIDI events (with MIDI data only) or 300,000 Audio events (with Audio data only) 16 tracks plus the master track 697 preset/100 user patterns (per song) 18 preset/16 user template songs Format: Korg (KRONOS, OASYS) format, SMF formats 0 and 1 16-track playback, 4-track simultaneous recording, WAV file format 16bit/24bit Automation: Volume, Pan, EQ, and Send1/2 10,000 regions (max.), Event Anchors, BPM Adjust RPPR (Realtime Pattern Play and Record): 1 Pattern set per song. Auto Song Setup function
Trigger Mode/Sync/Zone settings can be specified. Sequencer/HDR Tracks Number of Songs Resolution Tempo Maximum memory MIDI Tracks
Audio Tracks
Other Functions
269
Appendices
General
Load, save, utility, audio CD burning, audio CD playback, data filer function (save/load MIDI System Exclusive data), CD-R/RW (UDF format read/write), ISO9660 Level 1 Vector joystick, joystick, ribbon controller, switches 1 & 2 Control Surface Control Assign Switches: Assigns the Control Surface to Timber/Track, Audio, External, Realtime Knobs/KARMA, Tone Adjust/EQ Mixer Knobs Switch: Assigns the Mixer Knobs to either Channel Strip or Individual Pan, Reset Control Switch, Solo Switch, Knobs 1-8, Switches 1-8 (Upper Row), Switches 1-8 (Lower Row), Sliders 1-8, Master Slider KARMA Control: On/Off, Latch, Chord Assign, Module Control Switches = ON/OFF, LATCH, MODULE CONTROL Switches = ON/OFF
KARMA Controller Section DRUM TRACK Controller Section Display Principal specifications Frequency response THD+N Dynamic range Crosstalk Audio Outputs (Analog) AUDIO OUTPUT (MAIN) L/MONO, R AUDIO OUTPUT (INDIVIDUAL) 14
TouchView graphical user interface, 8 inch TFT, SVGA (800x600 dots), adjustable brightness. 20 Hz22 kHz 1.0 dB, 10 k load 20 Hz22 kHz 0.01 %, 10 k load (typical) 95 dB (typical) 95 dB, at 1 kHz (typical) 1/4 TRS balanced Output Impedance: 170 stereo; 85 mono (L/Mono only) Nominal Level: +4.0 dBu Maximum Level: +16.0 dBu Load Impedance: 600
or greater
MAIN VOLUME knob controls only AUDIO OUTPUT (MAIN) L/MONO and R Headphones 1/4 stereo phone jack Output Impedance: 33 Maximum Level: 60+60 mW @33 MAIN VOLUME knob (link with AUDIO OUTPUT (MAIN)) Optical S/P DIF (Digital) Format: 24 bit, S/P DIF IEC60958 EIAJCP-1201 Sample Rate: 48 kHz Digital output of the same signals as AUDIO OUTPUT (MAIN) L/MONO and R USB B Format: 24 bit Sample Rate: 48 kHz 2 channels (Digital output of the same signals as AUDIO OUTPUT (MAIN) L/MONO and R) Audio Inputs (Analog) Audio inputs 1, 2 1/4 TRS balanced MIC/LINE input level switches, LEVEL knobs Input Impedance: 10 k Nominal Level: LINE +4 dBu (LEVEL knob = min), 36 dBu (LEVEL knob = max) Nominal Level: MIC 22 dBu (LEVEL knob = min), 62 dBu (LEVEL knob = max) Maximum Level: LINE +16 dBu (LEVEL knob = min), 24 dBu (LEVEL knob = max) Maximum Level: MIC 10 dBu (LEVEL knob = min), 50 dBu (LEVEL knob = max) Source Impedance: 600 Signal to noise ratio: 95 dB (typical) Dynamic range: 95 dB (typical) Crosstalk: 95 dB, at 1 kHz (typical) (Digital) Optical S/P DIF USB B Format: 24 bit, S/P DIF IEC60958 EIAJCP-1201 Sample Rate: 48 kHz Format: 24 bit Sample Rate: 48 kHz 2 channels Control Inputs MIDI USB DAMPER (half damper supported) ASSIGNABLE SWITCH, ASSIGNABLE PEDAL IN, OUT, THRU USB A (TYPE A) x 2 USB B (TYPE B) x 1 For connection to external USB MIDI and storage devices MIDI/audio interface MIDI: 1 (16 channel) input / 1 (16 channel) output Audio: 2 channel input / 2 channel output
2 USB 2.0 High-Speed ports (supports 480 Mbps) Disk Drive Power 30 GB SSD (2.5") AC Power Supply terminal, POWER On/Off switch
270
Specifications
Hardware
Dimensions (W x D x H)
88-key: 57.28" x 16.18" x 5.71" / 1,455 x 411 x 145 mm 73-key: 48.94" x 16.18" x 5.71" / 1,243 x 411 x 145 mm 61-key: 41.42" x 14.25" x 5.28" / 1,052 x 362 x 134 mm
Weight
88-key: 50.71 lbs. / 23.0 kg 73-key: 44.75 lbs. / 20.3 kg 61-key: 27.56 lbs. / 12.5 kg
60W AC cord, Quick Start Guide, Accessory DVD Disc 1, 2 (DVDs include KRONOS Operation Guide, Parameter Guide, and Voice Name List PDF files; Video Manual; KORG USB-MIDI Driver; System Restore Data, etc.)
Options
Hardware Expression/Volume Pedal Foot Controller Damper Pedal Pedal Switch Other Software XVP-10 EXP-2 DS-1H PS-1, PS-3 MIDI Cable
*Appearanceandspecificationsofthisproductare subjecttochangewithoutnotice.
271
Appendices
272
Specifications
[Music Workstation] KRONOS Function Basic Channel Mode Default Changed Memorized Messages Altered 0 127 True Voice Note On Note Off Polyphonic (Key) Monophonic (Channel) 9n, V=1 127 8n, V=1 64
Date : 2011. 1. 18
All note numbers 0127 can be transmitted by the KARMA function or as sequence data Sequencer does not record Note Off velocity. Polyphonic aftertouch transmitted only as sequence data *A *A *C *P Bank Select (MSB, LSB) Joystick (+Y, Y), Ribbon, Value Slider *C Pedal, Portamento Time, Volume, IFX pan, Pan *C Expression, Effect Control 1, 2 *C Damper, Portamento Sw., Sostenuto, Soft *C Sound (Realtime Knobs 14: 74, 71, 79, 72) *C Switch 1, 2, Foot Switch, Controller *C Send 1, 2, Effect ON/OFF (IFXs, MFXs, TFXs) *C KARMA Controllers *C, *2 Pad18, Vector Joystick (X, Y) *C, *2 Data Entry, Increment, Decrement *C NRPN (LSB, MSB), RPN (LSB, MSB) *C, *3 Realtime Knobs 58 VJS Assign *C Seq. Data, KARMA GE data output *C (Seq when received) External Mode (Knobs, SWs, Sliders) *C, *4 All Sound Off, Reset All Controllers *C
Pitch Bend 0, 32 1, 2, 16, 18 4, 5, 7, 8, 10 11, 12, 13 64, 65, 66, 67 70 79 Control 80, 81, 82, 83 Change 93, 91, 92, 94, 95 14, 22 31, 102 109 110 117, 118, 119 6, 38, 96, 97 98, 99, 100, 101 0 119 0 119 0 119 120, 121 Program Change 0 127 Variable Range 0 127 0 127
*P *E, *5 *1 *1 *1 *1
System Exclusive System Common System Real Time Aux Messages Song Position Song Select Tune Clock Command Local On/Off All Notes Off Active Sense Reset 123 127
0 127
0 127
Notes *P, *A, *C, *E: Transmitted/received when Global P1: MIDI Filter (Program Change, After Touch, Control Change, Exclusive) is Enable, respectively. *1: When Global P1: MIDI Clock is Internal, transmitted but not received. The opposite for External MIDI. *2: Valid if assigned as a MIDI control change in Global P2 Controller. The number shown here is the CC default assignment. *3: RPN (LSB,MSB)=00,00: Pitch bend range, 01,00: Fine tune, 02,00: Coarse tune *4: Valid if assigned as a MIDI control change in Global P1: External 1, 2 *5: In addition to Korg exclusive messages, Inquiry, GM System On, Master Volume, Master Balance, Master Fine Tune, and Master Coarse Tune are supported.
: Yes : No
273
Appendices
274